Choices
LYCOMING COLLEGE
1 he mission of Lycoming College is to provide a
distinguished baccalaureate education in the liberal
arts. This is achieved within a coeducational,
supportive, residential setting through programs that
develop communication and critical thinking skills;
foster self -awareness while increasing receptivity to
new concepts and perspectives; explore literary and
scientific traditions; cultivate an aesthetic sensibility;
elicit social responsibility; promote racial inclusive-
ness, gender equality, and an appreciation of cultural
diversity; and produce leadership for the institutions of
society. Each student is encouraged to develop and
strengthen virtues and traits of character that enable,
ennoble, and emancipate the human spirit while
deepening commitment to those values that undergird
civilization.
Contents
Academic Calendar, 1991-1992 2
Welcome to Lycoming 4
The Academic Program
The Curriculum 36
Student Services 137
Admission 140
Financial Matters 144
The Campus 154
Directory 157
Administrative Staff/Faculty 159
The Alumni Association 173
Index 175
The general regulations and policies stated in
this catalog are in effect for the 1991-1992
academic year. Students beginning their first
term at Lycoming College in the fall of 1991
or the spring of 1992 are thereafter governed
by the policies stated in this catalog. Re-
quirements governing a student's major are
those in effect at the time a major is formally
declared and officially accepted by the major
department.
If changes are made in subsequent editions of
the catalog to either general requirements or
major requirements, students may be permit-
ted the option of following their original
program or a subsequent catalog version, but
the College always reserves the right to
determine which requirements apply.
If a student interrupts his or her education
without a leave of absence, the catalog
requirements in effect at the time of
readmission will apply. Students on an
approved leave of absence retain the same
requirements they had when they entered, if
their leaves do not extend beyond one year.
Lycoming College reserves the right to
amend or change the policies and procedures
stated in this catalog without prior notice to
those who may be affected by them. The
provisions of this publication are not to be
regarded as an irrevocable contract between
the applicant and/or the student and
Lycoming College.
/
▲
Academic Calendar
1991 - 1992
Fall Semester
Spring Semester
Bills are due
August 12
December 13
Orientation of new faculty
August 22
Residence halls open 8 a.m. for freshmen
August 23
Residence halls open 8 a.m. for upperclassman
August 25
January 5
Faculty available for advising
August 26
Classes begin first period
August 27
January 6
Processing of drop/add begins
August 27
January 6
Re-registration fee of $25 applies
after this date
September 2
January 10
Last day for drop/add
September 2
January 10
Last day to elect audit and pass/fail grades
September 2
January 10
Last day for submission of final grades for
courses for which Incomplete grades were
recorded in Spring, May, and Summer terms
October 7
Last day for submission of final grades
for courses for which Incomplete
grades were recorded in fall semester
February 14
Mid- semester deficiency reports due
in Registrar's Office at noon
October 14
February 21
Residence halls close at 9 p.m. for
spring recess
February 28
Residence halls open at 8 a.m.
March 8
Classes resume first period after
spring recess
March 9
Preregistration for students who have
completed at least one semester
November 5, 6, 7
Preregistration for sophomores and juniors
March 25 - 26
A
Fall Semester
Spring Semester
Preregistration for freshmen
November 13, 14, 15
April 1 -2
Last day to withdraw from courses
November 18
April 3
Residence halls close at 9:00 p.m. for
Thanksgiving recess
November 26
Residence halls open at 8 a.m.
December 1
Classes resume first period after
Thanksgiving
December 2
Final examinations begin
December 9
April 20
Semester ends at 5:00 p.m.
December 13
April 24
Residence halls close at 9:00 p.m.
December 13
April 24
May term
Summer term
Residence halls open at 8 a.m.
May 3
May 31
Classes begin
May 4
June 1
Last day for drop/add
May 5
June 3
Last day to elect audit and pass/fail grades
May 5
June 3
Last day to withdraw from course
May 22
June 26
Term ends
May 29
July 10
Residence halls close at 4:00 p.m.
May 29
July 10
Special dates to remember:
Freshman Seminar August 23, 24, 25
Freshman Convocation August 23
All College Carnival August 31
Labor Day (classes in session). . September 2
Long Weekend
(classes suspended) October 4, 5, 6
Homecoming Weekend. . October 11, 12, 13
Admissions Open House September 28
Parents Weekend November 1 , 2, 3
Admissions Open House October 26
Thanksgiving
recess November 26 - December 1
Spring recess February 28 - March 8
Honors Convocation April 5
Good Friday
(afternoon classes suspended) April 17
Baccalaureate May 2
Commencement May 3
Memorial Day (no classes) May 25
Independence Day (no classes) July 3
A
Welcome To
Lycoming College
l^ycoming College is an independent,
coeducational institution dedicated to provid-
ing the type of learning that can be used for a
lifetime - the liberal arts and sciences.
Lycoming's principal aim is to help
students develop a central core of integrated
values, skill, information, and strategies
while they learn to communicate, reason,
make decisions, understand, and use their
imagination. This type of education can lead
to productive and fulfilling lives in many
fields while encouraging optimum personal
growth and development.
Lycoming awards bachelor of arts degrees
in 31 major fields, a bachelor of fine arts
degree in sculpture , and a bachelor of
science degree in nursing. Because it is built
upon the two principles of the liberal arts
known as distribution and concentration,
students study in breadth and depth through-
out a challenging curriculum.
Students who have special interests not
met entirely by a major field can design their
own majors. Or, if they are interested in
teaching, medicine, law, dentistry, or the
ministry, they can take courses needed to
enter their advanced study.
Students also can study engineering,
forestry or environmental studies, podiatric
medicine, optometry, medical technology,
and sculpture through cooperative programs
operated by Lycoming with other colleges
and universities. Or, they can study abroad
or in Philadelphia, PA., Washington, D.C., or
New York City through other off-campus
study opportunities.
Most students complete their program of
study in four years, usually by taking four
courses each fall and spring semester.
Students can take one course during Lycom-
ing's May term, or two courses during the
summer term as well.
Recognizing students' concerns about
careers, Lycoming offers extensive counsel-
ing through the Career Development Center
and advisory committees for prelaw, the
health professions, and premedical students.
The College also operates a diverse intern-
ship program which allows students to earn
academic credit while working at area
businesses, government offices, and nonprofit
organizations.
Lycoming's ratio of students to faculty is
14 to one, which means that most classes are
small and there is abundant opportunity for
A
individual attention. All faculty members
teach. More than 80 percent of Lycoming's
faculty hold the highest degree in their fields
from the nation's outstanding colleges and
universities. Lycoming has been recognized
nationally for the quaUty and commitment of
its teaching faculty.
Nineteen buildings sit on Lycoming's
main campus. Modem facilities include
eight residence halls; the library; the Aca-
demic Center, which houses the Arena
Theatre, planetarium, computer center, and
art gallery; the student union; the physical
education/recreation center, including a six-
lane, 25 yard pool; a completely renovated
fine arts center with excellent facilities to
accommodate sculpture, painting, drawing,
printmaking, ceramics and photography;
and a music building, which houses individ-
ual practice rooms and an electronic-music
studio.
Opened in 1990, the Heim Biology and
Chemistry Building is one of the finest
undergraduate science facilities in the East.
The three-level structure totals more than
63,000 square feet and contains state-of-the-
art biology and chemistry laboratories,
lecture and seminar rooms, reading and
research areas and a greenhouse, as well as
classrooms and faculty offices.
Lycoming houses approximately 900 of
its 1 ,275 students in the residence halls,
which include double and single rooms.
Most students find the campus friendly and
comfortable, with all of the buildings easy to
reach from anywhere on campus. Lycoming
has a diverse student body. Most students
call Pennsylvania, New Jersey, or New York
their home. The college expects students to
work together in an atmosphere of respect
and tolerance.
The College offers a variety of extracur-
ricular activities. Recent Artist Series events
have included the Broadway Musicals Into
the Woods and Big River. The Pilobolus
Dance Theatre, The Northeastern Philhar-
monic, Intimate P.D.Q. Bach, and The New
York City Opera National Company have all
performed recently at the college. Admission
to all Artist Series events is free for Lycom-
ing students. Student government groups
help to plan activities and social events.
Recent major campus concerts have included
REO Speedwagon, Richard Marx, and Robert
Palmer. Numerous clubs, honor societies,
social fraternities and sororities, the student
newspaper, yearbook and literary magazine,
and the band and widely acclaimed choir
meet other student interests. Students who
like to perform or compete can act on the
Arena Theatre stage or play on intercollegiate
or intramural sports teams. Intercollegiate
teams for men include football, soccer,
basketball, wrestling, tennis, golf, swimming,
track and field, and cross country. Intercolle-
giate teams for women include basketball,
tennis, field hockey, swimming, track and
field, cross country, and softball.
In addition, students who like hiking,
backpacking, skiing, camping, fishing, hunt-
ing, kayaking, spelunking, and other outdoor
sports will find Lycoming's location ideal.
A
Lycoming is situated on a slight promi-
nence near downtown Williamsport, a small
city nestled along the West Branch of the
Susquehanna River in northcentral Pennsyl-
vania's rolling hills and valleys. The College
is within a four-hour drive of metropohtan
centers such as New York City,
Philadelphia, Pittsburgh, Washington, D.C.,
Baltimore, Syracuse, Rochester and the New
Jersey shore points. The Williamsport metro
area is home to about 75,000 persons.
Lycoming enjoys a relationship with The
United Methodist Church. It supports the
Methodist tradition of providing an education
for persons of all faiths.
Fully accredited, Lycoming is a member
of the Middle States Association of Colleges
and Schools, and the University Senate of
The United Methodist Church. It is a
member of the Association of American
Colleges, the Pennsylvania Association of
Colleges and Universities, the Commission
for Independent Colleges and Universities,
the National Commission on Accrediting, and
the National Association of Schools and
Colleges of The United Methodist Church.
History
Lycoming College was founded in
1812 as the Williamsport Academy, an ele-
mentary and secondary school. Thirty- six
years later, the academy became the Wil-
liamsport Dickinson Seminary under the
patronage of The Methodist Episcopal
Church. The seminary operated as a private
boarding school until 1929, when a college
curriculum was added and it became the
Williamsport Dickinson Seminary and Junior
College. In 1947, the junior college became
a four-year degree-granting college of
liberal arts and sciences. It adopted the
name Lycoming, derived from the Indian
word "lacomic," meaning "Great Stream."
The word Lycoming has been common
to northcentral Pennsylvania since
colonial days.
Academic
Program
The Bachelor Of
Arts Degree
L/ycoming is committed to the principle
that a liberal arts education is the best hope
for an enlightened citizenry. Consequently,
the bachelor of arts degree is conferred upon
the student who has completed an educa-
tional program incorporating the two prin-
ciples of the liberal arts known as distribution
and concentration. The objective of the
distribution principle is to insure that the
student achieves breadth in learning through
the study of the major dimensions of human
inquiry: the humanities, the social sciences,
and the natural sciences. The objective of the
concentration principle is to provide depth of
learning through completion of a program of
study in a given discipline or subject area
known as the major.
Requirements For The
Bachelor Of Arts Degree
rLvery degree candidate is expected to
complete the following requirements in order
to qualify for graduation:
• complete the distribution program.
t complete Writing Across the Curriculum
Program requirements.
• complete a major consisting of at least
eight courses while achieving a minimum
grade point average of 2.0 in those courses.
• earn one year of credit in physical educa-
tion. Athletic training courses may count
towards this requirement All students
must demonstrate competence in swim-
ming. (Medical exemptions may be
granted by the College physician after an
examination and review of the student's
medical history and family physician's
report.)
• pass a minimum of 32 units (128 semester
hours) with a minimum cumulative average
of 2.0. Additional credits beyond 128
semester hours may be completed pro-
vided the minimum 2.0 cumulative average
is maintained.
• complete in residence the final eight
courses offered for the degree at Lycoming.
• satisfy all financial obligations incurred at
the College.
• complete the above requirements within
seven years of continuous enrollment
following the date of matriculation.
All exemptions or waivers of specific
requirements are made by the Committee on
Academic Standards.
A
The Bachelor Of
Fine Arts Degree
1 he bachelor of fine arts degree is spe-
cifically designed to train professional artists.
The BFA in sculpture is a synthesis of three
diverse forms of education: a studio art
program that emphasizes the skills and
concepts of the visual language, an appren-
ticeship that takes technical expertise as the
departure point, and the scholastic method
employed in both art history and the general-
education component.
Requirements For
The Bachelor Of Fine
Arts Degree
li/very BFA degree candidate is expected
to complete the following requirements in
order to qualify for graduation:
• complete the 12-course Art Department
course of study, while achieving a mini-
mum grade point average of 2.0 in
these courses.
• complete the distribution program.
• complete Writing Across the Curriculum
Program requirements.
• pass a minimum of 32 units (128 semester
hours) with a minimum cumulative average
of 2.0 in these courses.
• complete one of the field specialization
apprenticeships at the Johnson Atelier
Technical Institute of Sculpture.
• earn one year of credit in physical educa-
tion. Athletic training courses may count
towards this requirement All students
must demonstrate comj)etence in swim-
ming. (Medical exemptions may be grant-
ed by the College physician after an exami-
nation and review of the student's medi-
cal history and family physician's report.)
complete in residence the final eight
• courses offered for the degree at
Lycoming.
• satisfy all financial obligations incurred at
the College.
• have a public exhibition of original art
work and make an oral defense.
The Bachelor Of Science
In Nursing Degree
1 he program of study leading to the
bachelor of science in nursing degree is
designed to prepare men and women as
beginning practitioners of professional
nursing, qualified for first-level positions in a
variety of health settings and for graduate
study in nursing. Upon satisfactory comple-
tion of the program, a graduate is eligible to
write the State Board of Nursing examination
for licensure as a registered nurse. The goal
of the program is to develop a liberally
educated and self-directed individual who is
prepared to contribute to the welfare of the
nation through the practice of professional
nursing which supports the promotion and
restoration of health of individuals and
families in a variety of settings.
Requirements For The
Bachelor Of Science In
Nursing Degree
rLvery BSN degree candidate is expected
to complete the following requirements in
order to qualify for graduation:
• complete the 13 -course major with a
minimum cumulative average of 2.0, in-
cluding the required May term following
the junior year.
« complete the distribution requirements for
the BSN degree.
• complete Writing Across the Curriculum
Program requirements.
• complete a minimum of 32 units (128
semester hours) with a minimum cumula-
tive average of 2.0.
• earn one year of credit in physical educa-
tion. Athletic training courses may count
A
towards this requirement. All students
must demonstrate competence in swim-
ming. (Medical exemptions may be
granted by the College physician after an
examination and review of the student's
medical history and family physician's
report.)
• complete in residence the final eight
courses offered for the degree at
Lycoming.
• satisfy all financial obligations incurred at
the College.
• complete the degree requirements within a
five-year period after admission to the
nursing major. Candidates who are unable
to meet this requirement must petition for
an extension.
Writing Across The
Curriculum Program
I. Purpose
The Lycoming College Writing Across
the Curriculum Program has been developed
in response to the conviction that writing skill
promotes intellectual growth and is a hall-
mark of the educated person. The program
has therefore been designed to achieve two
major, interrelated objectives:
(1) to enhance student learning in general
and subject mastery in particular, and
(2) to develop students' abilities to com-
municate clearly. In this program students
are given opportunities to write in a variety
of contexts and in a substantial number of
courses, in which they receive faculty
guidance and reinforcement
II. Program Requirements
In order to graduate from Lycoming all
students must complete the following writing
requirements:
A. English 049 (Developmental Reading
and Writing) or exemption from the course.
B. English 106 (Composition) and one
other English course.
C. A writing component in all distribution
courses completed at Lycoming.
D. Two courses designated as writing-
intensive, or "W" courses.
(1) Successful completion of English 106
is a prerequisite for enrollment in writ-
ing-intensive courses.
(2) All courses designated "W" are
numbered 2(X) or above.
(3) Each student must complete one "W"
course from among those offered by the
major department, or, with department
approval, from a related department.
The other "W" course completed must
be from a department other than the
major department. In the case of
students with multiple majors, one "W"
course must be completed from one of
those majors. The second course may be
taken in one of the student's other
majors.
(4) Students should take one "W" course
during the sophomore year and one
during the junior year - though other
sequences are possible and may in
certain circumstances be advisable.
(5) A writing intensive course may not
duplicate a course taken to satisfy II. B.
The Distribution Program
A course can be used to satisfy only one
distribution requirement. Courses for which
a grade of "P" is recorded may not be used
toward the fulfillment of the distribution
requirements, (Refer to page 16 & 17 for an
explanation of the grading system.) A course
in any of the following distribution require-
ments refers to a full-unit (four semester
hours) course taken at Lycoming, any
appropriate combination of fractional unit
courses taken at Lycoming which accumulate
to four semester hours, or any single course
of three or more semester hours transferred
from another institution. For the BSN
degree, see special modified distribution re-
quirements on page 11.
A
English - Students are required to demon-
strate competence in basic writing skills and
to pass English 106 and one other unit of
English. Competence in basic writing skills
may be demonstrated either by exemption
from English 049 through placement in
English 106 or by earning a Pass in English
049. The placement test in English is
designed for placement purposes only and
may not be used to exempt a student from re-
peating English 049 should the student earn a
Fail in the course. A student must demon-
strate this competence before being permitted
to enroll in English 106. Unless impossible
because of failure to complete English 049,
English 106 MUST be taken during the
freshman year; English 106 or consent of
instructor is required before enrolling in any
other English course. Students may choose
any course from the department's offerings to
satisfy the requirement for another unit in
English.
Foreign Language or Mathematics - Stu-
dents are required to meet a minimum basic
requirement in either a foreign language or
the mathematical sciences.
FOREIGN LANGUAGE - Students may
choose from among French, German, or
Spanish and are required to pass two courses
on the intermediate or higher course level.
Placement at the appropriate course level will
be determined by the faculty of the Depart-
ment of Foreign Languages and Literatures.
Students who have completed two or more
years of a given language in high school are
not admitted for credit to the elementary
course in the same foreign language except
by written permission of the chairman of the
department.
MATHEMATICS - Students are required to
demonstrate competence in basic algebra and
to pass three units of Mathematical science
other than Mathematics 005. Competence in
basic algebra may be demonstrated either by
passing the basic algebra section of the
Mathematics Placement Examination or by
passing Mathematics 005. By demonstrating
higher competence on the Mathematics
Placement Examination, students may reduce
the requirement to two units of mathematical
science. No more than one unit may be taken
in computer science.
The Mathematics Placement Examination
may be scheduled a maximum of three times,
only one of which may be after matriculation.
A retest fee of $25 will be charged for each
private test administration.
Religion or Philosophy - Students are
required to pass two courses in either religion
or philosophy. Any two religion courses may
be used to fulfill the philosophy/religion
distribution requirement, with this exception:
only one course from the combination
Religion 120-121 may be selected for
distribution.
Fine Arts - Students are required to pass two
courses as indicated in art, literature, music,
or theatre.
ART - Any two courses.
LITERATURE - Any two literature courses
selected from the offerings of the Depart-
ments of English and Foreign Languages and
Literatures (French, German or Spanish).
MUSIC - Any combination of eight (8)
credits, including applied music, ensemble,
and music department courses.
THEATRE - The fine arts distribution
requirement may be satisfied by selecting any
two of the following courses: Theatre 100,
110, 140, 148, 332, 333, or other courses
with the consent of the instructor.
Natural Science - Students are required to
pass any two courses as indicated in one of
the following disciplines: astronomy and
physics, except Astr 114 and 115; biology; or
chemistry.
A
History and Social Science - Students are re-
quired to pass two courses as indicated in
economics, history, political science, psy-
chology or sociology/anthropology.
ECONOMICS. Any two courses.
HISTORY. Any two courses, except
History 222.
POUTICAL SCIENCE. Any two courses.
PSYCHOLOGY. Psychology 110 and one
other course, except Psychology 101.
SOCIOLOGY I ANTHROPOLOGY. Sociol-
ogy/Anthropology 110 plus another course.
The Distribution Program
For The BSN Degree
English - Same as A.B. degree.
Mathematical Sciences - competence in
basic algebra as demonstrated by completion
of, or exemption from Math 005; Mathemat-
ics 103; and Computer Science 108, 125, or
Mathematics 214.
Religion and Philosophy - Religion 120 and
Philosophy 219.
Fine Arts/Foreign Language - two courses
from one department as follows:
ART - Any two courses.
LITERATURE - Any two literature coiu"ses
selected from the deparmients of English and
Foreign Languages and Literatures.
MUSIC - Any combination of eight (8)
credits, including applied music, ensemble,
and music department courses.
THEATRE. - Any two courses from among
Theatre 100, 1 10, 140,148, 332, 333, or other
courses with the consent of the instructor.
LANGUAGE - Any two courses at the
intermediate or higher level. No student who
has had two or more years of a given foreign
language in high school shall be admitted to
the elementary courses in that same language
for credit, except by written permission of the
chairman of the department.
Natural Science - Chemistry 108, 115.
Social Science - Psychology 1 10 and 1 17;
Sociology and Anthropology — one from
among Soc 1 10, 1 14, 220, 222, 224, 227,
228,229, 331, 334 and 335.
The Major
»Students are required to complete a
series of courses in one departmental or inter-
disciplinary (established or individual) major.
Specific course requirements for each major
offered by the College are listed in the
curriculum section of this catalog. Students
must earn a 2.0 or higher grade-point average
in those courses stipulated as comprising the
major. Students must declare a major by the
beginning of their junior year. Departmental
and established interdisciplinary majors are
declared in the Office of the Registrar, where
as individual interdisciplinary majors must be
approved by the Committee on Curriculum
Development. Students may complete more
than one major, each of which will be
recorded on the transcript. Students may be
removed from major status if they are not
making satisfactory progress in the major.
This action is taken by the Dean of the
College upon the recommendation of the
department, coordinating committee (for
established interdisciplinary majors), or
Curriculum Development Committee (for
individual interdisciplinary majors). The
decision of the Dean of the College may be
appealed to the Academic Standards Com-
mittee by the student involved or the recom-
mending department or committee.
A
Departmental Majors - Departmental
majors are available in the following areas:
Accounting
Art History
Art Studio
Astronomy
Biology
Business Administration
Chemistry
Computer Science
Economics
English
Foreign Languages, and Literatures
French, German, Spanish
History
Mass Communication
Mathematics
Music
Nursing
Philosophy
Physics
Political Science
Psychology
Religion
Sociology/ Anthropology
Theatre
Established Interdisciplinary Majors - The
following established interdisciplinary majors
include course work in two or more depart-
ments:
Accounting-Mathematical Sciences
American Studies
Criminal Justice
International Studies
Literature
Near East Culture and Archaeology
Individual Interdisciplinary Majors - Stu-
dents may design a major that is unique to
their needs and objectives and which com-
bines course work in more than one depart-
ment. This major is developed in consulta-
tion with the student's faculty advisor and
with a panel of faculty members from each of
the sponsoring departments. The application
is acted upon by the Curriculum Develop-
ment Committee. The major normally
consists of 10 courses beyond those taken to
satisfy the distribution requirements. Stu-
dents are expected to complete at least six
courses at the junior or senior level. Ex-
amples of individual interdisciplinary majors
are Racial and Cultural Minorities, Illustra-
tion in the Print Medium, Environmental
Law, Advertising, Art/Business, Human
Behavior and Images of Man.
Major in Sculpture Leading to
Bachelor of Fine Arts Degree - Through a
cooperative program with the Johnson Atelier
Technical Institute of Sculpture, Mercerville,
New Jersey, students may earn a BFA degree
in sculpture. The major consists of a core
academic program, a course of study in art,
elective courses, and an apprenticeship at the
Johnson Atelier.
The Minor
1 he College awards two kinds of minors,
departmental and interdisciplinary, in
recognition of concentrated course work
in an area other than the student's major.
All minors are subject to the following
limitations:
• a minor must include at least two courses
which are not counted in the student's
major,
• a student may receive at most two minors.
• students with two majors may receive only
one minor; students with three majors may
not receive a minor.
• students may not receive a minor in their
major discipline unless their major disci-
pline is Art and the minor is Art History.
(A discipline is any course of study in
which a student can major. Tracks within
majors are not separate disciplines.)
A
• a student may not receive a minor unless
his average in the courses which count for
his minor is a minimum of 2.00.
• courses taken P/F may not be counted
toward a minor.
Students must declare their intention to
minor by signing a form available in the
Registrar's Office, obtaining required faculty
signatures, and returning the completed form
to the Office of the Registrar.
When students complete a minor, the title
will be indicated on their official transcript.
Students must meet the requirements for the
minor which are in effect at the time they
declare a minor or which are in effect
subsequent to that time before they graduate.
Departmental Minors - Requirements for a
departmental minor vary from department to
department. Students interested in pursuing a
departmental minor should consult that
department for its policy regarding minors.
Departmental minors are available in the
following areas:
ACCOUNTING
Financial Accounting
Managerial Accounting
Federal Income Tax
ART
Art History
Commercial Design
Painting
Photography
Sculpture
ASTRONOMY
BIOLOGY
BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
Marketing
Finance
CHEMISTRY
ECONOMICS
ENGLISH
Literature
Writing
FOREIGN LANGUAGES
AND LITERATURES
French
German
Spanish
HISTORY
American History
European History
History
MASS COMMUNICATION
MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES
Computer Science
Mathematics
PHILOSOPHY
Philosophy
Philosophy and Law
Philosophy and Science
The History of Philosophy
PHYSICS
POLITICAL SCIENCE
Political Science
Foreign Affairs
Legal Studies
PSYCHOLOGY
RELIGION
A
SOCIOLOGY/ANTHROPOLOGY
THEATRE
Theatre History & Literature
Performance
Technical Theatre
Interdisciplinary Minors - Interdisciplinary
minors include course work in two or more
departments. Students interested in interdis-
ciplinary minors should consult the faculty
coordinator of that minor. Interdisciplinary
minors are available in the following areas:
BIBLICAL LANGUAGES, CRIMINAL
JUSTICE, MASS COMMUNICATION, and
WOMEN'S STUDIES.
Academic Advisement
One advantage of a small college is
the direct, personal contact between a
student and the College faculty who care
about that student's personal, academic,
and professional aspirations. The student
can draw upon their years of experience
to resolve questions about social adjust-
ment, workload, study skills, tutoring and
more. Perhaps the member of the faculty
with the most impact on a student is the
academic advisor.
The freshman advisor, whom the
student meets at summer orientation,
assists with course selection by providing
accurate information about requirements
and programs and with personal adjust-
ment by helping the student discover life
and career goals. In addition, the advisor
will refer students to other campus
resources whenever the need is apparent.
During the sophomore year, the
student will choose a major and select an
advisor from the major department. The
new advisor, while serving as a resource,
can best advise that student about course
selection and career opportunities.
A
Advisors at Lycoming endeavor to
contribute to our students' development
in yet another way. We insist that
students assume full responsibility for
their decisions and academic progress.
By doing so, we help to prepare them for
the harder choices and responsibilities of
the professional world.
Also, Lycoming provides special
advising programs for careers in medi-
cine, law and religion. Interested students
should register with the appropriate
advisory committee immediately after
deciding to enter one of these professions.
Preparation for Educational
Professions - Lycoming College believes
that the liberal arts provide the best
preparation for future teachers, thus all
education students complete a liberal arts
major in addition to the Lycoming
College Teacher Education Certificate re-
quirements. Students can be certified in
elementary education or one or more of
the following secondary areas: art (K-12),
biology, chemistry, English, French,
general science (with biology or astron-
omy/physics tracks), German, mathemat-
ics, music (K-12), physics, social studies,
and Spanish. All teacher-education
programs are approved by the Pennsylva-
nia Department of Education. Pennsylva-
nia certificates are recognized in most
other states either through reciprocal
agreements or by transcript evaluation.
Preparation for Health Professions -
The program of pre-professional educa-
tion for the health professions (allopathic,
dental, osteopathic, podiatric and veteri-
nary medicine, optometry, and pharmacy)
is organized around a sound foundation in
biology, chemistry, mathematics, and
physics and a wide range of subject matter
from the humanities, social sciences, and fine
arts. At least three years of undergraduate
study is recommended before entry into a
professional school; the normal procedure is
to complete the bachelor of arts degree.
Students interested in one of the health
professions or in an allied health career
should make their intentions known to the
admissions office when applying and to the
Health Professions Advisory Committee
(HPAC) during their first semester. This
committee advises students concerning
preparation for and application to health-
professions schools. All pre-health profes-
sions students are invited to join the student
Pre-Health Professions Association. (See
also descriptions of the nursing program
and of the cooperative programs in
podiatric medicine, optometry, and medical
technology.)
Preparation for Legal Professions -
Lycoming offers a strong preparation for
students interested in law as a profession.
Admission to law school is not predicated
upon a particular major or area of study;
rather, a student is encouraged to design a
course of study (traditional or interdiscipli-
nary major) which is of personal interest and
significance. While no specific major is rec-
ommended, there are certain skills of particu-
lar relevance to the pre-law student: clear
writing, analytical thinking, and reading
comprehension. These skills should be
developed during the undergraduate years.
Pre-law students should register with the
Legal Professions Advisory Committee
(LPAC) upon entering Lycoming and should
join the Pre-Law Society on campus. LPAC
assists the pre-law student through advise-
ment, compilation of recommendations, and
dissemination of information and materials
about law and the legal profession. The Pre-
Law Society has sponsored films, speakers,
and field trips, including visits to law
school campuses.
Preparation for Theological Professions -
The Theological Professions Advisory
Committee (TPAC) acts as a "center" for
students, faculty, and clergy to discuss the
needs of students who want to prepare them-
selves for the ministry, religious education,
advanced training in religion, or related
vocations. Also, it may help coordinate
internships for students who desire practical
experience in the parish ministry or related
areas. Upon entering Lycoming, students
should register with TPAC if they plan to
investigate the religious vocations.
In general, students preparing to attend a
theological seminary should examine the
suggestions set down by the Association of
Theological Schools (available from TPAC).
Recommended is a broad program in the
liberal arts, a major in one of the humanities
(English, history, languages, literature,
philosophy, religion) or one of the social
sciences (American studies, criminal justice,
economics, international studies, political
science, psychology, sociology-anthropol-
ogy), and a variety of electives. Students
preparing for a career in religious education
should major in religion and elect five or six
courses in psychology, education and
sociology. This program of study will
qualify students to work as an educational
assistant or a director of religious education
after graduate study in a theological
seminary.
Registration
LIuring the registration period, students
select their courses for the next semester and
register their course selections in the Office
of the Registrar. Course selection is made in
consultation with the student's faculty
advisor in order to insure that the course
schedule is consistent with College require-
ments and student goals. After the registra-
tion period, any change in the student's
course schedule must be approved by both
the faculty advisor and Office of the
A
Registrar. Students may not receive credit
for courses in which they are not formally
registered.
During the first five days of classes,
students may drop any course without any
record of such enrollment appearing on
the permanent record, and they may add any
course that is not closed. Students wishing to
drop a course between the fifth day and the
12th week of classes must secure a with-
drawal form from the Office of the Registrar.
Withdrawal grades are not computed in the
grade point average. Students may not
withdraw from courses after the 12th week of
a semester and the comparable period during
the May and summer terms.
In two-credit (1/2 unit) courses meeting
only during the last half of any semester,
students may drop/add for a period of five
days, effective with the mid-term date shown
on the academic calendar. Withdrawal from
half-semester courses with a withdrawal
grade may occur within six weeks of the
beginning of the course. It is understood that
the period of time at the beginning of the
semester will be identical, for example, a
period of five days as indicated above.
The Unit Course System
Instruction at Lycoming College is
organized, with few exceptions, on a depart-
mental basis, most courses are unit
courses, meaning that each course taken is
considered to be equivalent to four semester
hours of credit. Exceptions occur in applied
music and theatre practicum courses, which
are offered for either one-half or one semes-
ter hour of credit, and in departments that
have elected to offer certain courses for the
equivalent of one, two or three semester
hours of credit. Further, independent studies
and internships carrying two semester hours
of credit may be designed. The normal
student course load is four courses during the
fall and spring semesters. Students who elect
to attend the special sessions may enroll in
/' JH|B ^ "^&'Wi|W
^■p _-*"'*' ^ ^..-rf«*"
jg^^S^,
1 f^^^^^ \^,^,^...^-n^'^^^
^^ , "* ■ "^
"^^^^^
m^ '
one course during the May term and one or
two courses in the summer term. A student is
considered full time when enrolled for a
minimum of three courses during the fall or
spring semesters, one course for the May
term, and two courses for the summer term.
Students may enroll in five courses during
the fall and spring semesters if they are
Lycoming scholars or were admitted to the
Dean's List at the end of the previous
semester. Exceptions may be granted by the
Dean of the College. Overloads are not
permitted during the May and summer terms.
The System of Grading and
Reporting of Grades
1 he evaluation of student performance
in credit courses is indicated by the use of
traditional letter symbols. These symbols
and their definitions are as follows:
A EXCELLENT - Signifies superior
A
achievement through mastery of content or
skills and demonstration of creative and
independent thinking.
B GOOD - Signifies better-than-average
achievement wherein the student reveals
insight and understanding.
C SATISFACTORY - Signifies satisfactory
achievement wherein the student's work has
been of average quality and quantity. The
student has demonstrated basic competence
in the subject area and may enroll in addi-
tional course work.
D PASSING - Signifies unsatisfactory
achievement wherein the student met only
the minimum requirements for passing the
course and should not continue in the subject
area without departmental advice.
F FAILING — Signifies that the student has
not met the minimum requirements for
passing the course.
I INCOMPLETE WORK — Assigned in
accordance with the restrictions of estab-
lished academic policy.
R A REPEATED COURSE — Students shall
have the option of repeating courses for
which they already have received a passing
grade in addition to those which they have
failed. Credit is received only once for the
course. The most recent course grade will
count toward the G.P.A.
P PASSING WORK, NO GRADE AS-
SIGNED — Converted from traditional grade
of A through D.
X AUDIT — Work as an auditor for which
no credit is earned.
W WITHDRAWAL — Signifies withdrawal
from the course from the sixth day through
the twelfth week of the semester.
The cumulative grade point average
(GPA) is calculated by multiplying quality
points by credits and dividing the total
quality points by the total credits. A quality
point is the unit of measurement of the
quality of work done by the student.
Quality Points
radc
Earned for each
semester hour
A
4.00
A-
3.67
B+
3.33
B
3.00
B-
2.67
C+
2.33
C
2.00
C-
1.67
D+
1.33
D
1.00
D-
0.67
F
0.00
The grade point for the major is calculated
in the same manner for the courses required
for the major.
A minimum of 2.00 is required for the
cumulative grade point average in the major
to meet the requirements for graduation.
The cumulative GPA is not determined by
averaging semester GPA's.
Use of the pass/fail grading option is
limited as follows (this does not apply to
English 049):
• students may enroll on a P/F basis in no
more that one course per semester and no
more than four courses during the under-
graduate career.
• P/F courses completed after declaration of
the major may not be used to satisfy a
requirement of that major, including
courses required by the major department
which are offered by other departments.
(Instructor-designated courses are excepted
from this limitation.)
• courses for which a grade of P is recorded
may not be used toward fulfillment of any
distribution requirement.
A
• students may not enroll in English 106 on a
P/F basis.
• a course selected on a P/F basis which is
subsequently withdrawn will not count
toward the four-course limit.
• instructor-designated courses may be
offered during the May term with the
approval of the Dean of the College. Such
courses are not counted toward the four-
course limit.
• P grades are not computed in the grade
point average.
• students electing the P/F option may
designate a minimum acceptance letter
grade from A to B-. If the student earns
the designated grade or better, the grade
will be recorded in the permanent record
and computed in the grade point average.
If a student selects P/F (with no designated
minimum acceptance grade) and earns a
grade of A to D-, a P will be recorded in
the permanent record but not computed in
the grade point average. In all cases, if a
student earns a grade of F this grade will be
recorded in the permanent record and
computed in the student's grade point
average.
• students must declare the P/F option before
the end of the period during which courses
may be added during any given
semester, half-semester, or term.
• instructors are not notified which of their
students are enrolled on an P/F basis.
• students electing the P/F option are
expected to perform the same work as
those enrolled on a regular basis.
Incomplete grades may be given if, for
absolutely unavoidable reasons (usually
medical in nature), the student has not been
able to complete the work requisite to the
course. An incomplete grade must be
removed within six weeks of the next regular
semester.
Students shall have the option of repeating
courses for which they already have received
a passing grade in addition to those which
they have failed. Recording of grades for all
repeated courses shall be governed by the
following conditions:
• a course may be repeated only one time.
• both attempts will be recorded on the
student's transcript.
• credit for the course will be given only
once.
• the most recent grade will count toward the
GPA with this exception: A "W" grade
cannot replace another grade.
• a repeated course will be counted toward
the total number of unsuccessful attempts.
Attendance
1 he academic program at Lycoming is
based upon the assumption that there is value
in class attendance for all students. Individ-
ual instructors have the prerogative of
establishing reasonable absence regulations
in any course. The student is responsible for
learning and observing these regulations.
Student Records
1 he policy regarding student educational
records is designed to protect the privacy of
students against unwarranted instructions and
is consistent with Section 43B of the General
Education Provision Act (commonly known
as the Family Educational Rights and Privacy
Act of 1974, as amended). The details of the
College policy on student records and the
procedures for gaining access to student
records are contained in the current issue of
Student Handbook, which is available in the
library and the Office of the Dean of Student
Services.
A
Academic Levels
1 he following table is used to determine
the academic grade level of degree candi-
dates. See page 145 for related Financial Aid
information.
Year Semester Number of Semester
Hours Earned
Freshman 1 Less than 12
2 At least 12 but less than 24
Sophomore 1 At least 24 but less than 40
2 At least 40 but less than 56
Junior 1 At least 56 but less than 76
2 At least 76 but less than 96
Senior 1 At least 96 but less than 112
2 More than 112
Academic Standing And
Academic Honesty
•Students will be placed on academic
probation if either the number of hours
completed or cumulative grade point average
falls below the following standards:
Semester Cumulative
Hours
(FuU-Time)
GPA
Completed
1
1.70
12
2
1.80
24
3
1.90
40
4
2.00
56
5
2.00
72
6
2.00
88
7
2.00
104
8
2.00
120
In order to meet graduation requirements,
students must complete 128 credit hours.
Students who are enrolled part time or for
fewer than the normal four courses per term
will be expected to complete an equivalent
proportion of their program each semester.
Students will be subject to suspension from
the College if they:
• are on probation for two consecutive
semesters;
• achieve a grade point average of 1.00 or
below during any one semester.
Students will be subject to dismissal
from the College if they:
• cannot reasonably complete all require-
ments for a degree;
• exceed 24 semester hours of unsuccessful
course attempts (grades of F, W, and R)
except in the case of withdrawal for
medical or psychological reasons.
The integrity of the academic process of
the College requires honesty in all phases
of the instructional program. The College
assumes that students are committed to the
principle of academic honesty. Students who
fail to honor this commitment are subject to
dismissal. Procedural guidelines and rules
for the adjudication of cases of academic
dishonesty are printed in The Faculty
Handbook and The Pathfinder (the student
academic handbook), copies of which are
available in the library.
Transfer Credit
Lxollege students who wish to study at
other campuses must obtain prior written
approval to do so from their advisor and
the Lycoming College registrar. Coursework
counting toward a major or minor must be
approved in advance by the chairperson of
the department in which the major or minor
is offered. Once a course is approved, the
credit and grades for the course will transfer
to Lycoming and be calculated in the
student's grade point average as if the
com^ses were taken here. This means that
"D" and "F" grades will transfer as well as all
other grades. In addition, students are
expected to be registered at Lycoming for
their last eight courses. Requests for waivers
of this regulation must be sent to the Com-
mittee on Academic Standards. Final deter-
mination of transfer credit will be made by
the Lycoming College registrar based on
official transcripts only.
A
Credit By Examination
Advanced Placement - Entering freshmen
who have completed an advanced course
while in secondary school and who have
taken the appropriate advanced-placement
examination of the College Entrance Exami-
nation Board (CEEB) are encouraged to
apply for credit and advanced placement at
the time of admission. A grade of three or
above is considered satisfactory. Students
should inform the Registrar's Office and their
academic advisor immediately when ad-
vanced placement examinations have
been taken.
College Level Examination Progam
(CLEP) - Students may earn college credit
for superior achievement through CLEP. By
achieving at the 75th percentile or above on
the General Examinations and the 65th
percentile or above on approved Subject
Examinations, students may earn up to 50
percent of the course requirements for a
bachelor of arts degree. Although these ex-
aminations may be taken after enrollment,
new students who are competent in a given
area are encouraged to take the examination
of their choice during the second semester of
their senior year so that Lycoming will have
the test scores available for registration
advisement for the first semester of enroll-
ment. Further information about CLEP may
be obtained through the secondary-school
guidance office or the Office of Admissions
or the Registrar at Lycoming College.
Students should inform the Registrar's Office
and their academic advisors immediately
when CLEP examinations have been taken.
Academic Honors
Dean's List — Students are admitted to the
Dean's List at the end of the fall and spring
semesters if they have completed at least 15
credits with other than P or R grades, and
have a minimum grade point average of 3.50
for the semester.
Graduation Honors — Students are awarded
the bachelor of arts degree, the bachelor of
fine arts degree, or the bachelor of science in
nursing degree with honors when they have
earned the following grade point averages
based on all courses attempted at Lycoming,
with a minimum of 64 credits (16 units)
required for a student to be eligible for
honors:
summa cum laude 3.90-4.00
magna cum laude 3.50-3.89
cum laude 3.25-3.49
Academic Honor Awards, Prizes, and
Societies - Superior academic achievement is
recognized through the conferring of awards
and prizes at the annual Honors Convocation
and Commencement and through election to
membership in honor societies.
SOCIETIES
Biology Beta Beta Beta
Freshmen Men Blue Key
Freshmen Women Gold Key
Economics Omicron Delta Epsilon
English Sigma Tau Delta
Foreign Language Phi Sigma Iota
General Academic Phi Kappa Phi
History Phi Alpha Theta
Niu-sing Sigma Theta Tau
(Lambda Nu)
Philosophy Phi Sigma Tau
Physics Sigma Pi Sigma
Political Science Pi Sigma Alpha
Psychology Psi Chi
Social Science Pi Gamma Mu
Theatre Alpha Psi Omega
(Omega Chi)
Prizes And Awards
AMERICAN CHEMICAL SOCIETY
AWARD - The award, sponsored by the
Susquehanna Valley Chapter of the society,
is given to the outstanding senior in chemis-
try who plans to enter the profession.
Mik.
ACCOUNTING SOCIETY SERVICE
AWARD - The award is given for outstanding
service to the Lycoming College Accounting
Society.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF CHEMISTS
PRIZE - The prize, given by the Philadelphia
section of the institute, goes to a senior major
for excellence in chemistry.
ARENA THEATRE AWARDS -
Performance - This award is given to the
senior who has demonstrated outstanding
ability in theatre performance.
Technical Theatre - This award is given to
the senior who has demonstrated outstanding
ability in technical theatre.
WILUAM T. AND RUTH S. ASKEY MUSIC
PRIZE - given to a graduating senior who is
recognized for his/her proficiency as a music
major.
JACK C. BUCKLE AWARD - The award is
given annually to a junior male student with
high moral qualities, who has made an
unusual contribution to campus life through
leadership in student activities.
BYRON C. BRUNSTETTER SCIENCE
AWARD - The award is given for outstanding
achievement in chemical and biological
sciences.
CRC PRESS CHEMISTRY ACHIEVEMENT
AWARD - The award is given to that fresh-
man who has exhibited the highest academic
achievement in chemistry.
CHIEFTAIN AWARD - The CoUege's most
prestigious award is given to the senior who
has contributed most to Lycoming through
support of school activities; who has exhib-
ited outstanding leadership qualities; who has
worked effectively with other members of the
College community; who has evidenced a
good moral code; and whose academic rank
is above the median for the preceding senior
class.
CIVIC CHOIR AWARD - The award is given
to the College choir member who has
outstanding musical ability and who has
made significant leadership contributions to
the choir.
CLASS OF 1907 PRIZE - The prize is given
to the senior who has been outstanding in the
promotion of College spirit through participa-
tion in athletics and other activities.
BENJAMIN C. CONNER PRIZE - The prize
is given to the graduating student who has
done outstanding work in mathematics.
BIOLOGY SERVICE AWARD - student who
has shown good academic work and has
fostered the ideals of the department by
willingness to become involved in the
activities of the department.
FRESHMAN BIOLOGY AWARD - freshman
who has obtained the highest overall average
in Biology 110-111 (major biology lecture
and laboratory).
DURKHEIM AWARD - The award is given to
the senior sociology/anthropology major who
has done outstanding work in the field.
BISHOP WILUAM PERRY EVELAND
PRIZE -The prize is given to the senior who
has shown progress in scholarship, loyalty,
school spirit, and participation in school
activities.
EXCELLENCE IN TWO-DIMENSIONAL
ART AWARD - The award is given to the
outstanding senior art major in this field.
A
EXCELLENCE IN THREE-DIMENSIONAL
ART AWARD - The award is given to the
outstanding senior art major in this field.
EXCELLENCE IN POUTICAL SCIENCE
AWARD - The award goes to the senior
political science major who has performed
with excellence.
W. ARTHUR FAUS MEMORIAL PRIZE -
Prize given in memory of Dr. W. Arthur
Faus, a former Professor of Philosophy at Ly-
coming College, to the graduating senior who
has done outstanding work in philosophy.
J.W. FEREE AWARD - Given in memory of
the first mathematics professor at Lycom-
ing's forerunner, the Dickinson Seminary, the
award goes to the student most active in
mathematical sciences.
FACULTY PRIZE - The prize is given to the
commuting student with satisfactory scholar-
ship and who has been outstanding in
promotion of school spirit through participa-
tion in school activities.
DURANT L. FUREY III MEMORIAL
PRIZE - The prize is given to the senior
accounting major who has shown outstanding
achievement in accounting.
GILLETTE FOREIGN LANGUAGE
PRIZES - The prizes are given to the French,
German, and Spanish majors who have
achieved excellence in foreign languages.
JOHN P. GRAHAM AWARD - Named in
honor of a professor emeritus, the award is
given to the senior English major who
achieves the highest average in English.
EDWARD J. GRAY PRIZES -The prizes are
given to the graduating students with the
highest and second highest averages.
DAN GUSTAFSON AWARD- In memory of a
former member of the English Department,
the award is given to the senior English
major whose analytical writing demonstrates
the highest standards of literary and critical
excellence.
HELEN R. HOOVER COMMUNITY SERV-
ICE PRIZE - The cash prize is given annually
to a graduating senior who has demonstrated
a personal commitment to serving the less
fortunate.
IRUSKA AWARDS - The awards denote
membership in the society for juniors who
are very active on campus.
JUNIOR BOOK AWARD - The award is
given to the outstanding junior political
science major.
EUSHA BENSON KUNE PRIZE - The prize
is given to the senior mathematics major with
outstanding achievement in the field.
THE KRAMER AND HOFFMAN
ASSOCIATES AWARD - for superior achieve-
ment in Federal Income Tax.
CHARLES J. KOCIAN AWARDS - The
awards are given to the accounting, business
administration, and economics majors who
show the greatest proficiency in statistics; the
mathematics major who shows the greatest
proficiency in applied mathematics, the
graduating senior who shows the greatest
proficiency in computer science and opera-
tions research; the graduating senior business
administration major with the highest grade
point average; the graduating senior with the
highest average in the class and the graduat-
ing nursing major with the highest grade
point average.
^k.
DON UNCOLN LARRABEE LAW
PRIZE - The prize is given to the graduating
student who has shown outstanding scholar-
ship in legal principles.
THE JOHN M. UNDEMUTH ENDOWED
PRIZE FUND - The John M.
Lindemuth Endowed Prize Fund, established
in 1986 by Mr. and Mrs. John M. Lindemuth
of Williamsport, Pennsylvania, provides
annual cash awards for varsity football
players who earn the highest cumulative
grade point average in their chosen field of
academic study at Lycoming College. This
prize is managed in compliance with current
NCAA regulations concerning scholastic
awards for athletes.
C. DANIEL AND JEANNE UTTLE AWARD -
Presented in memory of two Lycoming
alumni, the award is given to the outstanding
student in public administration.
THE GERTRUDE B. MADDEN MASS
COMMUNICATION AWARD - Established in
1985 by the students of the Mass Communi-
cation Society, the award is to be presented
annually to the senior mass communication
major who, in the judgment of his or her
peers, has best integrated academic excel-
lence, professional development in a mass
media field and contribution to campus
media.
THE MAKISU AWARD - The award is given
for outstanding service to the college com-
munity, for dedication above and beyond the
realm of one's obligations to the College.
JOHN C. MCCUNE MEMORIAL
PRIZES - The prizes are given to the senior
majors in mathematics, biology, chemistry,
physics, philosophy, and psychology who
have attained the highest averages.
ETHEL MCDONALD PAX CHRISTI
AWARD - The award is given for outstanding
but quiet consistency in the life of faith and
the practice of Christianity, noteworthy
personal integrity and humble loving com-
passion expressed in daily life.
WALTER G. MCIVER AWARD- Named after
Lycoming's former choir director, the award
is given to an outstanding and dedicated choir
member who has made significant campus
contributions outside of choir.
DEPARTMENT OF NURSING AWARD FOR
CUNICAL EXCELLENCE - outstanding
achievement in the clinical setting.
DEPARTMENT OF NURSING FACULTY
AWARD - senior nursing major who best
exemplifies the spirit of the profession.
LYCOMING COLLEGE NURSING HONOR
SOCIETY RESEARCH RECOGNITION
AWARD- given to the nursing student who
has demonstrated an in-depth understanding
of the research process, as evidenced by a
completed research project, with formal dis-
semination of the results of the study.
PENNSYLVANIA INSTITUTE OF
CERTIFIED PUBUC ACCOUNTANTS
AWARD - The award is given to the senior
accounting major who has demonstrated high
scholastic standing and qualities of
leadership.
POCAHONTAS AWARD- The award is given
to Lycoming's outstanding female athlete.
PSI CHI SERVICE AWARD - The award is
given for contributions to the Psychology
Department.
RESEARCH AND WRITING PRIZE IN
HISTORY -The prize is given to the student
who does the best work in History 449.
^ck.
THE PROFESSOR LOGAN A. RICHMOND
ACCOUNTING PRIZE - is awarded annually
to a graduating senior who has done outstand-
ing work in accounting and demonstrated
exceptional proficiency in writing.
THE JANET A. RODGERS ACADEMIC
AWARD - established in honor of the found-
ing chair of the Department of Nursing,
provides an annual $100 award to senior
nursing student who demonstrates excep-
tional academic achievement and has been an
active participant in health-related programs.
MARYL. RUSSELL AWARD - Named in
honor of a professor emeritus of music, the
award is given for outstanding musical
achievement.
SADLER PRIZE - The prize is given to the
student with the highest achievement in
calculus, foundations of mathematics,
algebra and analysis.
NATHAN A. SCHEIE MEMORIAL MUSIC
FUND - In memory of a friend of the
College, the fund provides financial assis-
tance to qualified deserving students for
advanced training in music.
SENIOR MANAGEMENT AWARD - The
award is given to the senior business major
with the best senior project in Business
Policies 441.
SENIOR SCHOLARSHIP PRIZE IN HIS-
TORY -The prize is given to the senior major
with the highest average.
SERVICE TO LYCOMING AWARD -
Sponsored by the Office of Student Services,
the award is given to students who have made
outstanding contributions to Lycoming.
FRANCES K. SKEATH AWARD - The award
is given to the senior with outstanding
achievement in mathematics.
/. MILTON SKEATH AWARD - The award is
given for superior undergraduate achieve-
ment and potential for further work in
psychology.
SOPHOMORE INTERMEDIATE ACCOUNT-
ING AWARD - for the accounting major with
the highest average in Intermediate Account-
ing at the end of the spring lerm.
JOHN A. STREETER MEMORIAL AWARD
IN ECONOMICS - The award is given to the
graduating student with outstanding achieve-
ment in economics.
JOHN A. STREETER MEMORIAL AWARD
IN MUSIC - The award is given to the
College band member who has outstanding
musical ability and who has made significant
leadership contributions to the band.
TOMAHAWK AWARD - The award is given
to Lycoming's outstanding male athlete.
TRASK CHEMISTRY PRIZE - The prize is
given to the senior chemistry major who has
done outstanding work in the field.
WALL STREET JOURNAL AWARDS - Two
awards are given. One is given to the senior
business major for excellence in the field and
service to the College community. A second
award is given for excellence in economics.
WILUAMSPORT ROTARY CLUB NURSING
PRIZE - established in 1988, this endowed
prize provides annual interest to a registered
nurse with the highest cumulative grade point
average. Candidates should have success-
fully completed a minimum of 24 academic
credits toward the BSN degree.
SOL "WOODY" WOLF AWARD - The award
is given to the junior athlete who has shown
the most improvement.
A
WOMEN OF LYCOMING/ADA REMLEY
SCHOLARSHIP - The scholarship is given to
the junior woman student who has shown
satisfactory scholarship, outstanding school
spirit, and who is active in campus activities.
Departmental Honors - Honors projects are
normally undertaken only in a student's
major, and are available only to exceptionally
well-qualified students who have a solid
background in the area of the project and are
capable of considerable self -direction. The
prerequisites for registration in an honors
program are as follows:
• a faculty member from the department(s)
in which the honors project is to be under-
taken must agree to be the director and
must secure departmental approval of the
project.
• the director, in consultation with the
student, must convene a committee consist-
ing of two faculty members from the
department in which the project is to be
undertaken, one of whom is the director of
the project, and one faculty member from
each of two other departments related to
the subject matter of the study.
• the honors committee must then certify by
their signatures on the application that the
project in question is academically legiti-
mate and worthy of pursuit as an honors
project, and that the student in question is
qualified to pursue the project
• the project must be approved by the Com-
mittee on Individual Studies.
Students successfully complete honors
projects by satisfying the following condi-
tions in accordance with guidelines estab-
lished by the Committee on Individual
Studies:
• the student must produce a substantial
research paper, critical study, or creative
project. If the end product is a creative
project, a critical paper analyzing the
techniques and principles employed and
the nature of the achievement represented
in the project shall be submitted.
• the student must successfully explain and
defend the work in a final oral examination
given by the honors committee.
• the honors committee must certify that the
student has successfully defended the
project, and that the student's achievement
is clearly superior to that which would
ordinarily be required to earn a grade of
"A" in a regular independent-studies
course.
• the Committee on Individual Studies must
certify that the student has satisfied all of
the conditions mentioned above.
Except in unusual circumstances, honors
projects are expected to involve independent
study in two consecutive unit courses.
Successful completion of the honors project
will cause the designation of honors in that
department to be placed upon the permanent
record. Acceptable theses are deposited in
the College library. In the event that the
study is not completed successfully or is not
deemed worthy of honors, the student shall
be re-registered in independent studies and
given a final grade for the course.
Auditors — Any person may audit courses at
Lycoming at one-fourth tuition per course.
Laboratory and other special fees must be
paid in full. Examinations, papers, and other
evaluation devices are not required of
auditors, but individual arrangements may be
made to complete such exercises with
consent of the instructor. The option to
audit a course must be declared during the
same period (currently five days) at the
beginning of each semester, half-semester, or
term as drop/add and pass/fail and must be
completed in the Registrar's Office.
Special Features
Academic Resource Center — The Aca-
demic Resource Center, located on the first
floor of Rich Hall, provides a variety of free
services to the campus community.
A
• Writing Center: Working one-on-one,
Writing Tutors use questioning techniques
to help others improve individual papers
while developing confidence and independ-
ence as writers. Other services include the
Paper File, a file of graded essays main-
tained by course; the Writing Room, a
quiet place for writers to work; self-paced,
computer assisted typing instruction; and
the Documentation Style Manual for use
when citing sources on research projects.
• Tutoring Center: The ARC provides one-
on-one peer tutoring in math, foreign lan-
guages, and sciences on a walk-in basis and
peer tutoring by arrangement in other
subjects. Tutors assist students with home-
work assignments and exam review.
• Survival Skills Program: The ARC and
volunteer faculty conduct a group of study
skills workshops on time management,
note-taking from lectures, reading text-
books, successful study techniques and
WordPerfect.
Developmental Program - The develop-
mental program is provided for students who
are identified as being able to benefit from
specialized classroom instruction in college-
level reading, writing, study and mathematics
skills. Students develop these skills in
courses designed to meet their needs.
Reading and writing are taught in a one-unit
developmental course (English 049), and
study skills are introduced in a complemen-
tary laboratory workshop. Mathematics skills
are taught in a one-half unit algebra course
(Mathematics (X)5) which is conducted on an
individualized basis with tutorial support.
Freshman Seminar/Office of Assistant
Dean for Freshmen - The Freshman Seminar
occurs the weekend before classes begin.
Suggested readings are sent to the freshmen
over the summer. Students meet in small
discussion groups with faculty and upper-
classmen. A variety of academic and social
activities are integrated into this weekend
designed to facilitate the student's transition
to college.
The Office of Assistant Dean for Fresh-
men develops the Seminar and works with
the freshmen throughout the year on individ-
ual academic needs.
Independent Studies - Independent studies
are available to any qualified student who
wishes to engage in and receive academic
credit for any academically legitimate course
of study for which he or she could not other-
wise receive credit. It may be pursued at any
level (introductory, intermediate, or ad-
vanced) and in any department, whether or
not the student is a major in that department
Studies projects which duplicate catalog
courses are subject to the same provisions
which apply to all studies projects. In order
for a student to be registered in an independ-
ent-study course, the following conditions
must be satisfied:
• an appropriate member of the faculty must
agree to supervise the project and must
certify by signing the application form that
the project involves an amount of legiti-
mate academic work appropriate for the
amount of academic credit requested and
that the student in question is qualified to
pursue the project.
• the studies project must be approved by the
chair of the department in which the
studies project is to be undertaken. In the
case of catalog courses, all department
members must approve offering the catalog
coiu"se as an independent studies course.
• after the project is approved by the
instructor and the chair of the appropriate
department, the studies project must be ap-
proved by the Committee on Individual
Studies.
^L
Participation in independent-studies
projects, with the exception of those which
duplicate catalog courses, is subject to the
following:
• students may not engage in more than one
independent-studies project during any
given semester,
• students may not engage in more than two
independent-studies projects during their
academic careers at Lycoming College,
As with other academic policies, any
exceptions to these two rules must be
approved by the Committee on Academic
Standards.
Internship Program - An internship is a
course jointly sponsored by the College and a
pubhc or private agency or subdivision of the
College in which a student is enabled to earn
college credit by participating in some active
capacity as an assistant, aide, or apprentice.
At least one-half of the effort expended by
the intern should consist of academic work
related to agency situations. The objectives
of the internship program are:
(1) to further the development of a central
core of values, awarenesses, strategies, skills,
and information through experiences outside
the classroom or other campus situations, and
(2) to facilitate the integration of theory and
practice by encouraging students to relate
their on-campus academic experiences more
directly to society in general and to possible
career and other post-baccalaiu-eate objec-
tives in particular.
Any junior or senior student in good
academic standing may petition the Commit-
tee on Individual Studies for approval to
serve as an intern. A maximum of 16 credits
can be earned through the internship pro-
gram. Guidelines for program development,
assignment of tasks and academic require-
ments, such as exams, papers, reports, grades,
etc., are established in consultation with a
faculty director at Lycoming and an agency
supervisor at the place of internship.
Students with diverse majors have
participated in a wide variety of internships,
including those with NBC Television in New
York City, the AUenwood Federal Prison
Camp, Pennsylvania State Department of En-
vironmental Resources, Lycoming County
Historical Society, the American Cancer
Society, business and accounting firms, law
offices, hospitals, social service agencies,
banks and Congressional offices.
May Term - The May term is a four-week
voluntary session designed to provide
students with courses listed in the catalog and
experimental and special courses that are not
normally available during the fall and spring
semesters and summer term. Some courses
are offered on campus; others involve travel.
A number offer interdisciplinary credit.
Illustrations of the types of courses offered
during the May term are:
(a) Study-Travel: Cultural tours of Germany,
Spain, and France; Archaeological expedi-
tions to study tricultural communities in New
Mexico; Utopian Communities; Revolution-
ary and Civil War Sites; Colonial America on
Tour; Art on the East Coast; The New
Kingdom in Ancient Egypt.
(b) On-Campus: Field Geology, Field
Ornithology, Energy Economics, Writer's
Seminar, Psychology of Group Processes,
Collective Bargaining, Aquatic Biology,
Medical Genetics, Energy Alternatives,
White Collar Crime, Lasers and their
Applications, Selected Short Story Writers
and their Works, Popular Forms of Contem-
porary Fiction, Administrative and Organiza-
tional Behavior of Police, Plant and Green-
house Management and Street Law.
Although participation in the May term is
voluntary, student response has been out-
standing with approximately 20 percent of
the student body enrolling. In addition to
the courses themselves, attractions include
small and informal classes and reduced
tuition rates.
A
Part-Time Students — Students who do not
wish to pursue a degree at Lycoming College
may, if space permits, register for credit or
audit courses on either a part-time or full-
time basis. Students who register for one or
two courses are considered to be enrolled
part time; students who register for three or
four courses are considered to be enrolled
full time.
Anyone wishing to register as a non-
degree student must fill out an application
form in the Admissions Office, pay a one-
time application fee and pay the tuition rate
in effect at the time of each enrollment.
After a non-degree student has attempted four
courses, the Dean of the College reserves the
right to grant or deny permission to continue
to register in this category.
All non-degree students are subject to the
general laws and regulations of the College
as stated in the College Catalog and the
Student Handbook. The College reserves the
right to deny permission to register individu-
als who do not meet the standards of the
College.
Students who wish to change from a non-
degree to a degree status must reapply (with
no application fee) and satisfy all conditions
for admission and registration in effect at the
time of application for degree status.
Study Abroad — Students have the opportu-
nity to study abroad under auspices of
approved universities and agencies. While
study abroad is particularly attractive to
students majoring in foreign language and
literatures, this opportunity is open to all
students in good academic standing. Mastery
of a foreign language is desirable but not
required in all programs. Dr. Barbara F.
Buedel, assistant professor of Spanish, serves
as coordinator for the Study Abroad Program.
Interested students may contract her about
opportunities available and procedural
questions.
mm
i
1
f
J
i^KflHjVB
■■^
■ill
^B
1
^■■^^^
X
g
Teacher Intern Program - The purpose of
the teacher intern program is to provide
individuals who have completed a baccalau-
reate degree with the opportunity to become
certified teachers through on-the-job training.
Interns can earn a Lycoming College Teacher
Education Certificate and be certified by the
Commonwealth of Pennsylvania in elemen-
tary education or one or more of the follow-
ing secondary areas: art, biology chemistry,
English, French, general science (with
biology or astronomy/physics tracks),
German, mathematics, music, physics, social
studies, and Spanish.
Interested individuals should file a formal
application with the Education Department
for admission to the Intern Program. Upon
completion of the application process, interns
receive a letter of Intern Candidacy from the
Pennsylvania Department of Education which
the candidate then uses to apply for a
teaching position. Necessary professional
coursework can be completed prior to the
teaching experience when individuals obtain
teaching positions. (See Education Depart-
ment on page 70 for course listing.)
NOTE: Lycoming College cannot assume
responsibility for the health, safety, or welfare
of any student engaged in or en route to or
from any ofT-campus study or activity not
under the exclusive jurisdiction of this
institution.
A
Cooperative Programs
l^y coming has developed several coop-
erative programs to provide students with
opportunities to extend their knowledge,
abilities, and talents in selected areas through
access to the specialized academic programs
and facilities of other colleges, universities,
academies and hospitals. Although thorough
advisement and curricular planning are
provided for each of the cooperative pro-
grams, admission to Lycoming and registra-
tion in the program of choice do not guaran-
tee admission to the cooperating institution.
The prerogative of admitting students to the
cooperative aspect of the program rests with
the cooperating institution. Students who are
interested in a cooperative program should
contact the coordinator during the first week
of the first semester of their enrollment at
Lycoming. This is necessary to plan their
course programs in a manner that will insure
completion of required courses according to
the schedule stipulated for the program. All
cooperative programs require special
coordination of course scheduling at
Lycoming.
Engineering - Combining the advantages of
a liberal-arts education and the technical
training of an engineering curriculum, this
program is offered in conjunction with The
Pennsylvania State University. Students
complete three years of study at Lycoming
and two years at the cooperating university.
Upon satisfactory completion of the first year
of engineering studies, Lycoming awards the
bachelor of arts degree. When students
successfully complete the second year of
engineering studies, the cooperating univer-
sity awards the bachelor of science degree in
engineering.
At Lycoming, students complete the
distribution program and courses in physics,
mathematics, and chemistry. The Pennsylva-
nia State University offers aerospace, agricul-
tural, ceramic, chemical, civil, electrical.
engineering science, industrial, mechanical,
mining and nuclear engineering.
Forestry or Environmental Studies -
Lycoming College offers a cooperative
program with Duke University in environ-
mental management and forestry. Qualified
students can earn the bachelor's and master's
degrees in five years, spending three years at
Lycoming and two years at Duke. All
Lycoming distribution and major require-
ments must be completed by the end of the
junior year. At the end of the first year at
Duke, the A.B. degree will be awarded by
Lycoming. Duke will award the professional
degree of Master of Forestry or Master of
Environmental Management to qualified
candidates at the end of the second year.
The major program emphases at Duke are
Forest Resource Management, Resource
Economics and Policy, and Resource
Ecology.
The program is flexible enough, however,
to accommodate a variety of individual
designs. An undergraduate major in one of
the natural sciences, social sciences, or
business may provide good preparation for
the programs at Duke, but a student with any
undergraduate concentration will be consid-
ered for admission. All students need at least
two courses each in biology, mathematics,
and economics.
Students begin the program at Duke in
July after their junior year at Lycoming with
a one-month session of field work in natural
resource management. They must complete
a total of 48 units which generally take four
semesters.
Some students prefer to complete the
bachelor's degree before undertaking
graduate study at Duke. The master's degree
requirements for these students are the same
as for those students entering after the junior
year, but the 48-unit requirement may be
A
reduced for completed relevant undergradu-
ate work of satisfactory quality. All credit
reductions are determined individually and
consider the student's educational back-
ground and objectives.
Medical Technology - Students desiring a
career in medical technology may either
complete a bachelor of arts program followed
by a clinical internship at any American
Medical Association-accredited hospital, or
they may complete the cooperative program.
Students electing the cooperative program
normally study for three years at Lycoming,
during which time they complete 24 unit
courses, including the College distribution
requirements, a major, and requirements of
the National Accrediting Agency for Clinical
Laboratory Sciences (NAACLS). The
current requirements of the NAACLS are:
four courses in chemistry (one of which must
be either organic or biochemistry); four
courses in biology (including coiu-ses in
microbiology and immunology), and one
course in mathematics.
Students in the cooperative program
usually major in biology, following a
modified major of six unit courses that
exempts them from Ecology (Biology 224)
and Plant Sciences (Biology 225). Students
must take either Microbiology (Biology 221)
or Microbiology for the Health Sciences
(Biology 226), and either Animal Physiology
(Biology 223) or Cell Physiology (Biology
335). The cooperative program requires
successful completion of a one-year intern-
ship at an American Medical Association-
accredited hospital. Lycoming is affiliated
with the following accredited hospitals:
Divine Providence, Rolling Hill, Robert
Packer, Lancaster, and Abington. Students in
the cooperative program receive credit at
Lycoming for each of eight courses in
biology and chemistry successfully com-
pleted during the clinical internship. Suc-
cessful completion of the Registry Examina-
tion is not considered a graduation require-
ment at Lycoming College.
Students entering a clinical internship for
one year after graduation from Lycoming
must complete all of the requirements of the
cooperative program, but are not eligible for
the biology major exemptions indicated
above. Upon graduation, such students may
apply for admission to a clinical program at
any hospital.
Optometry - Through the Accelerated Op-
tometry Education Curriculum Program,
students interested in a career in optometry
may qualify for admission to the Pennsylva-
nia College of Optometry after only three
years at Lycoming College.
After four years at the Pennsylvania
College of Optometry a student will earn
a Doctor of Optometry degree. Selection of
candidates for the professional segment of the
program is completed by the admissions
committee of the Pennsylvania College of
Optometry during the student's third year at
Lycoming. (This is one of two routes that
students may choose. Any student, of course,
may follow the regular application proce-
dures for admission to the Pennsylvania
College of Optometry or another college of
optometry to matriculate following comple-
tion of his or her baccalaureate program.)
During the three years at Lycoming College,
the student will complete 24 unit courses,
including all distribution requirements, and
will prepare for his or her professional
training by obtaining a solid foundation in bi-
ology, chemistry, physics, and mathematics.
During the first year of study at the Pennsyl-
vania College of Optometry, the student will
take 39 semester hours of basic science
courses in addition to introductions to
optometry and health care. Successful
completion of the first year of professional
training will complete the course require-
ments for the A.B. degree at Lycoming
College.
iBW
Most students will find it convenient to
major in biology in order to satisfy the
requirements of Lycoming College and the
Pennsylvania College of Optometry, Such
students are allowed to complete a modified
biology major which will exempt them from
two biology courses: Ecology (Biology 224)
and Plant Sciences (Biology 225). (This
modified major requires the successful
completion of the initial year at the Pennsyl-
vania College of Optometry.) Students
desiring other majors must coordinate their
plans with the Health Professions Advisory
Committee in order to insure that they have
satisfied all requirements.
The Philadelphia Urban Semester - A full
semester liberal arts program for professional
development and field study is now available
to Lycoming students. The program compo-
nents are: field placement; City Seminar;
evening seminars; and living and learning in
the city. The program is open to students
majoring in any discipline or program. The
Philadelphia Urban Semester is sponsored
and administered by the Great Lakes Col-
leges Association (Albion, Antioch, Denison,
De Pauw, Earlham, Hope, Kalamazoo,
Kenyon, Oberlin, Ohio Wesleyan,
Wabash, Wooster).
Normally the above special-semester
programs are open only to juniors.
NOTE: Lycoming College cannot assume
responsibility for the health, safety, or welfare
of students engaged in or en route to or from
any off-campus studies or activities which are
not under the exclusive jurisdiction of this
insitution.
Podiatry - Students interested in podiatry
may either seek admission to a college of
podiatric medicine upon completion of the
bachelor of arts degree or through the Accel-
erated Podiatric Medical Education-Curricu-
lum Program (APMEC). The latter program
provides an opportunity for students to
qualify for admission to the Pennsylvania
College of Podiatric Medicine (PCPM) or the
Ohio College of Podiatric Medicine (OCPM)
after three years of study at Lycoming. At
Lycoming, students in the APMEC program
must successfully complete 24 unit courses,
including the distribution requirements and a
basic foundation in biology, chemistry,
physics, and mathematics. During the first
year of study at PCPM or OCPM, students
must successfully complete a program
of basic science courses and an introduction
to podiatry. Successful completion of the
first year of professional training will
contribute toward the fulfillment of the
course requirements for the bachelor of arts
degree at Lycoming.
Most students in the cooperative program
will major in biology: if so, they will be
allowed to complete a modified major which
will exempt them from two biology courses:
Ecology (Biology 224) and Plant Sciences
(Biology 225). (This modified major
requires the successful completion of the
initial year at PCPM or OCPM).
Students interested in a career in podiatric
medicine should indicate their intentions to
the Health Professions Advisory Committee.
U.S. Army Reserve Officers Training
Corps Program (R.O.T.C.) - The program
provides an opportunity for Lycoming
students to enroll in R.O.T.C. Lycoming
notes enrollment in and successful comple-
tion of the program on student transcripts.
Military Science is a four-year program
divided into a basic course given during the
freshman and sophomore years and an
advanced course given during the junior and
senior years. Students who have not com-
pleted the basic course may qualify for the
advanced course by completing summer
camp between the sophomore and junior
years. Students enrolled in the advanced
course receive an annual stipend of $1,000.
One course each in written communication,
human behavior and military history will
fulfill the professional mihtary education
A
requirements. R.O.T.C. scholarship cadets
must also complete one semester of a foreign
language.
Students successfully completing the
advanced course and advanced summer
camp between the junior and senior years
will qualify for a commission as a Second
Lieutenant in the United States Army upon
graduation, and will incur a service obliga-
tion in the active Army or Army Reserves.
The only expense to the student for this
program is the $75 uniform deposit, which is
refundable, less costs.
Sculpture - The Art Department with the
Johnson Atelier Technical Institute of
Sculpture in Mercerville, New Jersey, offers
a BFA degree in sculpture. It uses a classical
apprenticeship approach as its teaching
method. This ancient method of teaching is
combined at Johnson with the most modem
and technically advanced foundry and
fabricating techniques.
The Art Department offers a synthesis
program that interrelates the student experi-
ence at both institutions. This is achieved by
having the student rotate between Lycoming
and the Atelier so that each form of education
is preparation for the other. Lycoming offers
a core academic program, a course of study
in the Art Department, and elective course
opportunities. Lycoming gives eight course
units of college credit to the student for
having successfully completed one of the ap-
prenticeship programs at the Johnson Atelier.
All work completed by the student at
Lycoming by the end of the sophomore
year will be applicable to a bachelor of arts
degree with a major in art should the student
decide to withdraw from the BFA program.
If the student should withdraw from the
cooperative program prior to completing the
apprenticeship at the Johnson Atelier,
Lycoming will give up to four units of credits
or one semester's work for the internship. If,
however, the student completes more work at
the Atelier that the four units, that extra work
will not be credited to the bachelor of arts
degree; it will only be used as part of the
bachelor of fine arts degree, and then only if
the course at the Atelier is completed.
This course of study is very rigorous. It
will require that the student be involved
almost continuously, either at Lycoming or at
the Johnson Atelier, during the four years it
will take to complete the degree. (See Art
Department listing for specific program.)
Cross Registration - A special opportunity
exists in the Williamsport area for students to
take courses through a registration arrange-
ment with Pennsylvania College of Technol-
ogy. Students may enroll for less than a full-
time course load at Penn College while
remaining enrolled in courses at Lycoming.
Student Teaching Abroad - Lycoming
College has established a cooperation
program with Moorhead State University
whereby teacher education students may
do all or part of their student teaching in a
foreign country.
This program offers exceptional students
the opportunity to student teach in nearly any
country in the world. Students are placed in
independent international schools where
English is the instructional language. An
effort is made to assign students in geo-
graphical areas that will enrich their back-
grounds, serve their special interests and
expand their cultural horizons.
Washington, United Nations and London
Semester and Capitol Semester Internship
Program - With the consent of the Depart-
ment of PoUtical Science, selected students
are permitted to study in Washington, D.C.,
at The American University for one semester.
They may choose from seven different
programs: Washington Semester, Urban
Semester, Foreign Policy Semester, Interna-
tional Development Semester, Economic
Policy Semester, Science and Technology
Semester, American Studies Semester.
M^
With the consent of either the Department
of History or Political Science, selected
students may enroll at Drew University in
Madison, New Jersey, in the United Nations
Semester, which is designed to provide a
first-hand acquaintance with the world
organization. Students with special interests
in world history, international relations, law,
and politics are eligible to participate.
The London Semester programs of Drew
and The American Universities emphasize
European history, politics, and culture.
Interested students participate with the
consent of either Departments of History or
Political Science.
The Capitol Semester Internship Program is
available to eligible students on a competi-
tive basis. The program is co-sponsored by
Pennsylvania's Office of Administration and
Departments of Education. Paid Internships
are available to students in most majors.
Interested students should contact the Career
Development Center for additional
information.
The Scholar Program
1 he Lycoming College Scholar Program
is a special program designed to meet
the needs and aspirations of highly motivated
students of superior intellectual ability. The
Lycoming Scholar satisfies the college
distribution requirements, generally on a
more exacting level and with more challeng-
ing courses than the average student.
Lycoming Scholars also paiticipate in special
interdisciplinary seminars and in serious
independent study culminating in a senior
project.
Students are admitted to the program by
invitation of the Scholar Council, the group
which oversees the program. The council
consists of a Director and four other faculty
selected by the Dean of the College, and four
students elected by current scholars. The
guidelines governing selection of new
scholars are flexible: academic excellence,
intellectual curiosity, and creativity are all
taken into account. Students who desire to
participate in the Scholar Program but are not
invited may petition the Scholar Council for
consideration. Petitioning students should
provide the Scholar Council with letters of
recommendation from Lycoming faculty and
a transcript to be sent to the director of the
Scholar Program.
To remain in the program, students must
maintain a cumulative average of 3.0
or better. Students who drop below this
average will be placed on Scholar probation
for one semester. After one semester, they
will be asked to leave the program if their
GPA has not returned to 3.0 or higher. To
graduate as a Scholar, a student must have at
least a 3.0 cumulative average. Scholars
must successfully complete five Lycoming
Scholars Seminars, as well as the non-
credit Senior Scholar Seminar in which they
present the results of their independent
studies. In addition, the following distribu-
tion requirements must be met. (Slightly
modified requirements exist for students in
the cooperative programs; a list of these re-
quirements can be obtained from the
Scholar Council.)
Scholar Distribution Requirements for
Student in AB and BFA Programs
A. English. Scholars must complete English
106 and one literature course numbered 200
or higher. The Scholar Council strongly
recommends that qualified scholars enroll in
the honors section of English 106 if schedul-
ing permits. English 106 must be taken
during the freshman year.
B. Foreign Language/Mathematical
Sciences. Scholars must satisfy the require-
ment in either language or mathematical
sciences. Language: Scholars must com-
plete two courses numbered 1 1 1 or higher
(excluding courses taught in English).
Mathematical Sciences: The mathematical
placement test determines whether a Scholar
ISk.
must take two or three courses for distribu-
tion. At least one course must be selected
from Mathematics 116, 128, 130, or 214.
Only one computer science course may be
used to fulfill the mathematical sciences
requirements.
C. Philosophy/Religion. Scholars must
satisfy this requirement in either of the two
areas. Philosophy. Two courses numbered
221 or higher. Religion: Two courses
numbered 222 or higher.
D. Fine Arts. Scholars must satisfy the
requirement in one of four areas. Art: Two
options are available in art. Either two
courses from Art 222, 223, 331, 332, 333,
334, 335 (Art History), OR two courses from
Art 1 1 1 , 1 15, 220 and 225 (Studio Art).
Music: The equivalent of two units of credit
from Music 117, 160-169, 330 or higher.
Theatre: Two courses from Theatre 140 or
higher, excluding Theatre 148. Literature:
Two literature courses from English 220 or
higher, Foreign Languages and Literatures
225, or French, German, or Spanish 323 or
higher.
E. Natural Sciences. Scholars must satisfy
the requirements in one of three areas.
Astronomy/Physics: Two courses numbered
111 or higher. Biology: Two courses num-
bered 1 10 or higher, excluding 1 14 and 1 15.
Chemistry: Two courses numbered 1 10 or
higher.
F. History/Social Sciences. Scholars must
satisfy the requirements in one of five areas.
Economics: Two courses numbered 1 10 or
higher. History: Two courses, one of which
must be numbered 200 or higher. Political
Science: Two courses numbered 1 16 or
higher. Psychology: Two courses including
Psychology 110 and one course numbered
224 or higher (excluding Psychology 338).
Sociology/Anthropology: Two courses from
Sociology 110, 220, 224, 226, 227, 229, 300
or higher.
Scholar Distribution Requirements for
Students in BSN Program
A. English. Same as for AB and BFA
degrees.
A
B. Mathematical Science. Same as for AB
and BFA degrees. (Note that the nursing
major requires Mathematics 103 and one
from Computer Science 108,125 or Mathe-
matics 214).
C. Philosophy/Religion. Met by taking
Philosophy 219 and Religion 120.
D. Fine Arts/Language. Same as for AB
and BFA scholars.
E. Natural Sciences. Met by Biology 113,
Biology 114, Biology 226 (required for the
major).
F. History/Social Science. Met by Psychol-
ogy 110, Psychology 117, (required for the
major) and one course in Sociology 300 or
higher. (This sociology course may be taken
in lieu of the introductory guided elective in
Sociology for the BSN.)
All Scholars Must Complete The
Following:
G. Physical Education. Scholars must
satisfy the same physical education require-
ments stipulated by the College for all
students.
H. Lycoming Scholar Seminars. Team
taught interdisciplinary seminars are held
every semester under the direction of the
Lycoming Scholar Council. They meet for
one hour each week (Tuesdays at noon) and
carry one hour of credit. Grades are "A/F"
and are based on students' performance.
Lycoming Scholars are required to success-
fully complete five seminars and they are
permitted to register for as many as eight.
Topics for each academic year will be
selected by the Scholar Council and an-
nounced before spring registration of the
previous year. Students must be accepted
into the Scholar Program before they enroll
in a Scholar Seminar. Scholars are strongly
urged to register for a least one seminar
during the freshman year.
L Senior Project. In the senior year,
scholars must successfully complete an
independent studies or departmental honors
project which has been approved in advance
by the Independent Studies Committee and
the Scholar Council. This project must be
presented orally as part of the Senior Scholar
Seminar and be accepted by the Scholar
Council.
J. Scholars must complete a major and 32
units, exclusive of the Senior Scholar
Seminar.
K. In the case of transfer students and those
who seek to enter the program after their
freshman year and in other cases deemed by
the Scholar Council to involve special or
extraordinary circumstances, the Council
shall make adjustments to the scholar distri-
bution requirements provided that in all cases
such exceptions and adjustments would still
satisfy the regular College distribution
requirements.
^Sl
Curriculum
Numbers 001-049 Developmental courses
Numbers 100-149 Introductory courses and
Freshman level courses
Numbers 200-249 Intermediate courses and
Sophomore level courses
Numbers 300-349 Intermediate courses and
Junior level courses
Numbers 400-449 Advanced courses and
Senior level courses
Numbers N50-N59* Non-catalogue courses
offered on a limited basis
Numbers 160-169 Applied Music, Theatre
Practicums and other fractional credit
courses
Numbers 470-479 Internships
Numbers N80-N89* Independent Study
Numbers 490-491 Independent Study for
Departmental Honors
*N = course level 1, 2, 3 or 4 as determined
by department
Courses not in sequence are listed
separately, as:
Drawing Art 111
Color Theory Art 212
Courses which imply a sequence are indi-
cated with a dash between, meaning that
the first semester must be taken prior to the
second, as:
Intermediate French
French 111-112
All students have the right of access to
all courses.
Accounting
Associate Professor: Kuhns
Assistant Professor: Wienecke (Chairperson)
Part-time Instructors: Crossley, Uzupis,
Weiss
1 he purpose of the accounting major is
to help prepare the student for a career within
the accounting profession. The major has two
tracks. Track I is designed for students whose
primary interests lie in the financial area of
public accounting and provides preparation
for the Certified Public Accountant Examina-
tion; Track II is designed for students with an
interest in management accounting and pro-
vides preparation for the Certified Manage-
ment Accountant Examination.
Track I — Financial Accounting requires:
Accounting 110, 220-221, 330, 440, 441,
443, 445, Mathematics 103, Computer
Science 108, and one unit to be selected from
Philosophy 216, Accounting 225, 226, 331,
442, 446, 447, and 448 or 449. Business 110
may be substituted for Accounting 110.
Duplicate credit will not be granted.
Students seeking entry into the pubUc
accounting field are advised to investigate the
professional requirements for certification in
the state in which they intend to practice so
that they may meet all educational require-
ments prior to graduation. All Track I majors
are advised to enroll in Accounting 225, 226,
331 , 442, 447, and 449, Economics 1 10 and
HI, Business 335, 336, and 338, and one of
the following: Business 340, Economics 220,
or 337.
Track II — Management Accounting
requires: Accounting 110, 220, 330-331,
444, and 449; Mathematics 103; Computer
Science 108; and Business 338, 339,
and 440. All Track II majors are advised to
enroll in Economics 110 and 111 and Busi-
ness 335 and 336. Students planning to sit
for the Certified Management Accountant
Examination are advised to enroll in Ac-
counting 440, 441, 442, and 443. Business
110 may be substituted for Accounting 110.
Duplicate credit will not be granted
Three minors are offered by the Depart-
ment of Accounting. The following courses
are required to complete a minor in Financial
Accounting: Accounting 1 10, 220, 221, 443,
447 and any other accounting course or
independent study. A minor in Managerial
Accounting requires the completion of
Accounting 110, 220, 330-331 and 444. To
obtain a minor in Federal Income Tax, a
student must complete Accounting 110, 220-
221, 441, and 442.
110
ELEMENTARY ACCOUNTING THEORY
An introductory course in recording, classify-
ing, summarizing, and interpreting the basic
business transaction. Problems of classifica-
tion and interpretation of accounts and prepa-
ration of financial statements are studied.
Not open to students who have received
credit for Business 110. Prerequisite:
Second-semester freshman or consent
instructor.
A
220-221
INTERMEDIATE
ACCOUNTING THEORY
An intensive study of accounting state-
ments and analytical procedures with an
emphasis upon corporate accounts, various
decision models, price-level models, earnings
per share, pension accounting, accounting for
leases, and financial statement analysis.
Prerequisite: AccountingllO.
225
FINANCIAL STATEMENT ANALYSIS
Deals with the analysis of financial
statements as an aid to decision making. The
theme of the coiu-se is understanding the
financial data which are analyzed as well as
the methods by which they are analyzed and
interpreted. This course should prove of
value to all who need a thorough understand-
ing of the uses to which financial statements
are put as well as to those who must know
how to use them intelligently and effectively.
This includes accountants, security analysts,
lending officers, credit analysts, managers,
and all others who make decisions on the
basis of financial data. Prerequisite: Ac-
counting 110 or Business 110.
226
GOVERNMENT AND
FUND ACCOUNTING
This course is designed to introduce
accounting for not-for-profit organizations.
Municipal accounting and reporting are
studied. Prerequisite: Accounting 110 or
Business 110. One-half unit of credit.
330-331
COST AND BUDGETARY
ACCOUNTING THEORY
Methods of accounting for material, labor,
and factory overhead expenses consumed in
manufacturing using job order, process, and
standard costing. Application of cost ac-
counting and budgetary theory to decision
making in the area of make or buy, expansion
of production and sales, and accounting for
control are dealt with. Prerequisite: Ac-
counting 220 and Mathematics 103 or
consent of instructor.
440
AUDITING THEORY
A study of the science or art of verifying,
analyzing, and interpreting accounts and
reports. The goal of the course is to empha-
size concepts which will enable students to
understand the philosophy and environment
of auditing. Special attention is given to the
public accounting profession, studying
auditing standards, professional ethics, the
legal liability inherent in the attest function,
the study and evaluation of internal control,
the nature of evidence, the growing use of
statistical sampling, the impact of electronic
data processing, and the basic approach to
planning an audit. Finally, various audit
reports expressing independent expert
opinions on the fairness of financial state-
ments are studied. Prerequisite: Accounting
221, Mathematics 103, and Computer
Science 108.
441
FEDERAL INCOME TAX
Analysis of the provisions of the Internal
Revenue Code relating to income, deduc-
tions, inventories, and accounting methods.
Practical problems involving determination
of income and deductions, capital gains and
losses, computation and payment of taxes
through withholding at the source and
through declaration are considered. Planning
transactions so that a minimum amount of tax
will result is emphasized. Prerequisite:
Accounting 110 or consent of instructor.
442
FEDERAL INCOME TAX
ADMINISTRATION AND PLANNING
An analysis of the provisions of the
Internal Revenue Code relating to partner-
ships, estates, trusts, and corporations. An
A
extensive series of problems is considered,
and effective tax planning is emphasized.
Prerequisite: Accounting 441.
443
ADVANCED ACCOUNTING I
Certain areas of advanced accounting
theory, including business combinations and
consolidated financial statements. Prerequi-
site: Accounting 221 . One-half unit of credit.
444
CONTROLLERSHIP
Control process in the organization. Gen-
eral systems theory, financial control sys-
tems, centralization-decentralization,
performance measurement and evaluation,
forecasts and budgets, and marketing,
production and finance models for control
purposes. Prerequisite: Accounting 331 or
consent of instructor.
445
AUDITING PRACTICE
An audit project is presented, solved and
the auditor's report written. This course is
limited to students who have either com-
pleted or are enrolled in Accounting 440.
One-half unit of credit. Grade will be
recorded as "P" or "F."
446
SEMINARS ON APB OPINIONS
AND FASB STANDARDS
A seminar course for accounting majors
with library assignments to gain a workable
understanding of the highly technical
opinions of the Accounting Principles Board
and standards of the Financial Accounting
Standards Board. One term paper. Possible
trip to New York City to attend a public
hearing of the Financial Accounting Stan-
dards Board. Prerequisite: Accounting 110.
May term.
447
ADVANCED ACCOUNTING II
An intensive study of parmerships, install-
ment and consignment sales, branch account-
ing, bankruptcy and reorganization, estates
and trusts, government entities, and non-
profit organizations. Prerequisite: Account-
ing 221 . One-half unit of credit.
448
CONTEMPORARY PROBLEMS
FOR CPA CANDIDATES
Problems from the Accounting Practice
sections of past C.P.A. examinations, which
require a thorough knowledge of the core
courses in their solution, are assigned. The
course is intended to meet the needs of those
interested in public accounting and prepara-
tion for the Certified Public Accountant's
examination. Prerequisite: Accounting 330
or consent of instructor. One-half unit of
credit. Grade will be recorded as "P"
or "F."
449
PRACTICUM IN ACCOUNTING
An introduction to the real world of ac-
counting. Students are placed in Managerial
and Public Accounting positions in order to
effect a synthesis of the students' academic
course work and its practical applications.
Specifics of the course work to be worked
out in conjunction with department, student
and sponsor.
470-479
INTERNSHIP (See index)
Interns in accounting typically work off
campus under the supervision of a public or
private accountant
N80-N89
INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index)
Typical examples of recent studies in
accounting are: computer program to
generate financial statements, educational
core for public accountants, inventory
control, and church taxation.
490-491
INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index)
JSk.
Accounting -
Mathematical
Sciences
Associate Professor: Kuhns (Coordinator)
1 he accounting-mathematical sciences
interdisciplinary major is designed to offer,
within a liberal-arts framework, courses
which will aid in constructing mathematical
models for business decision making.
Students obtain the necessary substantial
background in both mathematical sciences
and accounting.
Requiring accounting courses are: Ac-
counting 110, 220-221, 330-331,441,442.
In mathematical sciences required courses
are: Computer Science 125 and 321 and
Mathematics 112, 128, 129, 338 and either
103 or 332. Recommended courses include:
Mathematics 130, 238, 333; Business 223,
335, 336, 338, 339; Computer Science 108,
246; Economics 110, 111; Psychology 224,
225; and Sociology-Anthropology 110.
^ American Studies
Professor: Piper (Coordinator)
1 he American Studies major offers a
comprehensive program in American
civilization which introduces students to the
complexities underlying the development of
America and its contemporary life. Thirteen
courses are included.
FOUR COURSE REQUIREMENTS - The
primary integrating units of the major,
these courses some team-taught, will encour-
age students to consider ideas from different
points of view and help then to correlate
information and methods from various
disciplines:
1. America As a Civilization: American
Studies 200 (First semester of major
study)
2. American Tradition in the Arts and
Literature: American Studies 220
3. Research and Methodology: History 449
or Sociology/Anthro 447 (Junior or
Senior Year)
4. Internship or Independent Study (Junior
or Senior year)
CONCENTRATION AREAS - Six courses
in one option and three in the other are
needed. Six primary concentration -option
courses in American Arts or American
Society build around the insights gained in
the core courses. They focus particular
attention on areas most germane to academic
and vocational interests. The three additional
courses from the other option give further
breadth to an understanding of America.
Students also will be encouraged to take
elective courses relating to other cultures.
Students should design their American
Studies major in consultation with the
program coordinator.
A
AMERICAN ARTS
CONCENTRATION OPTION
Art 332 — American Art of the 20th Century
English 222 — American Literature I
English 223 — American Literature II
Music 128 — American Music
N 80 — Studies in American Music
Theatre Studies — American Theatre
AMERICAN SOCIETY
CONCENTRATION OPTION
Economics 224 — Urban Problems
History 442 — U.S. Social and Intellectual
History to 1877
History 443 — U.S. Social and Intellectual
History since 1877
Political Science 331 — Civil Rights and
Liberties
Political Science 335 — Law and Society
Sociology 334 — Racial and Cultural
Minorities
200
AMERICA AS A CIVILIZATION
An analysis of the historical, sociocultural,
economic, and political perspectives of
American civilization with special attention
to the interrelationships between these
various orientations. May be taken for either
one-half unit (Section 200A) or full unit
(SectionB); declared majors and prospective
majors should take the full-unit course, 200B.
Alternate years.
220
AMERICAN TRADITION IN
THE ARTS AND LITERATURE
The relationship of the arts and literature
to the various historical periods of American
life.
470-479 INTERNSHIP
N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY
490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS
Art
Professors: Bogle, Shipley
Assistant Professor: Golahny (Chairperson)
Visiting Assistant Professor: Monk
Adjunct Faculty at Johnson Ateher: Bartons,
Barrie, Lash, Pitynski
1 he Art Department offers two majors in
the A.B. Degree (Studio Art and Art History)
and a second degree program, a B.F.A.
Degree in Sculpture.
The A.B. Degree -
Studio Art
1 o complete a Bachelor of Arts Degree
with a major in studio art, the students must
complete the seven-course foundation
program and the requirements for an area of
specialization, participate in each semester's
colloquium (while a declared major), and
satisfactorily participate in the senior
exhibition. Exception to participation in the
colloquium may be made by the art faculty.
A
Foundation Program
Art 111 Drawing I
Art 115 Two-Dimensional Design
Art 116 Figure Modeling
Art 212 Color Theory
Art 222 Survey of Art: Pre-history
Through The Middle Ages
Art 223 Survey of Art: From the Renais-
sance through the Modem Age
Art 227 Introduction to Photography
Art 148, 248, 348, 448 Art Colloquium
Areas of Specialization
I. Painting
ART 220 Painting!
ART 221 Drawing II
ART 330 Painting I
ART 446 Studio Research
and two art history courses numbered
300 or above.
n. Printmaking
ART 221 Drawing II
ART 228 Printmaking I
ART 338 Printmaking II
ART 446 Studio Research
and two art history courses numbered
300 or above.
m.Sculpture
ART 225 Sculpture!
ART 226 Figure Modeling II
ART 335 Sculpture II
ART 446 Studio Research
and two art history courses numbered
300 or above.
IV. Commercial Design
ART 221 Drawing II
ART 311 Practicum in Layout and Design
ART 312 Practicum in Typographic
Composition
ART 337 Photography II
ART 442 Special Projects with
Commercial Design
ART 443 Computer Graphics for
Commercial Design
CGO 511 Layout and Design
CG0 512 Typographic Composition
A student is encouraged to take the fol-
lowing courses: Internship (Art 470-479),
Advertising (Business 332), Writing for
Special Audiences (Mass Communication
323), Introduction to Mass Communication
(Mass Comm 110), Social Psychology
(Psy 224).
V. Generalist Art Major
to be taken by those students who are seeking
teaching certification in Art:
ART 119 Ceramics!
ART 220 Painting!
ART 225 Sculpture!
ART 228 Printmaking!
and two art history courses numbered 300 or
above. In addition to Art Department
courses, under the generalist major, the
student must complete the art certification
program in the Education Department.
VI. Photography
ART 337 Photography II
ART 340 Color Photography
ART 341 Large Format View/Camera
Photography
ART 446 Student Research
and two art history courses numbered
300 or above.
The A.B. Degree -
Art History
1 o complete a bachelor of arts degree
with a major in art history, a student
must take courses in art history, studio art,
and history and/or religion. A student
majoring in art history is advised to take a
foreign language.
^k.
Required of all students:
ART 222 Survey of Art: Pre-History
Through the Middle Ages
ART 223 Survey of Art: From Renaissance
Through the Modem Age
ART 447 Art History Research
Choose four of the following:
ART 331 20th Century European Art
ART 332 American Art of the 20th Century
ART 333 19th Century European and
American Art
ART 334 Art of the Renaissance
ART 336 Art of the Baroque
ART 339 Women in Art
Choose two of the following:
ART 111 Drawing!
ART 115 Two-Dimensional Design
ART 116 Figure Modeling I
ART 227 Introduction to Photography
Choose two of the following:
fflSTORY210 Ancient History
HISTORY 212 Medieval Europe and
its Neighbors
HISTORY 418 History of Renaissance
Thought
RELIGION 1 13 Old Testament Faith
and History
RELIGION 114 New Testament Faith
and History
RELIGION 226 Biblical Archaeology
It is furthermore suggested that the
student choose electives in other departments
that may complement the studies of art
history. Among these recommended
electives are:
FRENCH 412 French Literature of the
19th Century
ENGLISH 336 Shakespeare
MUSIC 1 17 Survey of Western Music
MUSIC 335 History of Western Music I
MUSIC 336 History of Western Music II
THEATRE 332 History of Theatre I
THEATRE 333 History of Theatre II
Minors
Five minors are being offered by the Art
Department. Requirements for each follow:
Commercial Design: Art 111, 115,212,223,
3 11, 3 12, 5 11, 5 12; Painting: Art 111, 115.
220, 330 and 221 or 223; Photography: Art
1 11, 212, 223, 227, 337 and 340 or 341;
Sculpture: Art 1 16, 225, 226, 335, and 1 1 1,
119 or 445; Art History: Art 222, 223 and
two advanced art history courses. Art Majors
who minor in art history must take two
additional upper level coiu^ses beyond the
two required for the minor intended for
students who major in other disciplines (i.e.
Art 222, 223 and four upper level courses).
The B,F.A. Degree
in Sculpture
1 he student completes a specified course
of study in the Art Department, the Lycom-
ing College distribution requirements, and
one of the field specialization apprenticeship
programs at the Johnson Atelier in Mercer-
ville. New Jersey.
The Art Department course of study
consists of 12 courses in studio and art
history: Figure Modeling I and II (Art 116
and 226), Sculpture I and II (Art 225 and
335), Drawing I and II (Art 1 1 1 and 221),
Introduction to Photography (Art 227), 2-D
Design (Art 115), Survey of Art (Art 222 and
223), and two additional courses in Art
History (Art 331, 332, 333, 334, 336 or 339).
Twelve additional course units are re-
quired of the student. The student must meet
the requirements of the distribution program
within these courses.
In order to complete the B.F.A. Degree
the students must participate in the art
colloquium every semester while taking
course work at Lycoming (as a declared
major) and must participate in a senior
exhibition. Exception to participation in the
colloquium may he made by the art faculty.
^L
The student must also complete one of the
field specialization apprenticeships at the
Johnson Atelier Technical Institute of
Sculpture in Mercerville, New Jersey. This
requires the student to be at the Johnson
Atelier for a period of between 16 and 23 1/2
months. The student receives eight course
units of credit at Lycoming College for
successfully completing the field specializa-
tion apprenticeship at Johnson Atelier. It is
expected that the work for the apprenticeship
component will be completed during the
summers and the junior year.
Admission to the B.F.A. degree program
is on the basis of meeting the admission stan-
dards of Lycoming College, and passing a
portfolio review and interview by members
of the Lycoming College Art Department.
Ill
DRAWING I
Study of the human figure with gesture
and proportion stressed. Student is made
familiar with different drawing techniques
and media. Some drawings from nature.
Offered with Drawing II and III.
115
TWO-DIMENSIONAL DESIGN
The basic fundamentals found in the two-
dimensional arts: line, shape, form, space,
color, and composition are taught in relation-
ship to the other two-dimensional arts.
Perceptual theories and their relationships to
what and why we see what we see in art are
discussed with each problem.
116
HGURE MODELING I
Understanding the figure will be ap-
proached through learning the basic struc-
tures and proportions of the figure. The
course is conceived as a three-dimensional
drawing class. At least one figure will be
cast by each student.
119
CERAMICS I
Emphasis placed on pottery design as it
relates to function of vessels and the design
parameters imposed by the characteristics of
clay. The techniques of ceramics are taught
to encourage expression rather than to
dispense merely a technical body of
information.
212
COLOR THEORY
A study of the physical and emotional
aspects of color. Emphasis will be placed on
the study of color as an aesthetic agent for
the artist. The color theories of Johannes
Itten will form the base for this course with
some study of the theories of Albert Munsell,
Faber Birren, and Wilhelm Ostwald.
220
PAINTING I
An introduction of painting techniques
and materials. Coordination of color, value,
and design within the painting is taught.
Some painting from the figure. No limita-
tions as to painting media, subject matter, or
style. Prerequisite: Art 115 or consent of
instructor.
221
DRAWING II
Continued study of the human figure.
Emphasis is placed on realism and figure-
ground coordination with the use of value
and design. Prerequisite: Art 111.
Ill
SURVEY OF ART: PRE-HISTORY
THROUGH THE MIDDLE AGES
A survey of Western architectiu-e, sculp-
ture, and painting. Emphasis is on the inter-
relation of form and content and on the relat-
edness of the visual arts to their cultural
environment: Paleolithic Art, Near East,
Egypt, Greece, Rome, and Medieval Europe.
A
223
SURVEY OF ART: FROM THE
RENAISSANCE THROUGH
THE MODERN AGE
A survey of Western architecture, sculp-
ture, and painting. Emphasis is on the inter-
relation of form and content and on the relat-
edness of the visual arts to their cultural
environment: 14th-20th centuries.
225
SCULPTURE I
An introduction to the techniques, materi-
als, and ideas of sculptiu^e. Clay, plaster,
wax, wood, and other materials will be used.
The course will be concerned with ideas
about sculpture as expression, and with
giving material form to ideas.
226
HGURE MODELING II
Will exploit the structures and understand-
ings learned in Figure Modeling I to produce
larger, more complex figurative works.
There will be a requirement to cast one of the
works in plaster. Prerequisite: Art 116 and
consent of instructor.
227
INTRODUCTION TO PHOTOGRAPHY
Objectives of the course are to develop
technical skills in the use of photographic
equipment (cameras, films, darkroom,
printmaker) and to develop sensitivity in the
areas of composition, form, light, picture
quality, etc. Each student must own (or have
access to) a 35mm camera capable of full-
manual operation.
228
PRINTMAKING I
Introduction to the techniques of
silkscreen, intaglio, monotype and lithogra-
phy printing. One edition of at least six
prints must be completed in each area.
Prerequisite: Art 111 or 115 or consent of
instructor.
229
CERAMICS II
Continuation of Ceramics I. Emphasis on
use of the wheel and technical aspects such
as glaze making and kiln firing. Prerequi-
site: Art 119.
311
PRACTICUM IN LAYOUT AND DESIGN
Utilization of commercial design tech-
niques and skills in an applied setting
through work experience. Students will
produce images and do layout work primarily
with on-campus departments and offices.
Students must take 311 concurrently with
GCO 511, Layout and Design. One hour
credit. Open only to students enrolled in
GCO 511.
312
PRACTICUM IN TYPOGRAPHIC
COMPOSITION
Utilization of commercial design tech-
niques and skills in an applied setting through
work experience. Students will produce
images and do layout work primarily with
on-campus departments and offices. Students
must take 312 concurrently with GCO 512.
Typographic Composition. One hour credit.
Open only to students enrolled in GCO 512.
330
PAINTING II
Emphasis is placed on individual style and
technique. Artists and movements in art are
studied. No limitations as to painting media,
subject matter, or style. Prerequisite:
Art 220.
331
20TH CENTURY EUROPEAN ART
Stylistic developments in Europe from
1880 to the present, including Cubism,
Fauvism, Expressionism, Dada, and Surreal-
ism. Picasso, Matisse, Kandinsky, and
Mondrian are among the major artists
studied.
A
332
AMERICAN ART OF
THE 20TH CENTURY
The art of the United States from about
1880 to the present, with emphasis on the
innovations of Americans in painting,
sculpture and architecture, and on the mean-
ing and historical roots of contemporary art.
333
19TH CENTURY EUROPEAN
AND AMERICAN ART
The art of Western Europe and the United
States from 1780-1900, with emphasis on
painting in France. Those artists to be
studied include David and Goya, Delacroix,
Courbet, The Impressionists, Turner, Homer,
Cole and Eakins.
334
ART OF THE RENAISSANCE
The art of Italy and Northern Europe from
1300-1530, with emphasis on the painters
Giotto, Masaccio, Leonardo da Vinci,
Raphael, Titian, Van Eyck, and Durer, the
sculptors Ghiberti, Donatello and Mich-
elangelo, and the architects Brunelleschi and
Alberti.
335
SCULPTURE II
A continuation of Sculpture I (Art 225).
Emphasis is on advanced technical process.
Casting of bronze and aluminum sculpture
will be done in the school foundry. Prerequi-
site: Art 225.
336
ART OF THE BAROQUE
Seventeenth-century painting and sculp-
ture in Italy and the Netherlands with
emphasis on Bernini, Poussin, Rubens, and
Rembrandt, and with special attention given
to the expressive, narrative, painterly, and
tactile styles present in their art.
337
PHOTOGRAPHY II
To extend the skills developed in Photog-
raphy I (Art 227) by continued growth in
technical expertise including instruction in
the use and capabilities of large format view
cameras. Emphasis is placed on conceptual
and aesthetic aspects of photography.
Prerequisite: Art 227.
338
PRINTMAKING II
Further study of the techniques of
silkscreen, intaglio, monotype, and lithogra-
phy printing with emphasis on multi plate
and viscosity printing. Two editions of at
least six prints must be completed in each of
two areas. Prerequisite: Art 228.
339
WOMEN IN ART
A survey of women artists from a variety
of viewpoints — aesthetic, historical, social,
political and economic — which seeks to
understand and integrate the contributions of
women artists into the mainstream of the
history of the art. No prerequisite.
340
COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY
Study of the techniques and aesthetics of
color photography. Work will be directed
towards the use of both color negative and
color slide processes. Students will be
required to learn the special requirements of
photographing in both indoor and outdoor
light conditions. A portfolio of color prints
will be produced. Prerequisite: Art 227
and 337.
341
LARGE FORMAT VIEW
CAMERA PHOTOGRAPHY
Study of the techniques and aesthetics of
the large format view camera in Fine Art
Photography. Emphasis will be placed on the
experience of using the large format view
A
camera. Students will be encouraged to
explore alternative photographic processes
such as platinum printing, the gum bichro-
mate process, etc. using the large negative
produced. Prerequisities: Art 227 and 237.
440
PAINTING III
Professional quality is stressed. There is
some experimentation with new painting
techniques and styles.
441
DRAWING III
Continued study of human figure, individ-
ual style, and professional control of drawing
techniques and media are now emphasized.
442
SPECIAL PROJECT IN COMMERCIAL
DESIGN
Concentrated research, preparation and
execution of a series of projects in commer-
cial design utilizing the traditional studio
tools including airbrush, water-based medi-
ums, colored pencils, and pen and ink. The
following skills are involved: illustration,
paste-up, typesetting, overlays, lettering and
layout. Prerequisite: GCO 511, 512 or
consent of instructor.
443
COMPUTER GRAPHICS FOR
COMMERCIAL DESIGN
Concentrated research, preparation and
execution of a series of projects in commer-
cial design utilizing computer imaging.
Students will learn to generate original
moving and still images in color using
existing graphic creation software and
peripheral devices, such as digitalizing
cameras, digitalizing drawing devices,
printers, and slide producers. Prerequisitie:
CGO 511,512 or consent of instructor.
445
SCULPTURE III
In Sculpture III the student is expected to
produce a series of sculptures that follow a
conceptual and technical line of develop-
ment. Prerequisite: Art 116, 225, and 335.
446
STUDIO RESEARCH
Independent research in an elective studio
area, conducted under the supervision of the
appropriate faculty member, includes
creation of work which may be incorporated
in the senior group exhibition. Student works
in private studio assigned by the department
447
ART HISTORY RESEARCH
Independent research, conducted under
the supervision of the appropriate faculty
member, includes the research and writing of
a thesis, to be presented to a committee of
Art Department faculty.
148, 248, 348 and 448
ART COLLOQUIUM
A non -credit seminar in which faculty,
students and invited professionals discuss and
critique specific art projects. Required of all
students majoring in art. Taken each
semester. Meets 2-4 times each semester.
Pass/Fail. Non-credit seminar.
470-479
INTERNSHIP (See index)
Recent studies in anatomy. Aspects of the
art nouveau, lithography, photography,
pottery, problems in illustration, and water-
color.
490-491
INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index)
A
Graphic Arts
1 hrough special arrangements, the fol-
lowing courses offered at Pennsylvania
College of Technology are available only to
Art majors in Commercial Design. The Penn
College courses are taken as part of the
student's schedule and are listed with Lycom-
ing's offerings during registration periods.
511
LAYOUT AND DESIGN
Analysis of materials, tools, and tech-
niques used in preparation of copy for
reproduction; paste-up and color separation
overlays. 3 cr.
512
TYPOGRAPHIC COMPOSITION
Fundamentals of typesetting. Theory and
practice in the care and use of
composing machines, both hot (mechanical)
and cold (photo). 3 cr.
Astronomy
And Physics
Associate Professor: Erickson
Assistant Professors: Fisher (Chairperson),
Wolfe
1 he department offers two majors. The
major in astronomy is specifically designed
to train students in the field of planetarium
education; it also may serve as a basis for
earning state certification as a secondary
school teacher of general science. The major
in physics can prepare students for graduate
work in physics, astronomy, and related
physical sciences, for the cooperative
program in engineering, for state certification
as secondary school teachers of physics, or
for technical positions in industry.
Astronomy
1 he major in astronomy requires courses
in astronomy, physics, chemistry and
mathematics. The astronomy courses include
Astronomy 111 and five additional courses
numbered Astronomy 112 or higher; at least
four of these five additional courses must be
numbered Astronomy 230 or higher. Other
required courses are Physics 225-226,
Chemistry 110-111 or 330-331, and Mathe-
matics 128-129. Astronomy majors are also
required to register for four semesters of
Astronomy 349 and 449 (non-credit collo-
quia). The following courses are recom-
mended: Philosophy 223 and 333, Physics
333, and Art 227.
A minor in astronomy consists of a grade
of C or better in both Astronomy 111 and
Physics 225 plus any three additional courses
selected from Physics 226 or astronomy
courses numbered 200 or higher.
A
104
FIELD GEOLOGY
A methods course introducing the field
techniques needed to study the geology
of an area. May or summer term only.
107
OBSERVATIONAL ASTRONOMY
A methods course providing the opportunity
to make a variety of astronomical
observations, both visually and photographic-
ally, with and without telescopes.
The planetarium is used to familiarize the
student with the sky at various
times during the year and from different
locations on earth. May or summer term
only.
101
PRINCIPLES OF ASTRONOMY (B)
111
PRINCIPLES OF ASTRONOMY (A)
A summary of current concepts of the
universe from the solar system to distant
galaxies. Describes the techniques and
instruments used in astronomical research.
Presents not only what is reasonably well
known about the universe, but also considers
some of the major unsolved problems.
Astronomy 101 and 111 share the same three
hours of lecture and two hours of laboratory
each -week. HI has one additional hour each
week for more advanced mathematical
treatment of the material. Credit may not be
earned for both 101 and 111. Corequisite for
111: Mathematics 107 or consent of
instructor.
102
EARTH SCIENCE (B)
112
EARTH SCIENCE (A)
A study of the physical processes that
continually affect the planet Earth, shaping
our environment. Describes how past events
and lifeforms can be reconstructed from
preserved evidence to reveal the history of
oiu- planet from its origin to the present.
Emphasizes the ways in which geology,
meteorology, and oceanography interrelate
with man and the environment. Astronomy
102 and 112 share the same three hours of
lecture and two hours of laboratory each
week. 112 has one additional hour each
week for more advanced mathematical
treatment of the material. Credit may not be
earned for both 102 and 112. Corequisite for
112: Mathematics 107 or consent of instruc-
tor. Alternate years.
103
METEOROLOGY (B)
113
METEOROLOGY (A)
The general properties of the atmosphere and
their measurements will be discussed in terms
of basic physical laws. The large scale
processes that create a suitable climate for
life on Earth are discussed as well as the
smaller scale processes that must be taken
into account in scientific weather prediction.
Astronomy 103 and 112 share the same three
hours of lecture and two hours of laboratory
each week. 113 has one additional hour each
week for more advanced mathematical
treatment of the material. Credit may not be
earned for both 103 and 113. Corequisite for
113: Mathematics 107. Alternate years.
114
MANNED SPACE FLIGHT I
Traces the beginnings of rocketry and
spaceflight capability from Sputnik (1957)
through the conclusion of the Apollo moon
landings (1972). Extensive use of NASA
video and other audio-visual aids. Examina-
tion of scientific, engineering and political
motivations. When taken in May term, must
be scheduled with Astronomy 115. Not for
distribution. Alternate years. Half unit.
A
115
MANNED SPACE FLIGHT II
Examines manned spaceflight from
Skylab missions (1973-74) through ApoUo-
Soyuz Test Project, early Space Shuttle
missions, to current U.S. and Soviet space
efforts. Extensive use of NASA video.
Examination of scientific, engineering, and
political motivations. When taken in May
Term, must be scheduled with Astronomy
114. Not for distribution. Alternate years.
Half unit.
230
PLANETARIUM TECHNIQUES
A methods course covering major aspects
of planetarium programming, operation
and maintenance. Students are required to
prepare and present a planetarium show.
Upon successfully completing the course,
students are eligible to become planetarium
assistants. Three hours of lecture and
demonstration and three hours of practical
training per week. Prerequisite: A grade of
C or better in Astronomy 101 or HI.
Alternate years.
243
PLANETARY SCIENCE
A comparative survey of the various
classes of natural objects that orbit the sun,
including the major planets, their satellites,
the minor planets, and comets. Topics
include meteorological processes in atmos-
pheres, geological processes that shape
surface features, internal structures, the role
of spacecraft in the exploration of the solar
system, and clues to the origin and dynamic
evolution of the solar system. Four hours of
lecture per week. Prerequisites: A grade of
C or better in Astronomy 111 or Astronomy
112 or Physics 225. Alternate years.
344
RELATIVITY AND COSMOLOGY
A detailed presentation of the special
theory of relativity and an introduction to the
general theory. Topics include: observational
and experimental tests of relativity, four-
vectors, tensors, space-time curvature,
alternative cosmological models, and the
origin and future of the universe. Four hours
of lecture per week. Prerequisites: Astron-
omy 111 and Physics 225. Alternate years.
Cross-listed as Physics 344.
445
STELLAR EVOLUTION
The physical principles governing the
internal structure and external appearance of
stars. Mechanisms of energy generation and
transport within stars. The evolution of stars
from initial formation to final stages. The
creation of chemical elements by nucleosyn-
thesis. Four hours of lecture per week.
Prerequisites: Astronomy 111 (Principles of
Astronomy A) and Physics 226 (Introductory
Physics with Calculus 11). Alternate years.
446
STELLAR DYNAMICS AND
GALACTIC STRUCTURE
The motion of objects in gravitational
fields. Introduction to the n-body problem.
The relation between stellar motions and the
galactic potential. The large scale structure
of galaxies in general and of the Milky Way
Galaxy in particular. Four hours of lecture
per week. Prerequisites: Astronomy 111
(Principles of Astronomy A) and Physics 225
(Introductory Physics with Calculus I).
Alternate years.
349 & 449
ASTRONOMY AND
PHYSICS COLLOQUIA
This non-credit but required course for
juniors and seniors majoring in astronomy
and physics offers students a chance to meet
and hear active scientists in astronomy,
physics, and related scientific areas talk
about their own research or professional
activities. In addition, majors in astronomy
and physics must present two lectures, one
^^
given during the junior year and one given
during the senior year, on the results of a
literature survey or on individual research.
Students majoring in this department are
required to attend four semesters during the
junior and senior years. A letter grade will
be given when the student gives a lecture.
Otherwise the grade will be P/F. Students in
the Cooperative Program in Liberal Arts and
Engineering are required to attend two
semesters and present one lecture during their
junior year. Non-credit course. One hour
per week. Cross-listed as Physics 349 & 449.
470-479
INTERNSHIP (See index)
N80-N89
INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index)
Independent studies may be undertaken in
most areas of astronomy.
490-491
INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index)
Physics
1 he major in physics requires courses in
physics, chemistry and mathematics. The
required physics courses must include
Physics 225, 226, 331, 332 and four addi-
tional courses numbered Physics 333 or
higher. Up to two courses chosen from
Astronomy 111, 112, 113,243,445 and 446
may substitute for two of the four physics
electives. Other required courses are
Chemistry 110-111 or 330-331, and Mathe-
matics 128-129. Physics majors are also
required to register for four semesters of
Physics 349 and 449 (non-credit coUoquia).
The following courses are recommended:
Mathematics 231 and 238, Computer Science
125 (all three required for the cooperative
engineering program and by many graduate
schools), and Philosophy 223 and 333.
A minor in physics consists of a grade C
or better in both semesters of the Physics
225-226 sequence, Physics 331, Physics 332,
and one additional course selected from
physics courses numbered 300 or higher.
106
ENERGY ALTERNATIVES
A physicist's definition of work, energy,
and power. The various energy sources
available for use, such as fossil fuels, nuclear
fission and fusion, hydro, solar, wind, and
geothermal. The advantages and disadvan-
tages of each energy conversion method,
including availability, efficiency, and
environmental effects. Present areas of
energy research and possible future develop-
ments. Projections of possible future energy
demands. Exercises and experiments in
energy collection, conversion, and utilization.
May or summer term only.
225-226
FOJNDAMENTALS OF PHYSICS I-II
A mathematically rigorous introduction to
physics designed for majors in physics,
astronomy, chemistry and mathematics.
Topics include mechanics, thermodynamics,
electricity and magnetism, waves, optics, and
modem physics. Five hours of lecture and
recitation and one three-hour laboratory per
week. Corequisite: Math 128-129 (Calculus
I and 11). With consent of department,
Math 109 may substitute for Math 128-129 as
a prerequisite.
331
CLASSICAL MECHANICS
An analytical approach to classical me-
chanics. Topics include: kinematics and
dynamics of single particles and systems of
particles, gravitation and other central forces,
moving reference frames, and Lagrangian
and Hamiltonian formulations of mechanics.
Four hours of lecture and three hours of
laboratory per week. Prerequisites: Mathe-
matics 129 and a grade ofC or better in
Physics 225.
A
332
ELECTROMAGNETIS M
A theoretical treatment of classical
electromagnetism. Topics include: electro-
statics, magnetostatics, electric and magnetic
potentials, electric and magnetic properties of
matter. Maxwell's equations, the electromag-
netic field, and the propagation of electro-
magnetic radiation. Four hours of lecture
and three hours of laboratory per week. Pre-
requisite: Math 129 and a grade ofC or
better in Physics 226.
333
OPTICS
Geometrical optics, optical systems,
physical optics, interference, Fraunhofer
and Fresnel diffraction, and coherence and
lasers will be covered. Three hours of lecture
and three hours of laboratory per week.
Prerequisites: Physics 226 and Mathematics
128 or consent of instructor. Alternate years.
336
MATHEMATICAL
METHODS OF PHYSICS
Solution of ordinary linear differential
equations using power and Laplace trans-
forms, nonlinear differential and coupled
differential equations, Fourier analysis using
both trigonometric and complex exponential
functions, complex variables, eigenvalue
problems, infinite dimensional vector spaces,
partial differential equations, boundary value
problem solutions to the wave equation,
heat flow equation and Laplace's equation.
Prerequisites: Math 231 and 238.
Alternate years.
337
THERMODYNAMICS AND
STATISTICAL MECHANICS
Classical thermodynamics will be pre-
sented, showing that the macroscopic
properties of a system can be specified
without a knowledge of the microscopic
properties of the constituents of the system.
Then statistical mechanics will be developed,
showing that these same macroscopic
properties are determined by the microscopic
properties. Four hours of lecture and
recitation per week. Prerequisites: Physics
226 (Introductory Physics with Calculus II)
and Mathematics 129 (Calculus II).
Alternate years.
338
MODERN PHYSICS
Thorough investigation of changes in the
classical understanding of space and time
together with those of energy and matter that
led to the time development of relativistic
and quantum mechanical theories. Topics
include: introduction to special relativity,
blackbody radiation, the postulation of
the photon and quantization, atomic spectra,
interactions of matter and energy, Bohr
model of the atom, concepts of symmetry,
and development and applications of the
Schrodinger equation. Four hours of lecture
and one-three hour laboratory per week.
Prerequisites: Mathematics 129 and a grade
ofC or better in Physics 226.
339
SOLID STATE PHYSICS
Topics include crystalline structures,
periodic potentials, band structure, free
electron model, semiconductor physics,
electromagnetic and thermal properties of
solids, superconductivity, and superfluidity.
Four hours of lecture and three hours of
laboratory per week. Prerequisites: Physics
332 and Math 129 or consent of instructor.
Alternate years.
344
RELATIVITY AND COSMOLOGY
A detailed presentation of the special
theory of relativity and an introduction to the
general theory. Topics include: observational
and experimental tests of relativity, four
vectors, tensors, space-time curvature,
alternative cosmological models, and the
A
origin and future of the universe. Four hours
of lecture per week. Prerequisites: Astron-
omy 111 and Physics 225. Alternate years.
Cross-listed as Astronomy 344.
439
INTRODUCTION TO
QUANTUM MECHANICS
Basic concepts and formulation of quan-
tum theory. The free particle, the simple
harmonic oscillator, the hydrogen atom, and
central force problems will be discussed.
Both time-independent and time-dependent
perturbation theory will be covered. Four
hours of lecture and recitation. Prerequisite:
Either Physics 226 (Introductory Physics
with Calculus II) or Chemistry 331 (Physical
Chemistry II). and Mathematics 231 (Differ-
ential Equations). Cross-listed as
Chemistry 439.
447
NUCLEAR AND PARTICLE PHYSICS
The course will consider properties of
nuclei, nuclear models, radioactivity, nuclear
reactions (including fission and fusion), and
properties of elementary particles. The
interactions of nuclear particles with matter
and the detection of nuclear particles will be
covered. It will be shown how observed
phenomena lead to theories on the nature of
fundamental interactions, how these forces
act at the smallest measiu^able distances, and
what is expected to occur at even smaller
distances. Four hours of lecture and recita-
tion and two hours of laboratory per week.
Prerequisites: Physics 226 (Introductory
Physics with Calculus II), Mathematics 129,
and either Physics 338 (Modern Physics) or
Chemistry 110. Alternate years.
349 & 449
ASTRONOMY AND
PHYSICS COLLOQUIA
This non-credit but required course for
juniors and seniors majoring in astronomy
and physics offers students a chance to meet
and hear active scientists in astronomy,
physics and related scientific areas talk about
their own research or professional activities.
In addition, majors in astronomy and
physics must present two lectures, one given
during the junior year and one given during
the senior year, on the results of a literature
survey or on individual research. Students
majoring in this department are required to
attend four semesters during the junior and
senior years. A letter grade will be given
when the student gives a lecture. Otherwise
the grade will be P/F. Students in the Coop-
erative Program in Liberal Arts and Engi-
neering are required to attend two semesters
and present one lecture during their junior
year. Non-credit course. One hour per week.
Cross-listed as Astronomy 349 & 449.
470-479
INTERNSHIP (See index)
Interns in physics work off campus under
the supervision of professional physicists
employed by local industries or hospitals.
N80-N89
INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index)
Independent studies may be undertaken in
most areas of physics.
490-491
INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index)
Biology
Professor: Angstadt (Chairperson)
Associate Professors: Diehl, Gabriel,
Zaccaria, Zimmerman
Visiting Instructor: Hartzel
A major consists of eight biology
courses, including 110-111, 221, 222, 223,
224, and 225. In addition, juniors and seniors
majoring in Biology are required to register
for Biology 349/449 (non-credit colloquium)
during all semesters on campus. With
departmental consent. Biology 226 may be
substitutedfor Biology 221. Only two
courses numbered below 2(X) may count
toward the major. Departmental internships
cannot be used to fulfill the eighth required
course. In addition, three units of chemistry
and two units of mathematical science are
required. The chemistry requirement must
include at least one unit of organic chemistry
chosen from Chemistry 1 15, 220, or 221.
The mathematical sciences courses must be
chosen from Computer Science 108,
125 and MathemaUcs 103, 109, 127, 128 or
above. Certain specific exceptions to the
core program will be made for three-year
students enrolled in cooperative programs.
Such exceptions are noted under the particu-
lar cooperative program described in the
Academic Program chapter of the catalog.
Students interested in these programs should
contact the program director before finalizing
their individual programs. Credit may not be
earned for both Biology 101 and 1 10 or for
both Biology 102 and 1 1 1. Consent of
instructor may replace Biology 1 10-1 1 1 as a
prerequisite for all biology courses.
A minor in Biology requires the comple-
tion of four upper-level (200's or higher)
courses, with their appropriate prerequisites.
At least two of these must be from the 200' s
series of courses. A minor with a special
name (e.g.. Environmental Science) may be
designed by an individual.
101-102
PRINCIPLES OF BIOLOGY
An investigation of biological principles,
including ecological systems, form and
function in selected representative organisms
(especially man), cell theory, molecular
biology, reproduction, inheritance, adaption,
and evolution. The course is designed
primarily for students not planning to major
in the biological sciences. Three hours of
lecture and one two-hour laboratory
per week.
110-111
INTRODUCTION TO BIOLOGY
An introduction to the study of biology
designed for students planning to major in the
biological sciences. Major topics considered
include the origin of life, cellular respiration
and photosynthesis, genetics, development,
anatomy and physiology, ecology, behavior,
and evolution. Three hours of lecture and
one three-hour laboratory per week.
A
113-114
HUMAN ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY
Using the organ- systems approach, the
course is an introduction to the human
body — its anatomy, physiology, and normal
development — with particular attention to
structure and function at all levels of its
biological organization (molecular through
organismal). Three hours of lecture, and one
three-hour laboratory per week. Prerequi-
site: Chemistry 115 or Chemistry 220 or
consent of instructor.
Ill
MICROBIOLOGY
A study of microorganisms. Emphasis is
given to the identification and physiology of
microorganisms as well as to their role in
disease, their economic importance, and
industrial applications. Three hours of
lecture and two two-hour laboratory periods
per week. Prerequisite: Biology 110-111.
Not open to students who have received
credit for Biology 226.
222
GENETICS
A general consideration of the principles
governing inheritance, including treatment of
classical, molecular, cytological, physiology,
microbial, human, and population genetics.
Three hours of lecture and two two-hour
laboratory periods per week. Prerequisite:
Biology 110-111.
lli
ANIMAL PHYSIOLOGY
The mechanisms and functions of animal
systems, including the autonomic, endocrine,
digestive, cardio-vascular, respiratory, renal,
nervous, and reproductive systems. Mam-
malian physiology is stressed. Three hours of
lecture and one three-hour laboratory per
week. Prerequisite : Biology 110-111.
224
ECOLOGY
The study of the principles of ecology
with emphasis on the role of chemical,
physical, and biological factors affecting the
distribution and succession of plant and
animal populations and communities.
Included will be field studies of local habitats
as well as laboratory experimentation.
Three hours of lecture and one three-hour
laboratory per week. Prerequisite:
Biology 110-111.
225
PLANT SCIENCES
A survey of the structure, development,
function, classification, and use of plants and
related organisms. The study will comprise
four general topic areas: form, including
morphology and anatomy of plants in growth
and reproduction; function, concentrating on
nutrition and metabolism f)eculiar to photo-
synthetic organisms; classification systems
and plant identification, and human uses of
plants. Three hours of lecture and one three
hour laboratory per week. Prerequisite:
Biology 110-111.
226
MICROBIOLOGY FOR
THE HEALTH SCIENCES
A study of microorganisms with emphasis
given to their taxonomy and their role in
various aspects of human infectious disease.
Mechanisms for treating and preventing
infectious diseases will be presented. Labo-
ratory to include diagnostic culture proce-
dures, antibiotic sensitivity testing, serology,
anaerobic techniques and a study of hemo-
lytic reactions. Three hours of lecture and
four hours of laboratory per week. Prerequi-
site: One year of introductory level biology,
one year of chemistry or consent of instruc-
tor. Not open to students who have received
credit for Biology 221.
J^
328
AQUATIC BIOLOGY
A field-oriented course dealing with fresh-
water ecosystems. Studies will include a
survey of the plankton, benthos, and fish —
as well as the physical and chemical charac-
teristics of water that influence their distribu-
tion. Several local field trips and a one-week
trip to a field station will familiarize students
with the diversity of habitats and the tech-
niques of limnologists. Alternate May terms.
Prerequisites: Biology 110-111.
329
TROPICAL MARINE BIOLOGY
A field oriented course where students
study the creatures of the fringing reefs,
barrier reefs, lagoons, turtlegrass beds and
mangrove swamps at a tropical marine
laboratory. Studies will include survey of
plankton, invertebrates, and fish as well as
the physical and chemical characteristics
that influence their distribution.
Prerequisite: Biology 110-111. Alternate
May terms.
330
COMPARATIVE ANATOMY
OF VERTEBRATES
Detailed examination of the origins, struc-
ture, and functions of the principal organs of
the vertebrates. Special attention is given to
the progressive modification of organs from
lower to higher vertebrates. Three hours of
lecture and one four-hour laboratory per
week. Prerequisite: Biology 110-111.
Alternate years.
334
INVERTEBRATE ZOOLOGY
Comparative study of the invertebrate
phyla with emphasis on phylogeny, physiol-
ogy, morphology, and ecology. Two three-
hour lecturel laboratory periods per week.
Prerequisite: Biology 110-111. Alternate
years.
335
CELLULAR PHYSIOLOGY
Physiochemical background of cellular
function: functions of membrane systems
and organelles; metabolic pathways; bio-
chemical and cellular bases of growth,
development and responses of organisms.
Three hours of lecture and one three-
hour laboratory per week. Prerequisite:
Biology 110-111 and a year of chemistry.
Alternate years.
336
EVOLUTION
The study of the origin and modification
of life on earth. Topics discussed include
molecular evolution, population genetics,
gene flow, natural selection, sexual selection,
kin selection, neutral theory, extinction, co-
evolution, and the evolution of man. Four
hours of lecture per week. Prerequisite:
Biology 110-111 or consent of the instructor.
Alternate years.
339
MEDICAL GENETICS
This course is concerned with the relation-
ships of heredity to disease. Discussions will
focus on topics such as chromosomal
abnormalities, metabolic variation and
disease, somatic cell genetics, genetic
screening, and immunogenetics. Laboratory
exercises will offer practical experiences in
genetic diagnostic techniques. Prerequisite:
Biology 101-102 or 110-111. May term only.
342
ANIMAL BEHAVIOR
A study of causation, function, evolution,
and biological significance of animal behav-
iors in their normal environment and social
contexts. Three hours of lecture and one
four-hour laboratory each week. Prerequi-
site: Biology 110-111. Alternate years.
A
346
VIROLOGY
An introduction to the study of viruses.
The course will cover virus anatomy and
reproduction, diseases caused by viruses,
modem treatments of viral infections and
viral vaccines produced by recombinant DNA
and other technologies. Course content will
also include a description of how viruses are
used as tools for genetic engineering and for
studying cellular processes like membrane
signal transduction, regulation of genetic
expression and oncogenesis (cancer). Four
hours of lecture per week. Prerequisite:
Biology 110-111 or consent of instructor.
Alternate years.
347
IMMUNOLOGY
The course introduces concepts concern-
ing how pathogens cause disease and host
defense mechanisms against infectious
diseases. Characterization of and relation-
ships between antigens, haptens, and antibod-
ies are presented. Serological assays will
include: agglutination, precipitations,
immunofluorescence, immunoeletrophoresis,
and complement fixation. Other topics are:
immediate and delayed hypersensitivities (i.e.
allergies such as hay fever and poison ivy),
immunological renal diseases, immunohema-
tology (blood groups, etc), hybridome
technology, the chemistry and function of
complement, autoimmunity, and organ graft
rejection phenomena. Three hours of
lecture, one three-hour laboratory, and one
hour of arranged work per week. Prerequi-
site: Biology 110-111. Alternate years.
403
FIELD BIOLOGY FOR TEACHERS
A methods course for students preparing
to teach biology. Sources and methods
of collecting and preserving various plant and
animal materials. Summer term only.
431
fflSTOLOGY
A study of the basic body tissues and the
microscopic anatomy of the organs and
structures of the body which are formed from
them. Focus is on normal human histology.
Three hours of lecture and one four-hour
laboratory per week. Prerequisite: Biology
110-111. Alternate years.
433
ECONOMIC AND
SYSTEMATIC BOTANY
Structure and classification of plants with
emphasis on those species, particularly food
and drug plants, having significance for
human affairs. Three hours of lecture and one
three-hour laboratory per week. Prerequi-
sites: Biology 110-111, Biology 225.
Alternate years.
440
PARASITOLOGY AND
MEDICAL ENTOMOLOGY
The biology of parasites and parasitism.
Studies on the major groups of animal
parasites and anthropod vectors of disease
will involve taxonomy and life cycles.
Emphasis will be made on parasites of
medical and veterinary importance. Three
hours of lecture and one three-hour labora-
tory per week. Prerequisite: Biology 110-
111. Alternate years.
441
VERTEBRATE EMBRYOLOGY
A study of the development of vertebrates
from fertilization to the fully formed fetus.
Particular attention is given to the chick and
human as representative organisms. Two
three-hour lecture/laboratory periods per
week. Prerequisite: Biology 110-111.
Alternate years.
A
444
BIOCHEMISTRY
Emphasis is given to the metabolism of
carbohydrates, lipids, amino acids, proteins,
and nucleic acids; integration of metabolism;
and biochemical control mechanisms,
including allosteric control, induction,
repression, signal transduction as well as the
various types of inhibitive control mecha-
nisms. Three hours of lecture, one three-
hour laboratory and one hour of arranged
work per week. Prerequisite: Chemistry
220-221 or Chemistry 115, or consent of
instructor. Cross-listed as Chemistry 444.
Alternate years.
445
RADIATION BIOLOGY
A study of the effects of ionizing and
nonionizing radiations on cells, tissues and
organisms. Consideration will be given to
repair mechanisms and how repair deficien-
cies elucidate the nature of radiation damage.
Three hours of lecture and one three-hour
laboratory per week. Prerequisites: Biology
110-111, one year of chemistry. Alternate
years.
446
PLANT ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY
A study of plant physiology as a function
of plant anatomy. Metabolic relationships an
environmental factors will be examined from
a background of the structure and develop-
ment of cells, tissues, organs, and whole
plants. Three hours of lecture and one three-
hour laboratory per week. Prerequisites:
Biology 110-111. Biology 225. Alternate
years.
448
ENDOCRINOLOGY
This course begins with a survey of the
role of the endocrine hormones in the
integration of body functions. This is
followed by a study of the control of
hormone synthesis and release, and a consid-
eration of the mechanisms by which
hormones accomplish their effects on target
organs. Two three-hour lecture/laboratory
periods per week. Prerequisite: Biology
110-111. Alternate years.
349 & 449
BIOLOGY COLLOQUIUM
This course offers the student a chance to
become familiar with research in the Biologi-
cal Sciences using techniques such as
meeting and talking with active researchers,
reading and critically analyzing the current
literature, and discussing the ideas and
methods shaping Biology. Students will be
required to read and analyze specific papers,
actively participate in discussions. Students
majoring in this deparunent are required to
enroll during all semesters spent on campus
in the junior and senior years. The grade will
beP/F. Non-credit course. One hour per
week. Prerequisites: Biology majors with
junior or senior class standing.
470-479
INTERNSHIP (See index)
Recent samples of internships in the de-
partment include ones with the Department
of Environmental Resources, nuclear medi-
cine or rehabilitative therapies at a local
hospital.
N80-N89
INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index)
Departmental studies are experimentally
oriented and may entail either lab or
field work.
490-491
INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index)
Examples of recent honors projects have
involved stream analysis, gypsy moth
research, drug synthesis and testing.
A
Business
Administration
Associate Professor: Weaver (Chairperson)
Assistant Professor: Stemgold
Instructors: Henninger, Roberts
Lecturer: Larrabee
1 o graduate with a major in business ad-
ministration, a student must complete
one of two tracks:
Track I — Business Management
This track is designed to educate students
in the functions of today's profit and non-
profit organizations. The program provides a
well-balanced preparation for a wide variety
of careers, including general administration,
personnel administration, commercial
banking, investments and portfolio manage-
ment, security analysis, corporate financial
management, general marketing, sales,
product management, advertising, retail
merchandising, and production and manufac-
tiuing management.
Required courses are Business 110, 111,
223, 228, 329, 338, 339, 440, 441; Mathe-
matics 103. Business 332 or 443 may be
substituted for Business 329 and Business
340 may be substituted for Business 339.
Accounting 110 may be substituted for
Business 110 if the student is transferring
into the business administration major, but
duplicate credit will not be granted.
Majors are encouraged to take Business
335, 336; Computer Science 108; Economics
1 10, 111; Mass Communication 211, 323;
Mathematics 109; Philosophy 216; and
Psychology 225. Majors are also encouraged
to take a foreign language. The additional
elective offerings are intended to add depth
in the areas of finance, marketing and
management.
Track II — Management Science
This track is designed to train students in
the quantitative aspects of business admini-
stration. It provides excellent undergraduate
preparation for graduate study in manage-
ment science, operations research, and
quantitative business administration. The
program also provides a solid preparation for
careers in production control, systems
analysis, research, forecasting, industrial and
technical sales and any of the functional
areas of business where quantitative training
would be an added qualification.
Required courses are Business 1 10, 111,
223,338,339,446; Economics 110, 111,
441; Mathematics 103, 112, 128, 129, 338;
and Computer Science 108. Accounting 110
may be substituted for Business 110 if the
student is transferring into the business
administration major.
Minors
1 he Business Administration Depart-
ment offers two minors. The following
courses are required to complete a minor in
j3^
Marketing: Business 228, 329, 332, 445, and
443 or 448. A minor in Finance requires the
completion of Business 338, 339, 340, and
Economics 220, 441, or Accounting 225.
110
HNANCIAL ACCOUNTING
An introduction to the art of measuring,
communicating, and interpreting financial
activity. Recording, classifying and summa-
rizing business transactions, the interpretation
of accounts, and the preparation of financial
statements are studied. Not open to students
who have received credit for Accounting 110.
Ill
MANAGERIAL ACCOUNTING
An introduction to the various compo-
nents of managerial accounting. Emphasis is
placed on managerial problem solving
techniques and the analysis of the results.
Accounting systems, costing procedures,
cost- volume profit relationships, managerial
control processes and the use of computers as
aids to decision-making are studied. Students
will gain hands-on experience with various
computer applications of managerial account-
ing. Prerequisite: Business 110 or Account-
ing 110.
223
QUANTITATIVE BUSINESS ANALYSIS
Techniques of quantitative analysis useful
in making business decisions. Topics
include: decision theory, inventory models,
network models, forecasting, and other
selected applications. Students will be
introduced to computer applications of the
quantitative models. Prerequisite: Mathe-
matic 103 or consent of instructor.
228
MARKETING PRINCIPLES
A study of the methods used by business
and nonprofit organizations to design, price,
promote and distribute their products and
services. Topics include new product
development, advertising, retailing, consumer
behavior, marketing strategy, ethical issues in
marketing and others. Readings, case
studies, library assignments and team
research projects.
329
MARKETING STRATEGY
A study of the methods used by business
and nonprofit organizations to analyze
and select target markets, and then to develop
strategies for gaining and maintaining these
customers. Topics include competitive
strategy, market segmentation, product
positioning, business demographics and
marketing-related financial analysis. Read-
ings, case studies, hbrary assignments and
computer exercises. Prerequisites: Business
228 and Math 103, or consent of instructor.
332
ADVERTISING
Nature, scope, methods, and effects of
promotion. Techniques of analysis and
control in the use of advertising and publicity
as tools in developing business strategy.
Prerequisite: Business 228 or consent of
instructor.
335
LEGAL PRINCIPLES I
Lectures and analysis of cases on the
nature, sources, and fundamentals of the law
in general, and particularly as relating to
contracts, agency, and negotiable instru-
ments. Open only to juniors and seniors.
336
LEGAL PRINCIPLES II
Lectures on the fundamentals and history
of the law relating to legal association, real
property, wills, and estates. Open only to
juniors and seniors.
^k.
338
HNANCIAL MANAGEMENT I
An introduction to working capital man-
agement and financial analysis and planning.
Topics are covered through readings, cases
and problem solving in the areas of decisions
on current asset and liability structures, cash
and marketable securities, accounts receiv-
ables, inventory management and control,
spontaneous financing, short-term borrowing,
ratio and financial statement analysis, source
and use statements, cash flow forecasting,
and financial statements forecasting. Pre-
requisites: Mathematics 103, Business 110,
111, and 223; or consent of instructor.
339
HNANCIAL MANAGEMENT II
A study of capital asset structure and
long-term financial decisions. Topics are
covered through readings, cases, and problem
solving in the areas of capital budgeting,
including risk and required rates of return,
leveraging in the firm, concepts of capital
structures, dividend policy, external financ-
ing, term and lease financing, long-term debt,
equity securities, convertible securities and
warrants. Prerequisite: Business 338 or
consent of instructor.
340
INVESTMENTS
An introduction to the financial sector of
the economy and the structure and functions
of financial markets and the agencies
involved; brokerage houses and stock
exchanges; the various types of investments
available. Techniques used to evaluate
financial securities. Also covered are recent
developments in investment theory. Pre-
requisite: Business 338 or consent of
instructor.
439
BUSINESS PRACTICUM
This course provides students with
practical work experience with local compa-
nies and organizations. Students work 10-12
hours per week for their sponsor organiza-
tions, in addition to attending a weekly
seminar on management topics relevant to
their work assignments. Since enrollment is
limited by the available number of positions,
students must apply directly to the business
department before preregistration to be
eligible for the course. Majors only
and consent of instructor.
440
MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS
Structural characteristics and functional
relationships of a business organization as
well as the problems encountered in coordi-
nating the internal resources of a firm.
Emphasis on administrative efficiency and
procedures.
441
BUSINESS POLICIES
Planning, organization, and control of
business operations; setting of goals;
coordination of resources, development of
policies. Analysis of strategic decisions
encompassing all areas of a business, and the
use and analysis of control measures. Em-
phasis on both the internal relationship of
various elements of production, finance,
marketing, and personnel, and the relation-
ship of the business entity to external stimuli.
Readings, cases, and games. Prerequisite:
Business 223, 228, 329. 338, 339, and 440, or
consent of instructor. Seniors only.
442
PERSONNEL MANAGEMENT
An introduction to the managerial prob-
lems of recruiting, selecting, training, and
retraining the human resources of the firm.
Emphasis is placed on the interrelationship of
personnel policies with management objec-
tives and philosophies in such areas as fringe
benefits, wage and salary policies, union
activities, and health and safety.
A
443
RETAIL MANAGEMENT I
Planning, organization, and control of the
retailing firm. Competitive strategy develop-
ment through store location, layout, adminis-
tration organization, buying, and pricing.
Cases, reading, and papers. Prerequisite:
Business 228 or consent of instructor.
445
MARKETING RESEARCH
This is a study of the principles and prac-
tices of Marketing Research, The focus is on
the development and application of Market-
ing Research Studies. Topics covered
include selection of a research design, project
planning and scheduling, data specification
and gathering, quantitative methods to
analyze data, interpretation of data, and
research report writing. Reading, cases, and
research project. Mathematics 103 and
Business 228 or consent of instructor.
446
PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT
An introduction to the planning, organiza-
tion, and controlling of operations in a
production facility. The course also incorpo-
rates quantitative techniques and computer
applications used in the production and
operations management environment. Topics
include capacity and layout planning, facility
location analysis, job design and work
measurement, production scheduling, materi-
als requirement planning models, and quality
controls. Students will engage in the actual
design of an inventory status file and MRP
system. Prerequisite: Business 223 or
consent of instructor.
447
CREATIVE ADVERTISING
A workshop concerned with theme, copy
and effective presentation of advertisements
for print media, radio, and direct mail.
Primarily an exploration of creativity through
analysis of works of artists and writers with
application to practical advertising, and
tailored to the interests of individual students.
May term. Prerequisite: Business 332 or
consent of instructor.
448
SALES SEMINAR
The role of selling in the economy. The
art of creative selling; application of theories
from the behavioral sciences to selling
through the analysis of sales situations and
techniques. Prerequisite: Business 228 or
consent of instructor.
449
MANAGING THE SMALL BUSINESS
How the potential businessman proceeds
in establishing, operating, and profiting from
a small business operation. Considered and
analyzed are such aspects as marketing,
managing, financing, promoting, insuring,
establishing, developing, and staffing the
small retail, wholesale service, and manufac-
turing firm. May term. Prerequisite:
Business 111, 228, and 338 or consent of
instructor.
470-479
INTERNSHIP (See index)
Typical examples are marketing analysis
for a paper products firm, planning a branch
store, hotel and real estate management,
banking and insurance.
N80-N89
INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index)
Examples of recent studies are: the
economic impact of a college on a commu-
nity; a marketing strategy for a local firm
entering the consumer market.
490-491
INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index)
A recent project was a study of the
evolution of anti-trust legislation in the
United States.
^Sl
Chemistry
Professor: Franz (Chairperson)
Assistant Professors: Berkheimer,
McDonald, Wolfskill
A major in chemistry consists of Chem-
istry 110-11 1, 220-221, 330-331, 332 and
333; Physics 225-226; Mathematics 128, 129
and one of the following courses: Mathemat-
ics 103, 231, 238, 332, or Computer Science
125. Mathematics 23 1 and 238 and French
or German are strongly recommended for
students planning on graduate study in chem-
istry. To be certified in secondary education,
chemistry majors must also pass two biology
courses numbered 1 10 or higher.
The Department is approved by the
American Chemical Society (ACS) to certify
those students whose programs meet or
exceed requirements established by the ACS.
Students who wish to earn ACS certification
must complete the major described above, as
well as Chemistry 443 and two courses from
Chemistry 440, 442, 447, and 480 (or 490).
Students who complete the ACS -certified
degree are eligible for admission as members
to the American Chemical Society following
graduation.
A minor in Chemistry requires completion
of four courses numbered 220 or higher; at
least one must be taken from each of the
following groups: Group A (220-221, 440,
442, 444, 447) and Group B (226 or 332,
330-331, 333, 439, 443). Named minors in
specialized areas may be designed by
students with departmental approval.
108
CHEMICAL PRINCIPLES
An introduction to the principles of
inorganic chemistry. Topics include atomic
and molecular structure, nomenclature, gases,
solutions, acids and bases, kinetics, equilib-
rium, oxidation-reduction, and stoichiometry.
The approach is primarily descriptive with
illustrations drawn mostly from the health
sciences. Along with Chemistry 115, this
course is designed for those students who
require only two semesters of chemistry, and
is not intended for students planning to enroll
in chemistry courses numbered 200 or above.
Three hours lecture, one hour discussion, and
one three-hour laboratory period each
week. Prerequisite: High school algebra or
Math 005. Not open for credit to students
who have received credit for Chemistry 110.
110
GENERAL CHEMISTRY I
A quantitative introduction to the con-
cepts and models of chemistry. Topics
include stoichiometry, atomic and molecular
structure, nomenclature, bonding, thermo-
chemistry, gases, solutions, and chemical
reactions. The laboratory introduces the
student to methods of separation, purifica-
tion, and identification of compounds accord-
ing to their physical properties. This course
is designed for students who plan to major in
one of the sciences. Three hours lecture, one
hour discussion and one three-hour labora-
tory period each week. Prerequisite:
Placement in Chemistry 110 is determined in
part by a student's score on the mathematics
placement examination. Not open for credit
to students who have received credit for
Chemistry 108, except by permission of the
Chemistry Department.
HI
GENERAL CHEMISTRY II
A continuation of Chemistry 110, with
emphasis placed on the foundations of
analytical, inorganic, and physical chemistry.
Topics include kinetics, general and ionic
equilibria, acid-base theory, electrochemistry,
thermodynamics, nuclear chemistry, coordi-
nation chemistry, and descriptive inorganic
chemistry of selected elements. The labora-
tory treats aspects of quantitative and qualita-
tive inorganic analysis. Three hours lecture,
one hour discussion, and one three-hour
^m.
laboratory period each week. Prerequisite:
Chemistry 110 or consent of the Chemistry
Department.
115
BRIEF ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
A descriptive study of the compounds of
carbon. This course will illustrate the
principles of organic chemistry with material
relevant to students in medical technology,
biology, nursing, forestry, education and the
humanities. Topics include nomenclature,
alkanes, arenes, functional derivatives, amino
acids and proteins, carbohydrates and other
naturally occurring compounds. This course
is designed for students who require only one
semester of organic chemistry. Three hours
lecture, one hour discussion, and one three-
hour laboratory period each week. Prerequi-
site: Chemistry 108 or 110. Not open for
credit to students who have received credit
for Chemistry 220.
220-221
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
A systematic study of the compounds of
carbon, including both aliphatic and aromatic
series. The laboratory work introduces the
student to simple fundamental methods of
organic synthesis, isolation, and analysis.
Three hours lecture and one four-hour
laboratory period each week. Prerequisite:
Chemistry 111.
226
CLINICAL ANALYSIS
A presentation of selected wet-chemical
and instrumental methods of quantitative
analysis with an orientation toward clinical
applications in medical technology. Topics
include: general methods and calculations;
solutions; titrations; photometric analyses
(colorimetric, atomic absorption, flame
emission); electrochemical methods (ion-
selective electrodes, coulometry), automa-
tion. Lecture, recitation, and laboratory
daily. Prerequisite: Chemistry 110-111 or
consent of instructor. May not be taken for
credit following Chemistry 332. May
term only.
330-331
PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
A study of the fundamental principles of
theoretical chemistry and their applications.
The laboratory work includes techniques in
physiochemical measurements. Three hours
lecture and one four-hour laboratory period
each week. Prerequisite: Chemistry 111,
Mathematics 129, and one year of physics
or consent of instructor.
332
ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY
A study of the fundamental methods of
gravimetric, volumetric and elementary
instrumental analysis together with practice
in laboratory techniques and calculations of
these methods. Two hours lecture and two
three-hour laboratory periods each week.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 111 or consent
of instructor.
333
ADVANCED INORGANIC CHEMISTRY
A study of modem theories of atomic and
molecular structure and their relationship to
the chemistry of selected elements and their
compounds. Three hours lecture and one
four-hour laboratory period each week.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 330, Mathematics
129, and one year of physics or consent of
instructor.
439
INTRODUCTION TO
QUANTUM MECHANICS
After presenting the origin, basic con-
cepts, and formulation of quantum mechanics
with emphasis on its physical meaning, the
free particle, simple harmonic oscillator, and
central-force problems will be investigated.
Both time-independent and time-dependent
perturbation theory will be covered. The
A
elegant operator formalism of quantum
mechanics will conclude the course. Four
hours of lecture and recitation. Prerequi-
sites: Mathematics 231, either Chemistry
321 or Physics 226, and consent of instruc-
tor. Cross-listed as Physics 439.
440
ADVANCED ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
Theory and application of modem
synthetic organic chemistry. Topics may
include oxidation-reduction processes,
carbon-carbon bond forming reactions,
functional group transformations, and multi-
step syntheses of natural products (antibiot-
ics, antitumor agents, and antiviral agents).
Three hours lecture and one four-hour lab-
oratory period. Prerequisite: Chemistry 221.
442
SPECTROSCOPY AND
MOLECULAR STRUCTURE
Theory and application of the identifica-
tion of organic compounds. Special empha-
sis will be placed on the utilization of
spectroscopic techniques (iH-NMR,i3 C-
NMR, IR, UV-VIS, and MS). Three hours
lecture and one four-hour laboratory period
each week. Prerequisites: Chemistry 221,
Chemistry 331, or consent of instructor.
443
ADVANCED ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY
A study of advanced analytical methods
with emphasis on chromatographic, electro-
chemical, and spectroscopic methods of
instrumental analysis. Three hours lecture
and one four-hour laboratory period each
week. Prerequisite: Chemistry 331 and 332
or consent of instructor.
444
BIOCHEMISTRY
Emphasis is given to the metabolism of
carbohydrates, lipids, amino acids, proteins,
and nucleic acids; integration of metabolism;
and biochemical control mechanisms.
including allosteric control, induction,
repression, signal transduction as well as the
various types of inhibitive control mecha-
nisms. Prerequisite: Chemistry 221 or 115
or consent of instructor. Cross-listed as
Biology 444.
447
POLYMER CHEMISTRY
An introduction to the synthesis, charac-
terization, and applications of high molecular
weight materials, i.e., macro-molecules.
Special emphasis will be given to synthetic
polymer systems. Three hours lecture, one
four-hour lab per week. Prerequisites: Chem-
istry 221 and 330, or consent of instructor.
348 & 448
CHEMISTRY COLLOQUIUM
A seminar in which faculty, students and
invited professional chemists discuss their
own research activities or those of others
which have appeared in recent chemical
literature. Prerequisite: Three semesters of
non-credit Chemistry Colloquium taken
during the junior and senior years.
470-479
INTERNSHIP (See index)
The student will ordinarily work under
supervision in an industrial laboratory and
submit a written report on the project.
N80-N89
INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index)
The student will ordinarily work on a
laboratory research project and will write a
thesis on the work.
490-491
INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index)
The student will ordinarily work on a
laboratory research project with emphasis
being on the student's showing initiative and
making a scholarly contribution. A thesis
will be written.
JSIl
Criminal Justice
Assistant Professor: Strauser (Coordinator)
1 his major is designed to acquaint
students with the American criminal justice
system and to provide an understanding of
the social, psychological, philosophical, and
political contexts within which the system of
criminal justice functions. Its aim is to
develop students' intellectual and scientific
skills in raising and attempting to answer
important questions about the system of
justice and its place in society. The program
offers opportunity for intern experience in the
field, and prepares for careers in the areas of
law enforcement, probation and parole,
prisons, and treaunent services.
The major has two tracks. Track I
prepares for careers in law enforcement.
Track II prepares for careers in corrections.
Track I - Law Enforcement.
The major consists of 10 courses, distrib-
uted as follows:
A. Professional courses in criminal justice
(three courses):
Introduction to the Criminal Justice System
(Sociology and Anthropology 115)
Introduction to Law Enforcement
(Sociology and Anthropology 223)
The American Prison System (Sociology
and Anthropology 339)
B. Courses in the social, psychological,
philosophical, and political context of the
justice system (seven courses):
Criminology (Sociology and Anthropology
300) and either Juvenile Delinquency
(Sociology and Anthropology 221) or
Racial and Cultural Minorities (Sociology
and Anthropology 334) (two courses)
Abnormal Psychology (Psychology 116)
(one course)
America as a Civilization (American
Studies 200), Afro- American History
(History 230) or United States Social and
Intellectual History Since 1877 (History
443) (one course)
Law and Society (Political Science 335)
and Civil Rights and Liberties (Political
Science 331) (two courses) Philosophical
Issues in Criminal Justice (Philosophy 218)
(one course)
C. Internship or practicum in law enforce-
ment. (Recommended but not required
for the major)
Track II - Corrections.
The major consists of 10 courses, distrib-
uted as follows:
A. Professional courses in criminal justice
(three courses):
Introduction to the Criminal Justice System
(Sociology and Anthropology 115)
The American Prison System (Sociology
and Anthropology 339)
Introduction to Human Services (Sociology
and Anthropology 222)
^^
B. Courses in the social, psychological,
philosophical, and political context of the
justice system (seven courses);
Criminology (Sociology and Anthropology
300) and either Juvenile Delinquency
(Sociology and Anthropology 221) or
Racial and Cultural Minorities (Sociology
and Anthropology 334) (two courses)
Abnormal Psychology (Psychology 116)
(one course)
America as a Civilization (American
Studies 200), Afro- American History
(History 230) or United States Social and
Intellectual History Since 1877 (History
443) (one course)
Law and Society (Political Science 335)
and Civil Rights and Liberties (Political
Science 331) (two courses)
Philosophical Issues in Criminal Justice
(Philosophy 218) (One course)
C. Internship or practicum in corrections.
(Recommended but not required for the
major). Prerequisite: Mathematics 103,
Psychology 431, and Psychology 239.
These prerequisites may be waived in
certain cases by the coordinating
committee.
Majors should seek advice concerning
course selection from members of the
coordinating committee and should note
course prerequisites in planning their
programs.
A minor in Criminal Justice consists of
five courses. Required courses include:
Soc 115, Introduction to Criminal Justice;
and any four other courses in the Criminal
Justice major listed above, at least three of
which must be numbered 200 or above. To
receive credit for a minor in Criminal
Justice, a student must maintain a
minimum 2.0 cum in courses completed
for the minor.
Economics
Professor: Opdahl
Assistant Professor: Madresehee
(Chairperson)
1 he major has two tracks. Track I is
designed for the student whose primary
interest lies in business management; Track
II is designed to provide a broad understand-
ing of economic, social, and business
problems. In addition to preparing students
for a career in business or government, this
track provides an excellent background for
graduate or professional studies.
Track I - Managerial Economics requires
Economic 1 10, 1 11, 332, and either 330 or
441; Business 110 and 111 or Accounting
110 and 220; Business 338 and 339, plus two
electives from Economics 220, 225, 229,
230, 331, 335, 337, 440, 443, and Business
A
440. Business 340 (Investments) may be sub-
stituted for Business 339 (Financial
Management II).
Track II - General Economics requires
Economics 110 and 111, 331, 440, 330 or
441, and three other courses in economics.
Depending on their academic and career
interests, students are encouraged to select a
minor in another department such as political
science, philosophy, or history.
In addition, the following courses are
recommended: all majors - Math 103 and
Business 223: majors planning graduate
work - Math 1 12 and 128; Track II majors -
Business 1 10 and 1 1 1 or Accounting 1 10
and 220.
A minor in Economic requires the
completion of Economics 110 and 111 and
three other economics courses numbered 200
or above, or any four economics courses
numbered 200 or above.
110
PRINCIPLES OF ECONOMICS I
Macroeconomics deals with problems of
the economic system as a whole. What
influences the level of national income and
employment? What is inflation and why do
we have it? What is the role of government
in a modern capitalistic system? How does
business organize to produce the goods and
services we demand? How are the American
financial and banking systems organized?
What is the nature of American unionism?
What are the elements of government finance
and fiscal policy?
Ill
PRINCIPLES OF ECONOMICS II
This course focuses upon microeconomics
and selected current economic problems. It
deals with the relatively small units of the
economy such as the firm and the family.
Analyzes demand and supply. Discusses how
business firms decide what and how much to
produce and how goods and services are
priced in different types of markets. Also
considers such problems as economic growth,
international trade, poverty, discrimination,
ecology, and alternative economic systems.
220
MONEY AND BANKING
Covers business fluctuations and mone-
tary and fiscal policy; the financial organiza-
tion of society; the banking system; credit
institutions; capital markets, and international
financial relations. Prerequisite:
Economics 110.
Ill
COMPARATIVE ECONOMIC SYSTEMS
A comparative analysis of the underlying
ideologies, the basic institutions, and the
performance of selected economic systems.
Alternate years.
IIA
URBAN PROBLEMS
The application of economic theory to the
study of significant social, political, and
economic problems associated with urbaniza-
tion, including poverty, employment, educa-
tion, crime, health, housing, land use and the
environment, transportation, and public
finance. Analysis of solutions offered.
Alternate years.
225
ENVIRONMENTAL ECONOMICS
A study of the relationship between
environment decay and economic growth,
with particular reference to failures of the
price and property-rights systems; application
of cost/benefit analysis, measures aimed at
the creation of an ecologically viable
economy.
A
226
DEVELOPMENT OF LESS
DEVELOPED COUNTRffiS
A study of the theories and problems of
capital accumulation, allocation of resources,
technological development, growth, planning
techniques, and institutions and international
relations encountered by the developing
nations. Alternate years.
229
BUSINESS CYCLES AND FORECASTING
An introduction to the natiu^e and history
of business fluctuations, the tools used in
aggregate analysis, theories that seek to
explain the cycle, and techniques used in
forecasting economic activity. Prerequisite:
Economics 110 or permission of the instruc-
tor. Alternative years.
230
ECONOMETRICS
Econometric models provide one of the
most useful and necessary sets of tools for
decision making. By using a variety of
modem statistical methods, econometrics
helps us to estimate economic relationships,
test different economic behaviors, and
forecast different economic variables. Pre-
requisites: Mathematic 103, Economics 110
and HI, or consent of the instructor.
Alternate years.
330
INTERMEDIATE MICROECONOMICS
An advanced analysis of contemporary
theory regarding consumer demand, produc-
tion costs and theory, profit maximization,
market structures, and the determinants of
returns to the factors of production. Pre-
requisites: Economics 110 and 111.
Alternate years.
331
INTERMEDL\TE MACROECONOMICS
An advanced analysis of contemporary
theory and practice with regard to business
fluctuation, national income accounting, the
determination of income and employment
levels, and the use of monetary and fiscal
policy. Prerequisites: Economics 110 and
111. Alternate years.
332
GOVERNMENT AND THE ECONOMY
An analytical survey of government's
efforts to maintain competition through
antitrust legislation; to supervise acceptable
cases of private monopoly through public
utility regulation and via means of regulatory
commissions, and to encourage or restrain
various types of private economic activities.
Prerequisites: Economics 110 and 111 or
consent of instructor.
335
LABOR PROBLEMS
The history of organized labor in the
United States, including the structure of
unions, employers' opposition to union, the
role of government in labor-management re-
lations, the economic impact of unions.
Alternate years.
337
PUBLIC FINANCE
An analysis of the fiscal economics of the
public sector, including the development,
concepts, and theories of public expenditures,
taxation, and debt at all levels of American
government. Includes also the use of fiscal
policy as an economic control device.
Prerequisite: Economics 110 and 111 or
consent of instructor. Alternate years.
440
HISTORY OF ECONOMIC THOUGHT
A discussion of the origins, development,
and significance of the economic ideas
embodied in the works of Smith, Marx,
Schumpeter, Keynes, and others. Prerequi-
sites: Economics 110 and 111 or consent of
instructor. Alternative years.
^^
441
MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS
The application of economic theory and
methodology to the solution of business
problems. Subjects include: optimizing
techniques, risk analysis, demand theory,
production theory, cost theory, linear pro-
gramming, capital budgeting, market struc-
tures, and the theory of pricing. Prerequi-
sites: Economics 110 and 111. Some under-
standing of differential calculus is
recommended.
443
INTERNATIONAL TRADE
A study of the principles, theories,
development, and policies concerning
international economic relations, with
particular reference to the United States.
Subjects covered include: U.S. commercial
policy and its development, international
trade theory, tariffs and other protectionist
devices, international monetary system and
its problems, balance of payments issues.
Alternative years. Prerequisites: Economics
110 and 111.
470-479
INTERNSHIP (See index)
Typically off campus in business, bank-
ing, or government, supervised by assigned
employee of sponsoring organization.
N80-N89
INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index)
Superior students may select independent
study in various courses, particularly in
preparation for graduate school.
490-491
INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index)
Education
Assistant Professors: Conrad (Chairperson),
Hungerford
Visiting Instructor: Bossert
Part-time Instructors: Shivetts, Mosser,
Salvatori, Straub
1 he Education Department offers Penn-
sylvania approved teacher certification pro-
grams in elementary and secondary educa-
tion, as well as a school nurse certification
program.
Student seeking secondary certification
must complete Education 200 and Psychol-
ogy 338, as prerequisites to the professional
semester (Education 446, 447, 449), as well
as the necessary subject area courses.
Students may earn secondary certification in
one or more of the following areas: Art
(K-12). biology, chemistry, English, French
(K-12), general science, German (K-12),
mathematics, music (K-12), physics,
school nurse (K-12), social studies, and
Spanish (K-12).
A
Students seeking elementary certification
must complete Education 200, Psychology
338, Mathematics 205, Education 000, 341,
342, 343, and 344 as prerequisite to the
professional semester (Education 445, 447
and 448).
Students interested in the teacher-
education program should refer to the
Teacher Education Handbook, which
specifies the current requirements for cert-
ification. Early consultation with a member
of the Education Department is strongly
recommended. Application for the profes-
sional semester must be made during the
spring semester of the junior year. The
Department of Education admits to the
professional semester only those applicants
who are in good academic standing, have
satisfactorily completed the participation
requirements, have paid the student teaching
fee, and have received a positive evaluation
based upon: (a) letters from the student's
major department; (b) a screening interview
conducted by the Education Department; and
(c) a writing sample from the student. Major
departments have different criteria for their
recommendations. Therefore, the student
should consult with the chairperson of the
major department about those requirements.
Additional teacher intern program
information can be found on page 28.
000
SEMINAR IN ART, MUSIC,
PHYSICAL EDUCATION
Each elementary student teacher attends a
series of 24 seminars conducted prior to
student teaching, during the fall semester of
the senior year. These seminars, conducted
by certified public school personnel, empha-
size activities and knowledge which are
helpful in the self-contained elementary
classroom. Non-credit course.
200
INTRODUCTION TO THE
STUDY OF EDUCATION
A study of teaching as a profession with
emphasis on the economic, social, political,
and religious conditions which influence
American schools and teachers. Considera-
tion is given to the school environment, the
curriculum, and the children with the
intention that students will examine more ra-
tionally their own motives for entering the
profession.
232
INSTRUCTIONAL MEDIA
AND COMMUNICATIONS
A study of the value, design, construction,
and application of the visual and auditory
aids to learning. Practical experience in the
handling of audio-visual equipment and
materials is provided. Application of audio-
visual techniques. Application of the visual
and auditory aids to learning. Students will
plan and carry out actual teaching assign-
ments utilizing various A-V devices.
239
PUBLIC SCHOOL CURRICULUM
An examination of the various curricula of
the public schools and there relationships to
current practices. Special attention will be
given to the meaning and nature of the
curriculum, the desirable outcomes of the
curriculum, conflicting and variant concep-
tions of curricula content, modem techniques
of curricular construction, criteria for the
evaluation of curricula, the curriculum as a
teaching instrument Emphasis will be
placed upon the curriculum work within the
teaching field of each individual.
341
TEACHING THE SOCIAL STUDIES IN
THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL
Studies and experiences to develop a basic
understanding of the structure, concepts, and
processes of anthropology, economics,
A
geography, history, political science, and
sociology as they relate to the elementary
school social-science curriculum. Practical
applications, demonstrations of methods, and
the development of integrated teaching units
using tests, reference books, films, and other
teaching materials. Observation and
participation in Lycoming County elementary
schools. Prerequisites: Education 200 and
Psychology 338 or consent of instructor.
342
TEACfflNG SCIENCE IN
THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL
Science methods and materials interpret-
ing children's science experiences and
guiding the development of the scientific
concepts. A study of the science content of
the curriculum, its material, and use. Obser-
vation and participation in Lycoming County
elementary schools. Prerequisite: Education
200 and Psychology 338 or consent of
instructor.
343
TEACHING LANGUAGE ARTS AND
CHILDREN'S LITERATURE IN THE
ELEMENTARY SCHOOL.
A course designed to consider the princi-
pal means of communication, oral and
written, including both practical and creative
uses. Attention will be given to listening,
speaking, written expression, linguistics and
grammar, spelling, and handwriting. Stress
will be placed upon the interrelatedness
of the language arts. Children's literature
will be explored as a vehicle for developing
creative characteristics in children and for
ensuring an appreciation of the creative
writing of others. Observation and participa-
tion in Lycoming County elementary schools.
Prerequisite: Education 200 and Psychology
338 or consent of instructor.
344
TEACHING READING IN
THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL
A basic course in the philosophy and
rationale for the implementation of an
elementary developmental-reading program
from kindergarten through sixth grade.
Emphasis is upon designing a reading
instructional program which reflects the
nature of the learning process and recognizes
principles of child development through
examination of the principles, problems,
methods, and materials used in elementary
reading programs. Observation and partici-
pation in Lycoming County elementary
schools. Prerequisite: Psychology 338,
Education 200. or consent of instructor.
The Elementary Professional Semester
The following courses comprise the
Elementary Professional Semester:
Education 445 Methods of Teaching in the
Elementary School
Education 447 Problems in Contemporary
American Education
Education 448 Student Teaching in the
Elementary School
445
METHODS OF TEACHING IN THE ELE-
MENTARY SCHOOL (PART OF THE
PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER)
The course emphasizes the relationship
between the theoretical studies of physical,
social and cognitive development and the
elementary classroom environment. Particu-
lar consideration will be given to the appro-
priate age and developmental level of the
students with an emphasis upon selection and
utilization of methods in all the elementary
subject areas, including art and music.
Specific attention is given to the development
of strategies for structuring lesson plans, for
maintaining classroom control, and for
overall classroom management. Direct
A
application is made to the individual student-
teaching experience. Prerequisites: Mathe-
matics 105, Education 341,342, 343, and
344, and pre-student teaching participation.
447
PROBLEMS IN CONTEMPORARY
AMERICAN EDUCATION (PART OF THE
PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER)
Seminar on the issues, problems, and
challenges encountered by teachers in the
American public schools, especially those
related to the student-teaching experience.
448
STUDENT TEACHING IN THE
ELEMENTARY SCHOOL (PART OF
THE PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER)
Professional experience under the supervi-
sion of a selected cooperating teacher in a
public elementary school in Lycoming
County. Student teachers are required to
follow the calendar of the school district to
which they are assigned. Two units
maximum.
Students are considered full time when
enrolled in the Professional Semester. Those
students needing an additional course must
comply with the standards stated in the
College catalog.
The Secondary Professional Semester
The following courses comprise the Sec-
ondary Professional Semester:
Education 446
Education 447
Education 449
Methods of Teaching in the
Secondary School
Problems in Contemporary
American Education
Student Teaching in the
Secondary School
446
METHODS OF TEACHING IN THE
SECONDARY SCHOOL (PART OF
THE PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER)
A study of materials, methods, and tech-
niques with emphasis on the student's
major. Stress is placed on the selection and
utilization of visual and auditory aids to
learning. Students teach demonstration
lessons in the presence of the instructor and
the members of the class and observe
superior teachers in Lycoming County
secondary schools. Prerequisite: Education
200, Psychology 338, and pre-student teach-
ing participation.
447
PROBLEMS IN CONTEMPORARY
AMERICAN EDUCATION (PART OF
THE PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER)
Seminar on the issues, problems, and
challenges encountered by teachers in the
American public schools, especially those
related to the student-teaching experience.
449
STUDENT TEACHING IN THE
SECONDARY SCHOOL (PART OF
THE PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER)
Professional laboratory experience under
the supervision of a selected cooperating
teacher in a public secondary school in
Lycoming County. Student teachers are
required to follow the calendar of the school
district to which they are assigned.
Two units maximum.
Students are considered full time when
enrolled in the Professional Semester. Those
students needing an additional course must
comply with the standards stated in the
College catalog.
A
English
Professors: Jensen (Chairperson), Rife
Assistant Professors: Austin, Bidlake,
Hawkes, Moses
Part-time Instructors: Keller, Logue
1 he department offers two programs
leading to the major in English:
Track I - English Major in Literature
This track is designed for students who
choose English as a liberal arts major that
prepares them for a wide range of career
options; for students who choose English as
their subject area for elementary certification
or who wish to earn secondary certification in
English; for students who wish to improve
their verbal and analytic ability in prepara-
tion for a specific career, such as technical
writing, business, or law; and for students
who intend to pursue graduate study in
British or American literature.
A minimum often courses is required for
Track I. Required courses are English 217,
220, 221, 222, and 223; two courses selected
from English 311, 312, 313, 314, and 315;
one from English 335 and 336; and two
electives from among courses numbered 215
and above.
Students who wish to earn secondary
certification must complete a minimum of
twelve courses in English, Required courses
in English are 217, 220, 221, 222, 223, 335,
336, and 338; three courses selected from
31 1 , 312, 3 13, 3 14, and 315; and one elective
from among courses numbered 215 and
above. Required courses outside English are
Education 200, 446, 447, and 449; Psychol-
ogy 110 and 338; and Theatre 100.
Students who intend to pursue graduate
study in British or American literatiu^e should
complete the twelve English courses speci-
fied for secondary certification.
Track II - English Major
in Creative Writing
This track is designed for students who
aspire to careers as professional writers, as
editors, and as publishers; for students who
plan to continue studies in an MFA or MA
program; or for students who would like to
discover their creative potential while
pursuing a fundamental liberal arts education.
A minimum of eleven courses is required
for Track II. Required courses are English
225 and 240; three courses selected from
English 220, 221, 222, and 223; one from
English 311, 312, 313, 314 and 315; one
from English 331 and 332; one from English
335 and 336; two from English 341, 342,
441, and 442 (note prerequisites); and one
from English 411 and 412.
The department offers two minors in
English:
Literature: Five courses in literature at the
200 level or above, at least
three of which must be num-
bered 300 or above.
A
Writing: Five courses, four of which are
chosen from English 217, 240,
321,322, and 338; plus one
writing-intensive course in
literature at the 300 level.
049
DEVELOPMENTAL
READING AND WRITING
Classroom and workshop instruction in
basic reading and writing skills. Emphasis on
reading comprehension, spelling, grammar,
and sentence structure; and on organizing and
writing the detailed paragraph and expository
theme. Required study skills lab offered
through Academic Resource Center.
One unit grade of "P" will be assigned
when the student has successfully completed
all of the work in the course. Required of,
and limited to, those who have not been
exempted from English 049.
106
COMPOSITION
Extensive practice in analytical writing.
Special emphasis on developing the compos-
ing skills needed to articulate and defend a
position in various situations requiring the
use of written English.
215
INTRODUCTION TO
LITERARY INTERPRETATION
Practice in the methods of close reading
and formal analysis. Identification of
primary elements and structures of literary
representation. Literature chosen for study
will vary. Prerequisite: English 106 or
consent of instructor.
Ill
CRITICAL WRITING SEMINAR
Brief introduction to criticism as a
discipline, followed by workshop training in
writing critical papers on the major literary
genres. Prerequisite: Grade ofC + or better
in English 106 or consent of instructor.
220
BRITISH LITERATURE I
Literary forms, themes, and authors from
the Anglo-Saxon period through the 18th
century. Emphasis on such writers as
Chaucer, Spenser, Shakespeare, Milton,
Swift, Pope, and Johnson; representative
works from Beowulf \o Bumey's Evelina.
Prerequisite: English 106 or consent of in-
structor.
Ill
BRITISH LITERATURE II
Literary movements and authors from the
beginnings of Romanticism to the end of the
19th century. Particular emphasis on such
writers as Wordsworth, Shelley, Keats,
Tennyson, Browning, Carlyle, Arnold,
Hardy, and Yeats. Prerequisite: English 106
or consent of instructor.
222
AMERICAN LITERATURE I
Survey of American literature from the
beginning of the Civil War, with major
emphasis on the writers of the Romantic
period: Poe, Emerson, Thoreau, Hawthorne,
Melville, Dickinson, and Whitman. Pre-
requisite: English 106 or consent of
instructor.
223
AMERICAN LITERATURE II
Survey of American literature from the
Civil War to the present, emphasizing such
authors as Twain, James, Crane, Hemingway,
Faulkner, Frost, Eliot, Stevens, O'Neill, and
Williams. Prerequisite: English 106 or
consent of instructor.
lis
CLASSICAL LITERATURE
A study, in translation, of Greek and
Roman works that have influenced Western
writers. Literary forms studied include epic,
drama, satire, and love poetry. Writers
A
studied include Homer, Aeschylus, So-
phocles, Euripides, Virgil, Juvenal, Horace,
Lucretius, and Ovid. Prerequisite: English
106 or consent of instructor.
240
INTRODUCTION TO
CREATIVE WRITING
Workshop discussions, structured exer-
cises, and readings in contemporary literature
to provide practice and basic instruction in
the writing and evaluation of poetry and
fiction. Prerequisite: English 106 or consent
of instructor.
311
MEDIEVAL LITERATURE
Readings in Old and Middle English
poetry and prose from Bede's Ecclesiastical
History to Malory's Arthurian romance.
Study of lyric, narrative, drama, and romance
with emphasis on the cultural context from
which these forms emerge. Prerequisite:
English 106 or consent of instructor.
Alternate years.
312
RENAISSANCE LITERATURE
An examination of themes and literary
forms of the Renaissance. Authors studied
will include Donne, Erasmus, Marlowe,
More, Shakespeare, Skelton, Sidney, Spenser,
and Surrey. Prerequisite: English 106 or
consent of instructor. Alternate years.
313
RESTORATION AND
18TH-CENTURY LITERATURE
Consideration of selected themes, writers,
or modes of Restoration and 18th-century
literature (1660-1800) with emphasis on the
social, political, and intellectual life of that
era. Prerequisite: English 106 or consent of
instructor. Alternate years.
314
ROMANTIC LITERATURE
Concentrated study in the writers, texts,
and themes of the Romantic period (1789-
1832) with emphasis on the social, political,
and intellectual life of that era. Prerequisite:
English 106 or consent of instructor. Alter-
nate years.
315
VICTORIAN LITERATURE
Concentrated study in the writers, texts,
and themes of the Victorian period (1832-
1901) with emphasis on the social, political,
and intellectual life of that era. Prerequisite:
English 106 or consent of instructor. Alter-
nate years.
321
ADVANCED WRITING:
TECHNICAL AND PROFESSIONAL
A course providing practice in report and
technical writing, proposals, and other areas
where competence will be expected in the
business and scientific worlds. Prerequisite:
English 106 or consent of instructor. Alter-
nate years.
322
ADVANCED WRITING:
THE CREATIVE ESSAY
A course in which students from all disci-
plines learn to explore and define themselves
through the essay, a form used to express the
universal through the particular and the
personal. Readings will include essayists
from Montaigne to Gould. Prerequisite:
Grade ofC+ or better in English 106 or
consent of instructor. Alternate years.
A
331
20TH-CENTURY FICTION
Examination of the novels and short
fiction of such major writers as Conrad,
Woolf, Joyce, Faulkner, Fowles, and Na-
bokov, with special emphasis on the relation-
ship of their works to concepts of modernism.
Prerequisite: English 106 or consent of
instructor.
332
20TH-CENTURY POETRY
Studies in the themes and visions of
modem and contemporary poets including
Yeats, Eliot, Stevens, Frost, Moore, Lowell,
Bishop, and Rich. Prerequisite: English 106
or consent of instructor.
333
THE NOVEL
An examination of British and American
works from the 18th century to the present,
focusing on the novel's ability — since its
explosive inception — to redefine its own
boundaries. Prerequisite: English 106 or
consent of instructor. Alternate years.
334
WOMEN AND LITERATURE
An examination — literary, social, and
historical — of selected British and Ameri-
can literature by women, designed to identify
those elements which distinguish women's
particular contribution to the literary canon.
Prerequisite: English 106 or consent of
instructor. Alternate years.
335
CHAUCER
A study of the major works with emphasis
on The Canterbury Tales and Troilus and
Criseyde. Some attention to language study
and to the traditions out of which Chaucer's
works arose. Prerequisite: English 106 or
consent of instructor. Alternate years.
336
SHAKESPEARE
A study of representative plays in the
context of Shakespeare's life and times.
Prerequisite: English 106 or consent of
instructor. Alternate years.
338
LINGUISTICS AND THE ANALYSIS OF
THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE
Introduction to methods of analyzing
spoken and written English. Classroom
work supported by weekly tutorials, in which
the student gains practical experience in
identifying, diagnosing, and correcting basic
communications problems. Prerequisite:
English 106 or consent of instructor. Alter-
nate years.
341
POETRY WORKSHOP I
An intermediate workshop focusing on the
writing of poetry and methods of analysis.
Prerequisite: Grade ofB of better in English
240 or consent of instructor. Alternate years.
342
nCTION WORKSHOP I
An intermediate course in the writing of
short fiction in a workshop environment,
where the student is trained to hear language
at work. Emphasis on characterization and
story. Prerequisite: Grade ofB or better in
English 240 or consent of instructor. Alter-
nate years.
411
FORM AND THEORY: POETRY
Principles and meter, rhyme, formal
structure, and traditional and contemporary
poetic forms will be studied through read-
ings, discussion, and exercises. Designed to
enhance skills in both practical criticism and
A
in creative writing, this course will pay par-
ticular attention to theories concerned with
the relationship between form and content in
poetry. Prerequisite: English 240 or consent
of instructor. Alternate years.
412
FORM AND THEORY: HCTION
An exploration of such fictional forms as
drama, short story, novella, tale, yam, novel
and essay. Serious attention will be given to
aesthetics and the role and responsibility of
the writer in society. Prerequisite: English
240 or consent of instructor. Alternate years.
420
SELECTED WRITERS
An intensive study of no more than three
writers, selected on the basis of student and
faculty interest. Possible combinations
include: Frost, Hemingway, and Faulkner;
O'Connor, Welty, and Porter; Spenser and
Milton; Hawthorne, Melville, and Dickens;
Woolf, Forster, and Lawrence; Joyce and
Yeats. Prerequisite: English 106 or consent
of instructor. Alternate years.
All
TOPICS IN LITERATURE
Examination of a literary theme, idea, or
movement as it appears in one or more types
of literature and as it cuts across various
epochs. Possible topics include: American
Novelists and Poets of the Jazz Age and
Depression; The Bible and Literature; Gothic
Tradition in American Literature; Mystery
and Detective Fiction; The Hero in Litera-
ture. Prerequisite: English 106 or consent of
instructor. Alternate years.
441
POETRY WORKSHOP II
An advanced workshop in the writing of
poetry. Students will receive intensive anal-
ysis of their own work and acquire experi-
ence in evaluating the work of their peers.
Prerequisite: English 341. Alternate years.
442
nCTION WORKSHOP II
An advanced course in the writing of short
fiction. Emphasis on the complexities of
voice and tone. The student will be encour-
aged to develop and control his or her
individual style and produce publishable
fiction. Prerequisite: English 342.
Alternate years.
449
ADVANCED CRITICISM
Reading and discussion in the theory and
history of criticism. Examination of both
traditional and contemporary ideas about the
value and nature of literary expression and its
place in human culture generally. Work in
the course includes practical as well as theo-
retical use of the ideas and methods of
critical inquiry. Prerequisite: English 106 or
consent of instructor. Alternate years.
470-479
INTERNSHIP (See index)
Department provides internships in
editing, legal work, publishing, and technical
writing.
N80-N89
INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index)
Recent studies include the role of Penn-
sylvania in the fiction of John O'Hara; the
changing image of women in American art
and literature (1890-1945); the hard-boiled
detective novel; contemporary women
writers; and Milton's use of the Bible in
Paradise Lost.
490-491
INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index)
Recent projects include "The Function of
the Past in the Fiction of William Faulkner"
and "Illusion, Order, and Art in the Novels of
Virginia Woolf"
A
Foreign
Languages and
Literatures
Associate Professors: Maples, MacKenzie
(Chairperson)
Assistant Professor: Buedel
Visiting Instructor: Falk
Otudy
of foreign languages and litera-
tures offers opportunity to explore broadly
the varieties of human experience and
thought. It contributes both to personal and
to international understanding by providing
competence in a foreign language and a
critical acquaintance with the literature and
culture of foreign peoples. A major can serve
as entree to careers in business, industry,
government, publishing, education, journal-
ism, social agencies, translating, and writing.
It prepares for graduate work in literature or
linguistics and the international fields of
politics, commerce, law, health, and area
studies.
French, German, and Spanish are offered
as major fields of study. The major consists
of at least eight courses numbered 111
or above. Majors seeking teacher certifica-
tion and students planning to enter graduate
school are advised to begin study of a second
foreign language. The department encour-
ages the development in breadth of programs,
including allied courses from related fields or
a second major, and also individual or
established interdisciplinary majors combin-
ing interest in several literatures or area or
cross-cultural studies; for example. Interna-
tional Studies, 20th Century Studies, the
Major in Literature. Majors, teacher certifi-
cation candidates, and all students are
encouraged to spend at least a semester of
study abroad by applying to one of the many
programs available. The department main-
tains a file of such programs.
Courses taught in English: Foreign Lan-
guages and Literatures 225 and 338.
Foreign Languages and
Literatures
225
CONTINENTAL LITERATURE
A study of such major continental authors
as Cervantes, Dostoevsky, Chekhov, Dante,
Ibsen, Proust, Gide, Kafka, Hesse, Goethe,
Sartre, Camus, Brecht, and lonesco. Works
read in English translation will vary and be
organized around a different theme or topic;
recent topics have been existentialism,
modernism, drama, the Weimar era, and 20th
century Scandinavian and German prose
writers. Prerequisite: None. May be
repeated for credit with consent of instructor .
May be accepted toward the English major
with consent of the Department of English.
A
338
FOREIGN LANGUAGE:
SYSTEMS AND PROCESS
Study of basic linguistic concepts as a tool
for language learning and teaching. Discus-
sion and application of language teaching
techniques, including work in the language
laboratory. Designed for future teachers of
one or more languages and normally taken in
the junior year. Students should arrange
through the Department of Education to
fulfill in the same semester the requirements
of a participation experience in area schools.
Prerequisite: Consent of instructor.
French
A major consists of a minimum of eight
courses numbered 111 or above, including at
least two from 402, 412, 423, and 427. In
addition, all majors who wish to be certified
for teaching must pass courses 221-222, and
Foreign Languages and Literatures 338 (the
latter course with a C or better).
A minor in French consists of at least four
courses numbered 221 and above. Courses
1 1 1 and 112 may be counted toward the
minor, but then the minor must consist of at
least five courses, three of which must be
numbered 200 and above.
101-102
ELEMENTARY FRENCH
The aim of the course is to acquire the
fundamentals of the language with a view to
using them. Regular practice in speaking,
understanding, and reading.
111-112
INTERMEDIATE FRENCH
Review and development of the funda-
mental of the language for immediate use in
speaking, understanding, and reading with a
view to building confidence in self-expres-
sion. Prerequisite: French 102 or equivalent.
221-222
FRENCH LANGUAGE PRACTICE
Further training in speaking, listening
comprehension, reading, and writing. In-
cludes extensive work in grammar. Pre-
requisite: French 112 or equivalent.
228
MODERN FRANCE
A course designed to familiarize students
with political and social structure and cultural
attitudes in contemporary French society.
Material studied may include such documents
as newspaper articles, interviews and
sociological surveys, and readings in history,
religion, anthropology, and the arts. Some
attention to the changing education system
and the family and to events and ideas which
have shaped French society. May include
some comparative study of France and the
United States. Prerequisite: French 221
or consent of instructor.
402
FRENCH LITERATURE TO 1800
Major authors and movements from the
Medieval, Renaissance, Classical and En-
lightenment periods. Includes the chanson de
geste, Villon, Montaigne, Comeille, Racine,
Moliere, Voltaire and Rousseau. Prerequi-
site: French 222 or 228 or consent of in-
structor. Alternate years.
412
FRENCH LITERATURE
OF THE 19TH CENTURY
The dimensions of the Romantic sensibil-
ity: Musset, Hugo, Vigny, Balzac, Stendhal.
Realism and Naturalism in the novels of
Flaubert and Zola. Reaction in the poetry of
Baudelaire, Rimbaud, Verlaine, and Ma-
larme'. Prerequisite: French 222 or 228 or
consent of instructor. Alternate years.
A
423
MODERN FRENCH THEATRE
Major trends in French drama from the
turn of the century to Existentialism and the
Theatre of the Absurd, Giraudoux, Anouilh,
Sartre, Camus, Beckett, lonesco. Genet,
Adamov, and others. Prerequisite: French
222 or 228 or consent of instructor.
All
FRENCH LITERATURE OF
THE 20TH CENTURY
Representative poets and novelists of
modem France. Readings selected form the
works of authors such as Proust, Gide,
Aragon, Giono, Mauriac, Celine, Malraux,
Saint-Exupery, Camus, the "new novelists"
(Robbe-Grillet, Butor, Sarraute, Le Cle'zio),
and the poetry of ApoUinaire, Valery, the
Surrealists (Breton, Reverdy, Eluard, Char),
Saint- John Perse, Supervielle, Pfevert, and
others. Some attention to works of French-
speaking African writers. Prerequisite:
French 222 or 228 or consent of instructor.
Alternate years.
441
ADVANCED LANGUAGE PRACTICE
Intensive practice for advanced students
who wish to improve further their spoken and
written French. Includes work in oral
comprehension, phonetics, pronunciation,
oral and written composition, and translation.
Prerequisite: One course from French 402,
412, 423, 427 or consent of instructor.
470-479
INTERNSHIP (See index)
N80-N89
INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index)
Examples of recent studies in French
include translation, existentialism, the
classical period, enlightenment literature, and
Saint-Exupery.
490-491
INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index)
German
A. major consists of a minimum of eight
courses numbered 11 1 or above. One unit of
Foreign Languages and Literatures 225 may
be included in the major with permission.
German 431 or German 441 is required of all
majors.
All majors who wish to be certified for
teaching must pass German 323 and 325. In
addition to the eight courses for the major
they must also pass Foreign Languages and
Literatures 338 with a grade of C or better.
All majors are urged to enroll in History 416,
Music 336, Political Science 220 and
Theatre 335.
A minor in German consists of at least
four courses numbered 200 and above.
Courses 111 and 1 12 may be counted toward
the minor, but then the minor must consist of
at least five courses, three of which must be
numbered 200 and above.
101-102
ELEMENTARY GERMAN
Aim of course is to acquire the fundamen-
tals of the language with a view to using
them. Regular practice in speaking, under-
standing, and reading.
111-112
INTERMEDIATE GERMAN
Review and development of fundamentals
of the language for immediate use in speak-
ing, understanding, and reading with a view
to building confidence in self-expression.
Prerequisite: German 102 or equivalent.
221-222
COMPREHENSIVE REVIEW
AND LANGUAGE PRACTICE
A two-semester course designed to review
and develop skills in speaking, listening,
A
writing and reading. Grammar and vocabu-
lary building are stressed with intensive
review, writing practice and some reading on
contemporary issues in German-speaking
countries. As the course progresses, greater
emphasis is placed on speaking, listening
comprehension, and translation.
Some attention is given to the development
of the language and its relationship to
English. Prerequisite: German 112 or
equivalent.
323
SURVEY OF GERMAN
LITERATURE AND CIVILIZATION I
Designed to acquaint the student with
important periods of German literature,
representative authors, and major cultural
developments in Germany, Austria, and
Switzerland. The course deals with Uterature
and culture from the Early Middle Ages
through the 18th century. Prerequisite:
German 222 or consent of instructor.
325
SURVEY OF GERMAN
LITERATURE AND CIVILIZATION II
Designed to acquaint the student with
important periods of German literature,
representative authors, and major cultural
developments in Germany, Austria, and
Switzerland. The course deals with literature
and culture from the 19th century to the
present. Prerequisite: German 222 or
consent of instructor.
411
THE NOVELLE
The German Novelle as a genre relating to
various literary periods. Prerequisite: Ger-
man 323 or 325 or consent of instructor.
421
GERMAN POETRY
A study of selected poets or the poetry of
various literary periods. Possible topics
include: Romantic poetry, Heine, Rilke, and
Benn. Prerequisite: German 323 or 325 or
consent of instructor.
431
GOETHE
A study of the life and works of Goethe.
Goethe's significance in the Classical period
and later. Readings in the major works.
Prerequisite: German 323 or 325 or consent
of instructor.
433
CLASSICAL GERMAN DRAMA
The development of das klassische Drama
with emphasis on works of Lessing, Goethe,
Kleist, and Schiller. Prerequisite: German
323 or 325 or consent of instructor.
441
CONTEMPORARY
GERMAN LITERATURE
Representative poets, novelists and
dramatists of contemporary Germany,
Switzerland and Austria covering the period
from 1945 to the present. Readings selected
from writers such as: Borchert, Boll, Brecht,
Benn, Frisch, Durrenmatt, Bichsel, Handke,
Walser, Grass and others. Prerequisite:
German 323 or 325 or consent of instructor.
470-479
INTERNSHIP (See index)
N80-N89
INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index)
Examples of recent studies in German
include Classicism, Germanic
Mythology, Hermann Hesse, the dramas of
Frisch and Durrenmatt.
490-491
INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index)
A
Greek
vjreek is not offered as a major. An
interdisciplinary minor in Biblical Languages
requires the completion of Greek 221, 222
and Hebrew 221 and 222.
101-102
NEW TESTAMENT
GRAMMAR AND READINGS
Fundamentals of New Testament Greek
grammar and readings of selected passages of
the Greek text. Alternate years.
Ill
READINGS IN THE SYNOPTIC GOSPELS
A comparative study of the synoptic
tradition in Greek. Prerequisite: Greek 102
or equivalent. Alternate years.
Ill
READINGS IN THE PAULINE EPISTLES
Selected readings from the letters of Paul
in Greek. Prerequisite: Greek 221 or equiva-
lent. Alternate years.
Hebrew
xlebrew is not offered as a major. An
interdisciplinary minor in Biblical Languages
requires the completion of Greek 221, 222
and Hebrew 221 and 222.
101-102
OLD TESTAMENT
GRAMMAR AND READINGS
Fundamentals of Old Testament Hebrew
grammar and readings of selected passages of
the Hebrew text. Alternate years.
Ill
READINGS IN OLD
TESTAMENT NARRATIVE
A critical reading of the Hebrew text of
selected narrative portions of the Old Testa-
ment with special attention being given to
exegetical questions. The text read varies
from year to year. Prerequisite: Hebrew 102
or equivalent. Alternate years.
Ill
READINGS IN THE PROPHETIC BOOKS
AND WISDOM LITERATURE
A critical reading of the Hebrew text of
selected portions of Old Testament prophecy
and wisdom literature with special attention
being given to exegetical questions. The text
read varies from year to year. Prerequisite:
Hebrew 221 or equivalent. Alternate years.
Spanish
A major consists of eight courses num-
bered 1 1 1 or above. Foreign Languages and
Literatures 338 does not count toward the
major.
All majors who wish to be certified for
teaching in secondary school must pass
Foreign Languages and Literatures 338
(grade of C or better) and Spanish 418.
A minor in Spanish consists of at least
four courses numbered 200 and above.
Courses 1 1 1 and 1 12 may be counted toward
the minor, but then the minor must consist of
at least five courses, three of which must be
numbered 200 and above.
101-102
ELEMENTARY SPANISH
Aim of course is to acquire the fundamen-
tals of the language with a view to using
them. Regular practice in speaking, under-
standing, and reading.
111-112
INTERMEDIATE SPANISH
Review and development of fundamentals
of the language for immediate use in speak-
ing, understanding, reading and writing with
a view to building confidence in self-expres-
sion. Prerequisite: Spanish 102 or
equivalent.
A
221-222
COMPREHENSIVE REVffiW AND
LANGUAGE PRACTICE
This course consists of a thorough review
of grammar, drills for oral comprehension
and expression, discussion of readings and
the writing of compositions. It is designed to
develop the student's ability to read, write
and converse in Spanish with confidence.
Prerequisite: Spanish 112 or equivalent.
311
HISPANIC CULTURE
To introduce students to the Spanish-
speaking people — their values, customs and
institutions, with reference to the geographic
and historical forces governing present-day
Spain and Spanish America. Prerequisite:
Spanish 222 or consent of instructor. Alter-
nate years.
323
SURVEY OF SPANISH LITERATURE
AND CIVILIZATION
Designed to acquaint the student with
important periods of Spanish literature,
representative authors, and major socio-
economic developments. The course deals
with the literature from the beginning to the
present. Prerequisite: Spanish 222 or
consent of instructor. Alternate years.
325
SURVEY OF SPANISH-AMERICAN
LITERATURE AND CIVILIZATION
Designed to acquaint the student with
important periods of Spanish-American
literature, representative authors, and major
socio-economic developments. The course
deals with the literature, especially the essay
and poetry, from the 16th century to the
present. Prerequisite: Spanish 222 or
consent of instructor. Alternate years.
418
ADVANCED LANGUAGE PRACTICE
Intensive practice for advanced students
who wish to improve further their spoken and
written Spanish. Includes work in oral
comprehension, pronunciation, oral and
written composition, and translation. Pre-
requisite: One Spanish course at the 300' s
level or consent of instructor. Alternate
years.
424
SPANISH LITERATURE
OF THE GOLDEN AGE
A study of representative works and
principal literary figures in the poetry, prose,
and drama of the 16th and 17th centuries.
Prerequisite: Spanish 323, 325, or consent of
instructor.
426
MODERN HISPANIC LITERATURE
Readings of important works of drama,
poetry, and prose from the major periods of
the 19th and 20th century Spanish and Latin-
American literature. Prerequisite: Spanish
323, 325, or consent of instructor.
470-479
INTERNSHIP (See index)
N80-N89
INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index)
Recent studies include literary, linguistic,
and cultural topics and themes such as urban
problems as reflected in the modem novel.
490-491
INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index)
A
History
Professors: Larson (Chairperson), Piper
Associate Professor: Morris
A. major consists of 10 courses, includ-
ing 1 10, 1 1 1, and 449. At least seven courses
must be taken in the department . The
following courses may be counted toward
fulfilling the major requirements: American
Studies 200, Political Science 439, Religion
226 and 228. Other appropriate courses
outside the department may be counted upon
departmental approval. For history majors
who student teach in history, the major
consists of nine courses. In addition to the
courses listed below, special courses,
independent study, and honors are available.
Special courses recently taught and antici-
pated include a biographical study of Euro-
pean Monarchs, the European Left, the
Industrialization and Urbanization of Modem
Europe, Utopian Movements in America , the
Peace Movement in America, The Vietnam
War, and American Legal History. History
majors are encouraged to participate in the
internship program.
Three minors are offered by the Depart-
ment of History. The following courses are
required to complete a minor in American
History: History 125, 126, and three courses
in American history numbered 200 and
above. A minor in European History
requires the completion of History 110, 111
and three courses in European history
numbered 200 and above. To obtain a minor
in History (without national or geographical
designation), a student must complete six
courses in history, of which three must be
chosen from History 110, 111, 125, and 126
and three must be history courses numbered
200 and above.
105
SELECTED THEMES IN
WESTERN CIVILIZATION
A survey of the political, economic,
social, and cultural values and institutions in
Western Civilization from the time of
classical Greece to the present. One-half unit
of credit. (Not open to students who have
had History 110 and 111).
110
EUROPE 1500-1815
An examination of the political, social,
cultural, and intellectual history of Europe
and its relations with other areas of the world
from 1500 to 1815.
Ill
EUROPE 1815-PRESENT
An examination of the political, social,
cultural, and intellectual history of Europe
and its relations with other areas of the world
from 1815 to the present
120
LATIN AMERICAN HISTORY
An examination of the native civilization,
the age of discovery and conquest, Spanish
colonial policy, the independence move-
A
ments, and the development of modem
institutions and governments in Latin
America. Alternate years.
125
UNITED STATES HISTORY 1601-1877
A study of the men, measures, and
movements which have been significant
in the development of the United States be-
tween 1607 and 1877. Attention is paid
to the problems of minority groups as well as
to majority and national influences.
126
UNITED STATES
HISTORY 1877-PRESENT
A study of men, measures, and move-
ments which have been significant in the
development of the United States since 1877.
Attention is paid to the problems of minority
groups as well as to majority and national
influences.
210
ANCIENT HISTORY
A study of the ancient western world,
including the foundations of the western
tradition in Greece, the emergence and
expansion of the Roman state, its experience
as a republic, and its transformation into the
Empire. The course will focus on the social
and intellectual life of Greece and Rome as
well as political and economic changes.
Alternate years.
212
MEDIEVAL EUROPE
AND ITS NEIGHBORS
The history of Europe from the dissolution
of the Roman Empire to the mid- 15th
century. The course will deal with the
growing estrangement of western Catholic
Europe from the Byzantium and Islam,
culminating in the Crusades; the rise of the
Islamic Empire and its later fragmentation;
the development and growth of feudalism;
the conflict of empire and papacy, and the
rise of the towns. Alternate years.
216
FRENCH REVOLUTION
AND NAPOLEON
An analysis of the political, social, and
intellectual background of the French Revo-
lution, a survey of the course of revolutionary
development, and an estimate of the results
of the Napoleonic conquests and
administraUon. Prerequisite: History 110 or
consent of instructor. Alternate years.
218
EUROPE IN THE ERA OF
THE WORLD WARS
An intensive study of the political,
economic, social, and cultural history of
Europe from 1900-1945. Topics include the
rise of irrationalism, the origins of the First
World War, the Communist and Fascist
Revolutions, and the attempts to preserve
peace before 1939. Prerequisite: History 111
or consent of instructor. Alternate years.
219
CONTEMPORARY EUROPE
An intensive study of the political,
economic, social, and cultural history of
Europe since 1945. Topics include the post-
war economic recovery of Europe, the
Sovietization of Eastern Europe, the origins
of the Cold War, decolonization, and the
flowering of the welfare state. Prerequisite:
History 111 or consent of instructor.
222
HISTORY OF WORLD WAR II
A comprehensive examination of World
War II emphasizing the effect of ideological,
economic, and political forces on the formu-
lation of military strategy and the conduct of
operation; the nature and extent of the
expansion of government powers; and the
experience of war from the perspective of
ordinary civilians and military alike. Does
not count toward distribution.
A
226
COLONIAL AMERICA AND
THE REVOLUTIONARY ERA
The establishment of British settlements
on the American continent, their history as
colonies, the causes and events of the
American Revolution, the critical period
following independence, and proposal and
adoption of the United States Constitution.
Alternate years.
230
AFRO-AMERICAN HISTORY
A study of the experiences and participa-
tion of Afro- Americans in the United States.
The course includes historical experiences
such as slavery, abolition, reconstruction, and
urbanization. It also raises the issue of the
development and growth of white racism, and
the effect of this racism on contemporary
Afro- American social, intellectual, and
political life. Alternate years.
244
20TH CENTURY UNITED STATES
This course begins with the Progressive
Era and includes the political, economic, and
social developments in the 20th centiuy.
Emphasis will be placed on the domestic and
international demands which have faced the
United States in the period following World
Warn.
310
WOMEN IN HISTORY
An examination of the social, political ,
economic and intellectual experience of
women in the Western World from ancient
times to the present. May be taken for either
one-half unit (section 310A) or full unit (sec-
(tion 310B); declared majors and prospective
majors should take the full-unit course, 310B.
316
CONFLICT IN WESTERN CIVILIZATION
An in-depth study of the changing nature
of war and its relationship to the development
of Western Civilization since the end of the
Middle Ages. Particular emphasis will be
placed on the role of war in the development
of the modem nation state and the origins and
nature of total war. Alternate years.
320
DIPLOMATIC HISTORY
OF EUROPE SINCE 1789
A survey of the development of the
European-states system and the relations
between the European states since the
beginning of the French Revolution. Pre-
requisite: History HI or consent of instruc-
tor. Alternate years.
322
THE CRISIS OF LIBERALISM AND
NATIONALISM., EUROPE 1848-1870
An in-depth investigation of the crucial
"Middle Years" of 19th century Europe from
the revolutions of 1848 through the unifica-
tion of Germany. The course centers on the
struggles for power within the major states of
Europe at this time, and how the vehicle of
nationalism was used to bring about one type
of solution. Alternate years.
328
AGE OF JEFFERSON AND JACKSON
The theme of the course is the emergence
of the political and social characteristics that
shaped modem America. The personalities
of Thomas Jefferson, John Marshall, John
Randolph, Aaron Burr, and Andrew Jackson
receive special attention. Special considera-
tion is given to the first and second party
systems, the decline in community cohesive-
ness, the westward movement, and the
growing importance of the family as a unit of
social organization. Alternate years.
332
CIVIL WAR AND RECONSTRUCTION
The problems and events leading to war,
the political and military history of the war,
and the bitter aftermath to the Compromise
of 1877.
A
340
20TH CENTURY UNITED
STATES RELIGION
The study of historical and cultural
developments in American society which
relate to religion or what is commonly called
religion. This involves consideration of the
institutional and intellectual development of
several faith groups as well as discussion of
certain problems, such as the persistence of
religious bigotry and the changing modes of
church-state relationships. Alternate years.
416
HISTORY OF REFORMATION THOUGHT
A study of the ideas and systems of ideas
propounded prior to the Reformation, but
which are historically related to its inception,
and of the ideas and systems of ideas in-
volved in the formulation of the major
Reformation Protestant traditions, and in the
Catholic Reformation. Included are the ideas
of the humanists of the Reformation Era.
Alternate years.
418
HISTORY OF RENAISSANCE THOUGHT
A study of the classical, humanist, and
scholastic elements involved in the develop-
ment of the Renaissance outlook on views
and values, both in Italy and in Northern
Europe. The various combinations of social
and political circumstances which constitute
the historical context of these intellectual
developments will be noted. Alternate years.
442
UNITED STATES SOCIAL AND
INTELLECTUAL HISTORY TO 1877
A study of the social and intellectual
experience of the United States from its
colonial antecedents through reconstruction.
Among the topics considered are Puritanism,
transcendentalism, community life and
organization, education, and social-reform
movements. Prerequisites: 7wo courses
from History 125, 126, 230, or consent of
instructor.
443
UNITED STATES SOCIAL AND
INTELLECTUAL HISTORY SINCE 1877
A study of the social and intellectual
experience of the United States from recon-
struction to the present day. Among the
topics considered are social Darwinism,
pragmatism, community life and organiza-
tion, education and social reform movements.
Prerequisite: Two courses form History 125,
126, 230 or consent of instructor.
449
HISTORICAL METHODS
This course focuses on the nature and
meaning of history. It will open to the
student different historical approaches and
will provide the opportunity to explore these
approaches in terms of particular topics and
periods. Majors are required to enroll in this
course in either their junior or senior year.
The course is open to other students who
have two courses in history or consent
of instructor.
470-479
INTERNSHIP (See index)
Typically, history interns work for local
government agencies engaged in historical
projects or for the Lycoming County Histori-
cal Museum.
N80-N89
INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index)
Recent topics include studies of the
immigration of American blacks,
political dissension in the Weimer republic,
Indian relations before the American Revolu-
tion, and the history of Lycoming County.
490-491
INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index)
A
International
Studies
Professor: Larson (Coordinator)
1 he major is designed to integrate an
understanding of the changing social, politi-
cal, and historical environment of Europe
today with study of Europe in its relations to
the rest of the world, particularly the United
States. It stresses the international relations
of the North Atlantic community and offers
the student opportunity to emphasize either
European studies or international relations.
The program provides multiple perspectives
on the cultural traits that shape popular
attitudes and institutions. Study of a single
country is included as a data-base for com-
parisons, and study of its language, as a basis
for direct communication with its people.
The program is intended to prepare a
student either for graduate study or for
careers which have an international compo-
nent. International obligations are increas-
ingly assumed by government agencies and a
wide range of business, social, religious, and
educational organizations. Opportunities are
found in the fields of journalism, publishing,
communications, trade, banking, advertising,
management, and tourism. The program also
offers flexible career preparation in a variety
of essential skills, such as research, data
analysis, report writing, language skills and
the awareness necessary for dealing with
people and institutions of another culture.
Preparation for related careers can be
obtained through the guided selection of
courses outside the major in the areas of
business, economics, foreign languages and
literatures, government, history, and interna-
tional relations or through a second major.
Students should design their programs in
consultation with members of the Committee
on International Studies.
1
^h"
-H;5-i'F^'
CSBSJK^
iBHH
"^ \) ' ^
f\
jk J
!• ^
! 1
1 '^
By completing six to eight additional
courses in the social sciences (which include
those courses needed to complete a major in
economics, history, political science, or
sociology/anthropology) and the required
program in education, student can be certi-
fied for the teacher education program in
social studies. By completing a major in the
foreign language (five or more courses) and
the education program, students can be
certified to teach that language. The Interna-
tional Studies program also encourages
participation in study-abroad programs, as
well as the Washington and United Nations
semesters.
The major includes 1 1 courses selected as
follows:
International Relations Courses - Four or
two courses (if two, then four must be taken
from Area Courses). Courses within this
group are designed to provide a basic
understanding of the international system and
A
of Europe's relations with the rest of the
world. Political Science 225 is required.
Political Science 225: World Politics
Economic 443: International Trade
History 320: European Diplomatic History
Political Science 439: American Foreign
Policy
Area Courses - Four or two courses (if two
then four must be taken from International
Relations Courses). Courses within this
group are designed to provide a basic under-
standing of the European political, social, and
economic environment. History 111 and
Economics 221 are required.
History 111: Europe 181 5-Present
Economics 221: Comparative Economic
Systems
Political Science 220: European Politics
History 218: Europe in the Era of the
World Wars
History 219: Contemporary Europe
National Courses
Language - Two courses one language.
French 221, plus one course numbered 222 or
above (except 228)
German 221, plus one course numbered 222
or above
Spanish 221, plus one course numbered 222
or above (except 311)
Country - One course. The student must
select, according to his or her language
preparation, one European country which will
serve as a social interest area throughout the
program. The country selected will serve as
the base for individual projects in the major
courses wherever possible.
France - French 228: Modem France
Germany - History N80: Topics in
German History
Spain - Spanish 311: Hispanic Culture
Elective Course - One course which should
involve further study of some aspect of the
program. Appropriate courses are any area or
international relations courses not yet taken.
History 110, 316; Economic 226; Political
Science 326, 327, 438; related foreign-
literature courses counting toward the fine-
arts requirement and internships.
Senior Seminar
449
SENIOR SEMINAR
A one-semester seminar, taken in the
senior year, in which students and several
faculty members will pursue an integrative
topic in the field of international studies.
Students will work to some extent independ-
ently. Guest speakers will be invited. The
seminar will be open to qualified persons
from outside the major and the College.
Prerequisite: Consent of instructor.
Literature
Associate Professor: Maples (Coordinator)
i his major recognizes literature as a
distinct discipline beyond national boundaries
and combines the study of any two literatures
in the areas of English, French, German, and
Spanish. Students can thus explore two
literatures widely and intensively at the upper
levels of course offerings within each of the
respective departments while developing and
applying skills in foreign languages. The
major prepares students for graduate study in
either of the two literatures studied or in
comparative literature.
The major requires at least six literature
courses, equally divided between the two
literatures concerned. The six must be at the
advanced level as determined in consultation
with advisors (normally courses numbered
200 and above in English and 400 and above
in foreign languages). In general, two of
the advanced courses in each literatiu^e
should be period courses. The third course,
taken either as a regular course or an inde-
pendent study, may have as its subject
another period, a particular author, genre, or
literary theme, or some other unifying
approach or idea. Beyond these six, the
major must include at least two additional
courses from among those counting toward a
major in the departments involved. Any
prerequisite courses in the respective depart-
ments (for example: English 106, French
221-222 or 228, German 221-222, Spanish
221-222) should be taken during the fresh-
man year. Students should design their
programs in consultation with a faculty
member from each of the literatures con-
cerned. Programs for the major must be
approved by the departments involved.
Mass
Communication
Assistant Professor: Nason (Chairperson),
Smith, Wild
1 he major in Mass Communication
recognizes the need for a liberal arts founda-
tion and includes selected courses from the
Departments of Art, Business Administration,
History, Philosophy, Political Science,
Psychology and Sociology/Anthropology.
The major combines a core of Mass Commu-
nication courses with one of three profes-
sional tracks: Advertising/Public Relations,
Broadcast Journalism, and Journalism.
Emphasis is placed on developing an under-
standing of the cultural and historical roles of
the mass media and on developing the
communicative skills necessary for careers in
the media.
Students majoring in Mass Communica-
tion must complete the Core Curriculum
A
and one professional track. Each track
requires a combination of theory, production,
and writing courses.
A minor in Mass Communication consists
of Mass Communication 110, 211,215 and
three of the following courses: Mass Com-
munication 224, 329, 330, 331, 470.
I. THE CORE CURRICULUM
REQUIRED OF ALL STUDENTS
Mass Comm 215
MassComm 110
Mass Comm 211
Mass Comm 330
MassComm 331
Pol Sci 448
Mass Comm 247,
248, 249 (one credit
Introduction to
Media Writing
Introduction to Mass
Communication
Fundamentals of Oral
Communication
Theories and Issues in
Mass Communication
Mass Media Law
and Regulation
Public Opinion
and Polling*
Practicum in Mass
each) Communication
♦Business 445 (Marketing Research), Psychology
224 (Social Psychology) or Sociology 447
(Research Methods in Sociology) may be substi-
tuted. These courses require departmental
prerequisites or consent of individual instructors.
Students must complete the requirements
of one of the following professional tracks:
Track I • Advertising/Public Relations
Business 228 Marketing Management I
Business 332 Advertising
Mass Comm 325 Writing for Business and
Public Relations
One of the following writing courses:
Mass Comm 323 Writing for Special
Audiences
Mass Comm 327 Print Journalism
Mass Comm 329 Broadcast Journalism
Two of the following production courses:
Art 227 Introduction to Photography
Mass Comm 218 Radio Programming
and Production
Mass Comm 224 Television Production
Track II - Journalism
Art 227 Introduction to Photography
Mass Comm 327 Print Journalism
Pol Sci 111 State and Local Government
One of the following additional
writing courses:
Mass Comm 329 Broadcast Journalism
Mass Comm 334 Public Affairs Reporting
One of the following courses:
History 126
Philosophy 115
Sociology 227
Sociology 334
United States History,
1877 -present
Philosophy and
Public Policy
Social Problems*
Racial and Cultural
Minorities*
♦Requires prerequisite or consent of instructor
Track III - Broadcast Journalism
MassComm 218
Mass Comm 224
Mass Comm 329
Mass Comm 334
Radio Programing
and Production
Television Production
Broadcast Journalism
Public Affairs Reporting
Pol Sci 111
State and Local Government
One of the following courses:
History 126 United States History
1877-present
Philosophy 115 Philosophy and
Public Policy
Sociology 227 Social Problems*
Sociology 334 Racial and Cultural
Minorities*
♦Requires a prerequisite or consent of instructor
A
110
INTRODUCTION TO MASS
COMMUNICATION
Theories of the process of mass communi-
cation and introduction to the mass media;
attention will be given to problems of
censorship and media ethics. Analysis of the
mass media's impact on society; emphasis
will be placed on the social, psychological,
and political implications of the media's
shaping influence on man and institutions.
211
FUNDAMENTALS OF
ORAL COMMUNICATION
The dynamics of oral communication.
The development of elementary principles of
simple oral communication through lectures,
prepared assignments in speaking, and
informal class exercises. Utilizes video-tape
sequences for feedback to students.
215
INTRODUCTION TO MEDIA WRITING
Analysis of and practice in the basic forms
of media writing: the elements of lead, style
and structure. Frequent workshop sessions
for detailed critiques and discussion of
student writing. Prerequisites: A grade ofC
or better in English 106 or consent of the
instructor.
218
RADIO PROGRAMMING
AND PRODUCTION
Contemporary broadcast programming
techniques including station scheduling,
program development and analysis, and
implementation in real and hypothetical
situations. Emphasis on management
functions.
224
TELEVISION PRODUCTION
Technical, aesthetic, organizational, and
business aspects of video programs. Study
and use of basic equipment to produce
standard formats on videotape.
226
LITERATURE, FILM AND TELEVISION
The relationship between the conventions
of literature, film and television with empha-
sis on examination of representative works.
Media comparison to reveal the problems of
adaptation. Prerequisite: English 106 or
consent of instructor.
247-249
PRACTICUM IN MASS
COMMUNICATION
Utilization of mass communication prin-
ciples, techniques and skills in an applied
setting through work experience, primarily
with campus media. Students will write,
produce and report news for print (Mass
Comm 247), radio (Mass Comm 248) and
television (Mass Comm 249) outlets. One-
hour credit. P/F grade. One may be repeated
once for credit. Limit of one hour credit per
semester. Prerequisite: Consent of the
instructor.
323
WRITING FOR SPECIAL AUDIENCES
Intensive practice in writing with a
purpose and in presenting information related
to the student's interests to different kinds of
audiences. Includes training in the use of
graphics and in library research applicable to
defined topics and audiences. Designed for
Mass Communication students but open to
others. Prerequisite: A grade of C or better
in Mass Communication 215 or consent of
instructor.
325
WRITING FOR BUSINESS
AND PUBLIC RELATIONS
Analyzing media and audiences for public
relations and business purposes; planning,
designing, and writing business rep)orts and
procedures; press relations and publicity
methods; the news feature and publicity
release. Includes training in library research
related to business communications and
^k.
public relations. Prerequisite: A grade ofC
or better in Mass Communication 215 or
consent of instructor.
PRIlSrr JOURNALISM
Techniques in reporting news and trends
at the local, regional, county levels; emphasis
on writing the longer news and feature
article, the editorial, and the investigative
news story. Prerequisite: A grade ofC or
better in Mass Communication 215 or
consent of the instructor.
329
BROADCAST JOURNALISM
Study of, and practical experience in, the
news gathering process for electronic media.
Emphasis on covering the local story from
the small-station perspective. Students in the
course are responsible for writing, producing,
editing and broadcasting newscasts for
WRLC-FM. The course also looks at the
special ethical problems of electronic news
coverage. Prerequisites: Mass Communica-
tion 215 and Mass Communication 218 or
consent of instructor.
330
THEORIES AND ISSUES
IN MASS COMMUNICATION
An analysis of current theories dealing
with mass communication systems and the
behavior and attitudes of, and effects on,
their audiences. The course also examines
contemporary mass media issues with an em-
phasis on developing critical thinking skills.
Prerequisites: Mass Communication 110.
331
MASS MEDIA LAW AND REGULATION
An examination of the legal structure and
the system by which mass communication is
controlled in this society. The forces which
shape, influence, and make policy will be
considered. Cross-listed as Political Science
436. Prerequisite: Junior and senior
standing or consent of instructor.
334
PUBLIC AFFAIRS REPORTING
A workshop course in the reporting of
public affairs at the local level. The course
will investigate the relationship between
journalists and government through reporting
assignments at local municipalities. Prerequi-
site: A grade ofC or better in Mass Commu-
nication 215 or consent of
instructor.
470-479
INTERNSHIP (See index)
Interns usually work off campus in a field
related to their communication sequence.
Prerequisite: Four semesters of Mass
Communication Practicum or consent of the
instructor.
N80-N89
INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index)
Studies involve research related to the
communication sequence of the student.
490-491
INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index)
A
Mathematical
Science
Associate Professors: Haley, Sprechini
Assistant Professors: DeSilva (Chairperson),
Golshan, Weida, Yan
Part-time Instructors: Davis, Murphy,
Abercrombie, Collins
1 he Department of Mathematical Sci-
ences offers major and minor programs in
computer science and mathematics.
Computer Science
A major in computer science consists of
11 courses: Mathematics 116, 128, and 129,
and Computer Science 125, 246, 247, 321,
344, 445, and two other computer science
courses numbered 320 or above. Recom-
mended extradepartmental courses: Philoso-
phy 225, and Psychology 337. In addition to
the regular courses listed below, special
courses are occasionally available.
A minor in computer science consists of
Math 1 16, Computer Science 125, 246, 247,
and two other computer science courses
numbered 220 or above.
101
MICROCOMPUTER FILE MANAGEMENT
An introduction to a file-management
system, i.e. a database system that uses a
single file, in the MS-DOS environment.
One-half unit. This course may not be used
to meet distribution requirements.
108
MATHEMATICAL PROBLEM-SOLVING
WITH MICROCOMPUTERS
An introduction to the use of microcom-
puter-based, integrated software in solving
problems from mathematics and related
areas. Included are uses of spreadsheet, data-
base and graphics functions to analyze, solve,
and display solutions to problems from the
areas of number theory, algebra, geometry,
statistics, and the mathematics of business
and finance. Emphasis is given to the
processes involved in mathematical model-
ing. Laboratory experience is included using
current software. Prerequisite: Credit for or
exemption from Mathematics 005.
125
INTRODUCTION TO
COMPUTER SCIENCE
Introduction to programming. Topics
include algorithms, program structure, and
computer configuration. Laboratory experi-
ence is included, most recently using Pascal
and the Karel simulation package. Prerequi-
site: Credit for or exemption from Mathe-
matics 005.
246
PRINCIPLES OF
ADVANCED PROGRAMMING
Principles of effective programming,
including structiu"ed programming, stepwise
refinement, assertion proving, style, debug-
ging, control structure, decision tables, finite
state machines, recursion, and encoding.
Utilities most recently used include SVS
Pascal, the UNIX operating system, C, and
Shell programming. Prerequisite: A grade
ofC or better in Computer Science 125 or
consent of instructor.
^S^
247
DATA STRUCTURES
Representation of data and algorithms
associated with data structures. Topics
include representation of lists, trees, graphs
and strings, algorithms for searching and
sorting. Prerequisite: A grade ofC or better
in Computer Science 246 or consent of in-
structor. Corequisite: Mathematics 116.
321
INTRODUCTION TO
NUMERICAL ANALYSIS
Topics from the theory of interpolation;
numerical approaches to approximation roots
and functions, integration, systems of
differential equations, linear systems, matrix
inversion, and the eigenvalue problem.
Prerequisite: Computer Science 125 and
Mathematics 129; Mathematics 130 strongly
recommended.
344
MACHINE LANGUAGE
Principles of machine language program-
ming; computer organization and representa-
tion of numbers, strings, arrays, and list
structures at the machine level; interrupt
programming, relocatable code, linking
loaders; interfacing with operating systems.
Prerequisite: A grade ofC or better in
Computer Science 246 or consent of
instructor.
345
INTRODUCTION TO
COMPUTER GRAPHICS
An introduction to graphics hardware and
software with emphasis on the mathematics
necessary to represent, transform, and display
images of two and three dimensional objects.
Laboratory exercises will be designed to
explore the capabilities of the graphics
system and to test the students' understanding
of the principles discussed in class. Pre-
requisite: Computer Science 246 and either
Computer Science 247 or permission of the
instructor; Mathematics 130 recommended.
Alternate years.
349
DATABASE SYSTEMS
External storage structures, hashed files,
indexed files; relational, network, and
hierarchical data models; relational algebra
and the relational calculus; design theory for
relational databases; query optimization;
concurrent operations; database protection.
Prerequisite; Computer Science 247. Alter-
nate years.
445
SYSTEMS PROGRAMMING
The emphasis in this course is on the
algorithms used in programming the various
parts of a computer system. These parts
include assemblers, loaders, editors, interrupt
processors, input/output schedulers, processor
and job schedulers, and memory managers.
Prerequisite: Computer Science 247 and 344.
446
COMPILER CONSTRUCTION
The emphasis in this course is on the
construction of translators for programming
languages. Topics include lexical analysis,
block structure, grammars, parsing, program
representation, and run-time organization.
Prerequisite: Computer Science 247.
Alternate years.
470-479
INTERNSHIP (SEE INDEX)
N80-N89
INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index)
490-491
INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index)
^^
Mathematics
A. major mathematics consists of 10 unit
courses in the mathematical sciences and four
semesters of non-credit colloquia: Computer
Science 125, Mathematics 128, 129, 130,
234, 238, 432, 434, and two other mathemat-
ics courses numbered 220 or above, one of
which may be replaced by mathematics
courses numbered 220 or above, one of
which may be replaced by Mathematics 112,
1 16, or 214; four semesters of Mathematics
339 or 449 taken during the junior and senior
years.
Majors are required to attend the colloquia
during their junior and senior years (339 and
449 respectively). See the course description
of Mathematics 339-449 for further informa-
tion regarding the colloquium requirement.
Students seeking secondary certification
in mathematics are required to complete
Mathematics 330, 336, and either 103 or 332,
and are advised to enroll in Philosophy 217.
Also, all majors are advised to elect Philoso-
phy 225 and 333, Physics 225 and 226.
In addition to the regular courses listed
below, special courses are occasionally
available.
A minor in Mathematics consists of
Mathematics 128, 129, 234, 238, and two
additional courses numbered 130 or above.
005
INDIVIDUALIZED LABORATORY
INSTRUCTION IN BASIC ALGEBRA
A self-paced study of arithmetic and
decimal numeral, fractions, the real number
line, factoring, solutions to linear and
quadratic equations, graphs of linear and
quadratic functions, expressions with rational
exponents, algebraic functions, exponential
functions, and inequalities. THIS COURSE
IS LIMITED TO STUDENTS PLACED
THEREIN BY THE MATHEMATICS
DEPARTMENT. One-half unit of credit.
103
INTRODUCTION TO STATISTICS
Topics include tabular and graphical descrip-
tive statistics, discrete and continuous
probability distributions. Central Limit
Theorem, one and two sample hypotheses
tests, analysis of variance, chisquared tests,
nonparametric tests, linear regression and
correlation. Other topics may include index
numbers, time series, sampling design, and
experimental design. Course also includes
some use of a microcomputer. Prerequisite:
Credit for or exemption from
Mathematics 005.
106
COMBINATORICS
An introduction to the analysis of count-
ing problems. Topics include permutations,
combinations, binomial coefficients, inclu-
sion/exclusion principle, and partitions. The
nature of the subject allows questions to be
posed in everyday language while still
developing sophisticated mathematical
concepts. Prerequisite: Credit for or exemp-
tion from Mathematics 005.
109
APPLIED ELEMENTARY CALCULUS
An intuitive approach to the calculus
concepts with applications to business,
biology, and social-science problems. Not
open to students who have completed Mathe-
matics 128. Prerequisite: Credit for or
exemption form Mathematics 005.
112
HNITE MATHEMATICS
FOR DECISION MAKING
An introduction to some of the principal
mathematical models, not involving calculus,
which are used in business administration,
social sciences, and operations research. The
course will include both deterministic models
such as graphs, networks, linear program-
ming and voting models, and probabilistic
A
models such as Markov chains and games.
Prerequisite: Credit for or exemption from
Mathematics 005.
116
DISCRETE MATHEMATICS
An introduction to discrete structures.
Topics include equivalence relations, parti-
tions and quotient sets, mathematical
induction, recessive functions, elementary
logic, discrete number systems, elementary
combinatorial theory, and general algebraic
structures emphasizing semi-groups, groups,
lattices. Boolean algebras, graphs and trees.
Prerequisite: Computer Science 125 or
consent of instructor.
Ill
PRECALCULUS MATHEMATICS
The study of polynomial, rational,
exponential, logarithmic, and trigonometric
functions, their graphs and elementary
properties. This course is an intensive
preparation for students planning to take
Calculus (Math 128- 129), those in the
Scholars Program, or those whose major
specifically requires Precalculus. Prerequi-
site: Credit for or exemption from Mathe-
matics 005.
128-129
CALCULUS WITH
ANALYTIC GEOMETRY I & II
Differentiation and integration of alge-
braic and trigonometric functions, conic
sections and their applications, graphing
plane curves, applications to related rate and
external problems, areas of plane regions,
volumes of solids of revolution, and other
applications; differentiation and integration
of transcendental functions, parametric equa-
tions, polar coordinates, infinite sequences
and series, and series expansions of func-
tions. Prerequisite for 128: Exemption from
or a grade ofC or better in Mathematics 127.
Prerequisite for 129: exemption from or a
grade ofC or better in Mathematics 128 or
consent of instructor.
130
INTRODUCTION TO MATRIX ALGEBRA
Systems of linear equations and matrix
arithmetic. Points and hyperplanes infinite
dimensional geometries. Bases and linear
independence. Matrix representations of
linear mappings. The fixed point problem.
Special classes of matrices. Prerequisite:
Mathematics 127 or its equivalent.
205
MATHEMATICS IN
ELEMENTARY EDUCATION
This course is intended for prospective
elementary school teachers and is required of
all those seeking elementary certification.
Topics include systems of numbers and
numeration, computational algorithms,
environmental and transformation geometry
measurement, and mathematical concept
formation. Observation and participation in
Greater Williamsport elementary schools.
Prerequisite: Psychology 338 and credit for
or exemption from Mathematics 005. Core-
quisite: Any education course numbered 341
or above which is specifically required for
elementary certification.
214
MULTIVARIABLE STATISTICS
The study of statistical techniques
involving several variables. Topics include
multiple regression and correlation, one-and
two-way analysis of variance, analysis of
covariance, analysis of two- and three-way
contingency tables, and discriminate analysis.
Other topics may include cluster analysis,
factor analysis and canonical correlations,
repeated measure designs, time series analy-
sis, and nonparametric methods. Course also
includes extensive use of a statistical package
(currently BMDP). Prerequisite: A grade of
C or better in Mathematics 103 or its
equivalent.
A
231
DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS
A study of ordinary differential equations
and linear systems. Solution techniques
include: reduction of order, undetermined
coefficients, variation of parameters, Laplace
transforms, power series, and eigenvalues and
eigenvectors. A brief discussion of numeri-
cal methods may also be included. Prerequi-
site: A grade ofC or better in Mathematics
129; Mathematics 130 recommended.
233
COMPLEX VARIABLES
Complex numbers, analytic functions,
complex integration, Cauchy's theorems and
their applications. Corequisite: Mathematics
238. Alternate years.
234
FOUNDATIONS OF MATHEMATICS
Topics regularly included are the nature of
mathematical systems, essentials of logical
reasoning, and axiomatic foundations of set
theory. Other topics frequently included are
approaches to the concepts of infinity and
continuity, and the construction of the real
number system. The course serves as a
bridge form elementary calculus to advanced
courses in algebra and analysis. Prerequisite:
Mathematics 129 or consent of instructor.
238
MULTIVARIABLE CALCULUS
Algebra, geometry, and calculus in
multidimensional Euclidean space; n-tuples,
matrices; lines, planes, curves surfaces;
vector functions of a single variable, accel-
eration, curvature; functions for several vari-
ables, gradient; line integrals, vector fields,
multiple integrals, change of variable, areas,
volumes; Green's theorem. Prerequisites: A
grade ofC or better in Mathematics 129,
Mathematics 130 or consent of instructor.
321
INTRODUCTION TO
NUMERICAL ANALYSIS
Topics from the theory of interpolation;
numerical approaches to approximating roots
and functions, integration, systems of
differential equations, linear systems, matrix
inversion, and the eigenvalue problem.
Prerequisite: Computer Science 125 and
Mathematics 129; Mathematics 130 strongly
recommended.
330
TOPICS IN GEOMETRY
An axiomatic treatment of Euclidean
geometry, and an introduction to related
geometries. Prerequisite: Mathematics 128.
Alternate years.
332-333
MATHEMATICAL STATISTICS I-II
A study of probability, discrete and
continuous random variables, expected
values and moments, sampling, point
estimation, sampling distributions, interval
estimation, test of hypotheses, regression and
linear hypotheses, experimental design
models. Corequisite: Mathematics 238.
Alternate years.
336
CONCEPTS OF MATHEMATICS
IN SECONDARY EDUCATION
A coiu^se designed for mathematics majors
who are planning to teach at the secondary
level. Emphasis will be placed on the
mathematics that form the foundation of
secondary mathematics. Ideas will be
presented to familiarize the student with the
various curriculum proposals, to provide for
innovation within the existing curriculum,
and to expand the boundaries of the existing
curriculum. Open only to junior and senior
mathematics majors enrolled in the secon-
dary-education program. Alternate years.
^SV
338
OPERATIONS RESEARCH
Queuing theory, including simulations
techniques, optimization theory, including
linear programming, integer programming,
and dynamic programming; game theory,
including two-person zero-sum games,
cooperative games, and multiperson games.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 112 or Mathe-
matics 130. Alternate years.
432
REAL ANALYSIS
An introduction to the rigorous analysis of
the concepts of real variable calculus in the
setting of normed spaces. Topics from:
topology of the Euclidean plane, complete-
ness, compactness, the Heine-Borel theorem;
functions on Euclidean space, continuity,
uniform continuity, differentiability; series
and convergence; Riemann integral. Pre-
requisite: Mathematics 234 and 238.
434
MODERN ALGEBRA
An integrated approach to groups, rings,
fields, and vector spaces and functions which
preserve their structure. Prerequisite:
Mathematics 130 and 234.
438
SEMINAR
Topics in modern mathematics of current
interest to the instructor. A different topic is
selected each semester. This semester is
designed to provide junior and senior mathe-
matics majors and other qualified students
with more than the usual opportunity for con-
centrated and cooperative inquiry. Prerequi-
site: Consent of instructor. One-half unit of
credit. This course may be repeated for
credit.
339 & 449
MATHEMATICS COLLOQUIA
This non-credit but required course for
junior and senior mathematics majors offers
students a chance to hear presentations on
topics related to, but not directly covered in
formal mathematics courses. Students are
required to attend coUoquia each semester of
their junior (339) and senior (449) years.
Mathematics majors must present two
lectures, one during the junior year and one
during the senior year. A letter grade will be
given in semesters in which the student gives
a presentation, otherwise the grade will
be P/F. Seniors are strongly encouraged to
give their presentations during the fall
semester. Students applying for the profes-
sional semester in education are required to
give the first presentation before the eighth
week of the fall semester of their junior year,
and the second presentation before the eighth
week of the fall semester of their senior year.
With Departmental approval, students will be
required to take three semesters of 339 or
449; such approval is granted only in extraor-
dinary circumstances and will require the
student to give one presentation in each of
the three semesters. Noncredit course. One
hour per week.
470-479
INTERNSHIP (See index)
N80-N89
INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index)
490-491
INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index)
^ti.
Military Science
1 he U.S. Army Reserve Officer Training
Corps (R.O.T.C.) program is offered to
Lycoming College students in cooperation
with Bucknell University. The introductory
courses are taught on Lycoming's campus and
the program provides transportation to
Bucknell University for the advanced
courses. Details of the R.O.T.C. program can
be found on page 31.
Oil
INTRODUCTION TO ROTC
The course is designed to acquaint the
student with the ROTC program and with the
Army as a potential employer after gradu-
ation. Students will learn about the Army's
history, organization, equipment, and role in
the nation. Students will also learn some
fundamental mihtary skills, customs and
traditions. No credit.
012
INDIVIDUAL MILITARY SKILLS
The course expands upon the skills
learned in the previous semester. Several
classes will be held at the rifle range to
develop marksmanship skills. There will also
be training in radio communication and first
aid skills. No credit.
021
LAND NAVIGATION
Students will learn how to use military
topographic maps and reference systems.
The course includes theory and practical
exercises in navigating using compass, map
terrain association. There will also be some
instruction and practice in military writing
and briefing skills. No credit
022
LEADERSHIP THEORY
The focus is on leading a small group of
individuals. The course examines the role of
the leader, military leadership concept.
personal character, decision making, imple-
menting decisions, motivation and supervi-
sion. The course also includes instruction
and practice on conducting performance-
oriented training. No credit.
031
APPLIED LEADERSHIP
The student serves as a small unit leader
in the ROTC organization. Student leader-
ship is evaluated and developed. The student
has some responsibilities to care for and train
younger cadets. Instruction on small (infan-
try) unit tactics is used as a vehicle to provide
students a variety of leadership challenges.
No credit.
032
SMALL UNIT TACTICS
The course requires planning and practic-
ing tactical operations at small unit level.
Students continue to apply/develop leader-
ship skills in increasingly complex situations.
Topics include preparation of orders, offense,
defense, reconnaissance, patrolling, fire
support, and airmobile operations. No credit
041
MENTORING AND MANAGING
The student serves as a cadet officer in
the ROTC organization and plans and
organizes several major training activities.
Course work includes delegating and con-
trolling, setting objectives, making leadership
assessments, counseling, supervising, and
evaluating. No credit
042
PROFESSIONALISM AND ETHICS
The student serves in a different leader-
ship position and continues to develop and
apply the skills learned in the previous
semester. The course also examines military
officership as a profession and the ethical be-
havior expected of an officer. The course
also also serves to prepare the student for an
initial assignment as an Army lieutenant
No credit.
Music
Associate Professors: Boerckel
(Chairperson), Thayer
Instructor: Janda
Part-time Instructors: Bailey, Clark, Grube,
Lakey, Leidhecker, Lipscomb,
Nacinovich, Russell, Smolensky, Steele,
Truitt, and White
1 he music major is required to take a
balanced program of music theory, history,
applied music and ensemble. A minimum of
eight courses (exclusive of all ensemble,
applied music and instrumental and vocal
methods courses) is required and must
include Music 110, 111, 220, 221, 335, and
336. Each major must participate in an
ensemble (Music 167, 168, and/or 169) and
take one hour of applied music per week for a
minimum of four semesters including the
entire period in which the individual is
registered as a music major (see Music 160-
169). The major must include at least one-
half hour of piano in the applied program
unless a piano proficiency test is requested
and passed. Anyone declaring music as a
second major must do so by the beginning of
the junior year.
Music majors seeking certification in
music education (K-12) must also take
Psychology 110 and 338; Education 200 and
the Professional Semester; Music 261-7, 331,
332, 446 and pass the piano proficiency
examination. Students who wish to obtain
certification in music education should
consult with the department as soon as
possible, preferably before scheduling classes
for the freshman year.
The Music Department recommends that
non-majors select courses from the following
list to meet distribution requirements: Music
116, 117; Music 128; Music 113 or Music
224 in combination with 116, 117, or 128.
Student recitals offer opportunities to gain
experience in public performance. Music
majors and other students qualified in
performance may present formal recitals.
110-111
MUSIC THEORY I AND II
A two- semester course open to all
students. An examination of the fundamental
components and theoretical concepts of
music. The student will develop musician-
ship through application of applied skills.
(Music 110 is prerequisite to Music 111).
113
MUSIC OF TODAY
Non-technical survey of styles, techniques
and contents of music produced since 1950,
with emphasis on developments in electronic
music. Leading figures of major contempo-
rary movements in music, literature and the
visual arts and their works will be presented
and discussed in relation to musical culture.
iffik.
The course will include some practical
exposure to the electronic music studio and
recording techniques.
116
INTRODUCTION TO MUSIC
A basic course in the materials and
techniques of music. Examples drawn from
various periods and styles are designed to
enhance perception and appreciation through
careful and informed listening.
117
SURVEY OF WESTERN MUSIC
A chronological survey of music in
Western civilization from Middle Ages to the
present. Composers and musical styles are
considered in the context of the broader
culture of each major era.
128
AMERICAN MUSIC
An introductory survey of all types of
American music from pre-Revolutionary
days to the present. Categories to be covered
are folk music of different origins, the
development of show music into Broadway
musicals, serious concert music for large and
small ensembles, jazz and various popular
musics from "Tin Pan Alley" to Rock to New
Wave. Alternate years.
135-136
INTRODUCTION TO DANCE I AND II
An introduction to the techniques of basic
movement and interpretation in ballet, jazz,
and modem dance. Classes include improvi-
sation and choreography. Prerequisite for
Music 136: Music 135 or consent of instruc-
tor. One-half unit of credit each. Not open
to students who have received credit for
Theatre 135-136 or Theatre 235-236.
137
fflSTORY OF THE DANCE I
A survey of classical ballet from the
Ballets de cour of 17th century France to the
present with emphasis on the contributions of
Petipa, Fokien, Cecchetti, and Balanchine.
One-half unit of credit. Not open to students
who have received credit for Theatre 137
or 138.
138
HISTORY OF THE DANCE II
A survey of the forms of dance, excluding
classical ballet, as independent works of art
and as they have reflected the history of
civilization from primitive times to the
present. Prerequisite: Music 137 or consent
of instructor. One-half unit of credit. Not
open to students who have received credit for
Theatre 137 or 138.
220-221
MUSIC THEORY III AND IV
A continuation of the integrated theory
coiu"se moving toward newer uses of music
materials. Prerequisite: Music 111.
224
ELECTRONIC MUSIC I
A non-technical introduction to electronic
music and MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital
Interface) for the major and non-major alike.
The course traces the development of MIDI
from its origin to present-day digital
synthesizers in combination with sequencing
computers.
225
ELECTRONIC MUSIC II
Further consideration of recording
techniques. Use of microphones, multi-track
recording, mixing, special effects devices and
synchronization will be introduced. Students
will take part in live recording of concerts
and rehearsals of a variety of ensembles.
Student projects will include complete
recording sessions and the production of
electronic music compositions utilizing
classical studio techniques and real-time
networks. Prerequisite: Music 224 or
consent of instructor. Alternate years.
235-236
INTERMEDIATE DANCE I AND II
Studies of the techniques of basic move-
ment and interpretation in ballet, jazz and
modern dance at the intermediate level.
Classes include improvisation and choreogra-
phy. Prerequisite for Music 235: Music 136
or consent of instructor. Prerequisite for
Music 236: Music 235 or consent of instruc-
tor. One-half unit of credit each. Not open
to students who have received credit for
Theatre 135-136 or Theatre 235-236.
330
COMPOSITION I
Creative writing in smaller vocal and
instrumental forms. Students identify and
use the techniques employed by major
composers of the 20th century. Prerequisite:
Music 111 or consent of instructor.
331
CONDUCTING
A study of the fundamentals of conducting
with frequent opportunity for practical
experience. The College music organizations
serve to make performance experience
possible. Prerequisite: Music 110-111 or
consent of instructor. Alternate years.
332
TEACHING MUSIC IN THE SCHOOLS
Methods and materials of teaching music
in the schools with emphasis on curriculum
development and procedures for choral and
instrumental ensembles at the elementary and
secondary levels. Course work will include
observation of music classes in elementary
and secondary schools in the greater Wil-
liam sport area. Alternate years.
335
HISTORY OF WESTERN MUSIC I
The development of musical styles and
forms from Gregorian chant through Mozart,
including composers from the medieval.
Renaissance, baroque and early classical,
romantic and modem eras.
336
HISTORY OF WESTERN MUSIC II
The development of musical styles and
forms from Beethoven to the present, includ-
ing composers from the late classical,
romantic and modem eras.
339
ORCHESTRATION
A study of modem orchestral instmments
and examination of their use by the great
masters with practical problems in instmmen-
tation. the College Music Organizations
serve to make performance experience
possible. Prerequisite: Music 110-111 or
consent of instructor. Alternate years.
440
COMPOSITION II
Creative writing in larger vocal and
instrumental forms, students write more
extended works in order to develop and
individual style of composition. Prerequi-
site: Music 330 or consent of instructor.
442
PROJECTS IN ELECTRONIC MUSIC
Digital techniques of Electronic Music
production. Notation systems for electronic
music. Aesthetics of electronic music.
Students will use the full resources of the
studio to complete original compositions and
will study, prepare and present works by
major composers of electronic music.
Prerequisite: Music 225 or consent of
instructor.
445
SPECIAL TOPICS IN MUSIC
The intensive study of a selected area of
music literature, designed to develop research
techniques in music. The topic is announced
at the Spring pre-registration. Sample topics
include: Beethoven, Impressionism, Vienna
1900-1914. Prerequisite: Music 116, 117 or
221 or consent of instructor.
446
RECITAL
The preparation and presentation of a full-
length public recital, normally during the
student's senior year. Prerequisite:
Approval by the department. May be
repeated for credit.
470-479
INTERNSHIP (See index)
N80-N89
INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index)
490-491
INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index)
Applied Music and
Ensemble
1 he study of performance in piano,
harpsichord, voice, organ, strings, guitar,
brass, woodwinds, and percussion is designed
to develop sound technique and a knowledge
of the appropriate literature for the instru-
ment. Student recitals offer opportunities to
gain experience in public performance.
Credit for applied music courses (private
lessons) and ensemble (choir, orchestra and
band) is earned on a fractional basis. One
half-hour lesson per week earns one-half hour
credit. Ensemble credit totals one-half hour
credit if student enrolls for one or two
ensembles (for more information, see course
descriptions below). When scheduling please
note that an applied course or ensemble
should not be substituted for an academic
course, but should be taken in addition to the
normal four academic courses.
Extra fees apply for private lessons
(Music 160-166) as follows: $150 per
semester for a half-hour lesson per week.
$300 per semester for a half-hour lesson per
week. Private lessons are given for 13
weeks. 160 Piano or Harpsichord, 161
Voice, 162 Strings or Guitar, 163 Organ, 164
Brass, 165 Woodwinds, 166 Percussion.
167
ORCHESTRAL ENSEMBLE
The Williamsport Symphony Orchestra
allows students with significant instrumental
experience to become members of this
regional ensemble. Participation in the
W.S.O. is contingent upon audition and the
availabiUty of openings. Students are
allowed a maximum of one hour of Ensemble
credit per semester. A student who is
enrolled in orchestra only should register for
Music 167B (one hour credit). A student
may belong to two ensembles, choosing
either Choir or Concert Band as the second
group. Such a student will then register for
Music 167 A (1/2 hour credit) or Music 169A
(1/2 hour credit).
168
CHORAL ENSEMBLE (CHOIR)
Participation in the College choir is
designed to enable any student possessing at
least average talent an opportunity to study
choral technique. Emphasis is placed upon
acquaintance with choral literature, tone
production, diction, and phrasing. Students
are allowed a maximum of one hour of
Ensemble credit per semester. A student who
is enrolled in Choir only should register for
Music 168B (one hour credit). A student
may belong to two ensembles, choosing
either Orchestra or Concert Band as the
second group. Such a student will then
register for Music 168 A (1/2 hour credit) plus
either Music 167 A (1/2 hour credit) or Music
169A (1/2 hour credit). If a student has audi-
tioned and been selected for the twenty voice
Chamber Choir (no credit available), he/she
should register for Music 168C.
169
CONCERT BAND
The College Concert Band allows students
with some instrumental experience to become
acquainted with good band literature and
develop personal musicianship through
participation in group instrumental activity.
Students are allowed a maximum of one hour
of Ensemble credit per semester. A student
who is enrolled in Band only should register
for Music 169B (one hour credit). A student
may belong to two ensembles, choosing
either Orchestra or Choir as the second
group. Such a student will then register for
Music 169A (1/2 hour credit) or Music 168A
(1/2 hour credit).
INSTRUMENTAL AND
VOCAL METHODS
Instrumental and vocal methods classes
are designed to provide students seeking
certification in music education with a basic
understanding of all standard band and
orchestral instruments as well as a familiarity
with fundamental techniques of singing.
Music 261: Brass Methods (one hour credit)
Music 262: Percussion Methods
(one hour credit)
Music 263 , 264 : S tring Methods I and II
(one hour credit each)
Music 265: Vocal Methods (one hour credit)
Music 266,267: Woodwind Methods I and II
(one hour credit)
Near East Culture
and Archaeology
Professor: Guerra (Coordinator)
1 he Near East culture and archaeology
interdisciplinary major is designed to
acquaint students with the "cradle of Western
civilization," both in its ancient and modem
aspects. Majors will complete a minimum of
eight to ten courses related to the Near East.
Required courses are described in their
departmental sections and include:
1. Four courses in language and culture from:
History and Culture of the Ancient
Near East (Religion 228)
History of Art (Art 222)
Ancient History (History 210)
Old Testament Faith and History (Religion
113)
Judaism and Islam (Religion 224)
Two semesters of foreign language
(Hebrew 101-102, or Greek 101-102)
2. Two courses in archaeology from:
Biblical Archaeology (Religion 226)
Special Archaeology courses, such as
independent studies or in May or summer
terms in the Near East.
3. Two courses in the cooperating depart-
ments (art, history, political science, religion
and sociology-anthropology) or related
departments. These two courses, usually
taken in the junior or senior years, can be
independent study. Topics should be related
either to the ancient or the modern Near East
and must be approved in advance by the
committee supervising the interdisciplinary
program. The study of modem Arabic or
Hebrew is encouraged.
Other courses may be suggested by the
supervisory committee within the limits of a
10-course major. The number of courses
taken within this program applicable toward
fulfilling the College distribution require-
ments will vary according to the selection of
courses.
iffiw
Nursing
Associate Professor: Parrish (Chairperson),
Pagana
Assistant Professors: Fulton, Ficca
Instructors: Gray-Vickrey, Dill
Visiting Instructor: Moore
Part-time Instructors: Bird, Ingram,
McKeegan, Potter
•Students wishing to major in nursing will
be admitted to the College under the usual
admission procedures. Freshmen should
follow the nursing curriculum plan for the
freshman year in the sequence designated.
To be considered for continuation in nursing,
a minimum G.P. A. of 2.5 is required at
completion of the freshman year. A supple-
mentary application should be submitted to
the Department of Nursing by January 30 of
the freshman year.
Registered Nurses
1 he Department of Nursing offers an
alternative curriculum for registered nurses
within the existing BSN program. The goals
of this alternative curriculum are to provide
registered nurses with the opportunity to earn
an educationally sound BSN degree while
completing the degree requirements in as
short a time period as possible, and to meet
the unique needs of registered nurses.
Nursing 300 and 310 are open only to
registered nurses and are required as part of
the alternative curriculum. Registered nurses
may challenge for credit the following
nursing courses: Nursing 220, the skills
component of Nursing 221, the obstetrical
component of Nursing 330, 331, 332, 333,
334, and 440. For successful challenge of
any clinical nursing course by registered
nurses, a grade of C- or better is required;
that is, 70% or 1.67 is required in both the
theoretical and clinical components of the
course.
In addition, registered nurses in this
program may challenge for credit any
required nonnursing course provided that
they obtain the permission of both the
Deparmient of Nursing and the department in
which that course is offered. These examina-
tions may not be available for every required
course.
Additional information for registered
nurses seeking the BSN is available from the
Department of Nursing. Individual advise-
ment is offered to all registered nurses.
Clinical Learning Resources
In addition to the College's new well-
equipped Nursing Skills Lab, opportunity for
self-learning is provided in the adjacent
Learning Center which is equipped with
electronic study carrels and audio-visual
materials.
A wide variety of health-care agencies in
the surrounding area are utilized for clinical
experiences. Cooperating hospitals and
agencies include: Divine Providence Hospi-
tal, Williamsport Hospital and Medical
Center, Evangelical Hospital, Geisinger
Medical Center, Leader Nursing Home and
Rehabilitation Center, Danville State Hospi-
tal, Pennsylvania Department of Health,
Regional Home Health Services, Rose View
Manor and The Williamsport Home.
Expenses of the
Nursing Program
iStudents are responsible for their own
transportation to assigned clinical areas. The
student of nursing assumes all financial
obligations listed in the section on fees in
this bulletin including a $40 lab fee for each
of the clinical nursing courses (Nursing 221,
310, 330, 331, 332, 333, 440 and 441).
Additional expenses include uniforms,
name pin, watch with second hand, bandage
scissors, stethoscope, blood pressure cuff,
liability insurance, annual heath examina-
tions, and standardized achievement tests.
Students must also maintain annual Health
Provider CPR certification as offered by the
American Heart Association or American
Red Cross.
Major in Nursing
1 he major in nursing consists of:
Nursing 220, 221, 330, 331, 332, 333, 334,
336, 435, 440, 441, 442, and nursing elective
(420, 422, 430 or 443) or N80-N89. In
addition, the following are prerequisites for
specific nursing courses: Chemistry 108,
115; Biology 113-114, 226; Psychology 110,
117; Mathematics 103, and Computer
Science elective CPTR 108, 125, or Math
214. The religion/philosophy distribution
requirement is met by the required courses:
Philosophy 219 and Religion 120. The
history/social science distribution require-
ment is met by the required courses: Psy-
chology 110 and 117. In addition, the
student is required to take one course from
among Sociology/ Anthropology 110, 114,
220, 222, 224, 227, 228, 229, 331, 334, and
335. The fine arts/foreign language distribu-
tion requirement can be met by two courses
in one department from among art, literature,
music, or theatre; or by two courses in
foreign language on the intermediate or
higher course level.
School Nurse Certification
1 he Department of Nursing, in collabo-
ration with the Department of Education,
offers an additional curriculum for the
Registered Nurse with a Bachelors degree (or
a Lycoming College nursing student) who
wishes to be certified as a school nurse. The
goal of this program is to provide the RN
with a Bachelors degree an opportunity
for career mobility. Courses required for
completion of the certification program
consist of: Education 200 and 239, Philoso-
phy 217, Psychology 338, and Nursing 420,
422, 430, and 431. In addition, the following
are prerequisites for specific courses: Psy-
chology 110 and 117, Sociology****, and
Nurs 220.
Additional information for registered
nurses seeking School Nurse Certification is
available from the Department of Nursing.
Individualized advisement is offered to all
prospective School Nurse candidates.
Policies Specific to Nursing
In addition to the Lycoming College
continuance policies, the following policies
are specific to all declared majors in the
Department of Nursing:
1. A grade of C- or better is required in all
clinical nursing courses to continue in the
nursing program. These courses are Nursing
221, 310, 330, 331, 332, 333, 440 and 441.
Students who earn a grade of less than 70
percent or 1 .67 in either the theoretical or
clinical component of a nursing course will
be required to repeat both components of the
course before being permitted to continue in
the nursing sequence.
2. Policies regarding absence from classes or
from the clinical portion of nursing courses
are determined by the instructor(s) respon-
sible for the course. No absence from the
clinical portion of the course will be excused
other than for illness or family emergency.
In individual cases, student may make
arrangements with instructors to be excused
for extracurricular activities. Excessive
absence for any reason will necessitate
repeating the entire course.
Typical Plan of Study for B.S.N.
FRESHMAN YEAR
Fall
Chem. 108* (Inorganic Chemistry) 1
Eng. 106 (Composition) 1
Psych. 1 10*(Intro to Psych.) 1
Fine ArtsA-ang 1
Physical Education 0
4
Spring
Chem. 115*(Brief Organic Chemistry) 1
Eng. Elective 1
Psych. 117*(Developmental Psych.) 1
Fine ArtsA-ang 1
Physical Education 0
4
SOPHOMORE YEAR
Fall
Bio. 113 (Anatomy and Physiology) 1
Computer Science Elective**
Nur. 220 (Concepts of Nutrition in
Family Health) 0.75
Rel. 120 (Death and Dying) 1
3.75
Spring
Bio. 1 14 (Anatomy and Physiology) 1
Math 103 (Intro, to Statistics) 1
Bio. 226 (Microbiology for Health
Sciences) 1
Nur. 221 (Foundations of Professional
Practice) 1.25
4.25
JUNIOR YEAR
Fall
Nur. 330 (Nursing Care of the
Developing Family I) 1.5
Nur. 332 (Nursing Care of the
Adult I) 1.5
Nur. 334 (Basic Concepts of
Pharmacology and
Therapeutics) 1
4
Spring
Nur. 331 (Nursing Care of the
Developing Family II) 1.5
Nur. 333 (Nursing Care of the
Adult II) 1.5
3
May Term
Nur. 336 (The Nurse in the Social
System) 1
SENIOR YEAR
Fall
Nur. 435 (Nursing Research) 1
Nur. 440 (Nursing Care of the
Emotionally Troubled
Individual & Family) 1.5
Nursing Elective*** 0.5
Guided Elective**** 1
4
Spring
Nur. 441 (Comprehensive Nursing Care). .1.5
Nur. 442 (Professional Issues) 0.5
Phil. 219 (Ethical Issues in Biology
and Medicine) 1
Elective 1
4
♦Prerequisite to Sophomore year.
**Student must select one course from CPTR 108, 125
or Math 214.
***Student must select one course from NUR 420, 422,
430. 443. or N80-89.
****Student must select one course from Soc. 1 10. 1 14,
220. 222. 224. 227. 228. 229, 331, 334, or 335. Other
courses may be approved on an individual basis.
Requirement for Graduation 32 Units (128
Credits). The student may take additional
units for electives, independent study and/or
honors.
iroi
220
CONCEPTS OF NUTRITION
IN FAMILY HEALTH
Essentials of normal nutrition and their
relationship to the health of individuals and
families. These concepts serve as a basis for
the development of an understanding of
therapeutic application of dietary principles
and the health professional's role and respon-
sibility in this facet of client care. Three
hours of lecture. 314 unit. Prerequisites:
Chemistry 108, 115, or consent of instructor.
Open to non-nursing majors.
221
FOUNDATIONS OF PROFESSIONAL
NURSING PRACTICE
Introduction of major theoretical elements
underlying professional nursing practice.
Focus on the concept of health and common
health problems recognizing the multi-
directional influence of the individual,
family, and environment. In this first clinical
course the student will utilize the nursing
process in assisting clients to attain a maxi-
mum level of functioning. Three house of
lecture and five hours clinical laboratory.
11/4 units. Prerequisites: Chemistry 108,
115, Nursing 220, and Biology 113. Open to
nursing majors only.
300
THEORETICAL FOUNDATIONS
OF PROFESSIONAL NURSING
Theoretical concepts underlying profes-
sional practice. Additional focus on health
and common health problems, recognition of
multi-directional influence of the individual,
family, and environment. Two hour seminar.
112 unit. Prerequisites: Successful comple-
tion of Nursing 221 challenge examination;
Chem 108. 115; Psych 110, 117; Bio 113.
OPEN TO RNs ONLY.
310
PROCESSES ESSENTIAL
TO NURSING PRACTICE
Clinical course focusing on the incorpora-
tion of nursing, group, interpersonal, and
change processes; therapeutic communica-
tion, family, health promotion and commu-
nity concepts, physical assessment, collabora-
tion, and teaching/learning principles in the
community setting. 3/4 unit. Prerequisites:
Successful completion of Nursing 330 and
Nursing 332 challenge exams, Bio 114, and
Bio 226. OPEN TO RNs ONLY.
330-331
NURSING CARE OF THE
DEVELOPING FAMILY
Examination of health and nursing needs
of beginning and developing families. Initial
emphasis on nursing needs of mothers and
infants within the family unit as well as the
common health problems of children through
adolescence. Subsequent emphasis on
nursing needs of children and mothers with
health problems of acute and long term
nature, the influence of illness on their
development and the effect of illness on the
family configuration. Three hours of lecture
and 7 1/2 hours clinical laboratory. 1 1/2
units. Prerequisite for Nursing 330: Nursing
221 , Biology 114, 226. Prerequisite for
Nursing 331: Nursing 330 and 334.
332-333
NURSING CARE OF THE ADULT
Identification of adult health care needs
and implementation of nursing activities
based on an understanding of growth and
development, pathophysiology, communica-
tion skills, interpersonal dynamics, and
psychosocial interventions. Three hours of
lecture and 71/2 hours clinical laboratory.
1 1/2 units. Prerequisite for Nursing 332:
Nursing 221, Biology 114 and 226. Corequi-
site: Nursing 334. Prerequisite for Nursing
333: Nursing 332 and 334.
334
BASIC CONCEPTS OF PHARMACOLOGY
AND THERAPEUTICS
Fundamentals of pharmacology and thera-
peutics are presented for the various classes
of drugs. Relationships of pharmacological
mechanisms to the affected biochemical and
physiological processes. Interactions and
toxicological aspects of drug therapy are
reviewed. Four hours of lecture. 1 unit.
Corequisite: Nursing 330, 332, or consent of
instructor. Open to non-nursing majors.
336
THE NURSE IN THE SOCIAL SYSTEM
Seminar discussions and clinical labora-
tory using the hospital as a prototype.
Theories of social systems. Examination of
induction into the hospital system. Evalu-
ation of standards of care. Focus on utiliza-
tion of change theory. Twelve hours of
lecture and 96 hours of clinical laboratory.
1 unit. Prerequisites: Nursing 331,333,
334. Required for the nursing major and
offered only in May term.
420
HEALTH ASSESSMENT
Identification and examination of methods
for collecting and categorizing accurate data
necessary for professional care. Emphasis is
placed on the individual throughout the life
span with identification of clinical and
behavioral findings appropriate to each age
group. Two hours of lecture for 112 unit.
Two hours of lecture and a 5 hour clinical
laboratory for 1 unit. Prerequisites: Senior
standing or consent of instructor.
All
HEALTH EDUCATION
Examination of learning theories appro-
priate to all age groups. Discussion of the
concepts and techniques necessary for
assessment, planning, implementation and
evaluation of the teaching/learning process.
Emphasis will be placed on self-care. Two-
hour lecture for 112 unit. Two-hour lecture
and a 5 hour clinical laboratory for 1 unit.
School Nurse candidates must take the one-
unit course. Prerequisite: Senior standing
or consent of instructor.
430
COMMUNITY HEALTH NURSING
Overview of the role of the community
health nurse in a variety of settings, e.g.,
industries, state health clinics, MHMR,
school systems. Discussion of wellness
promotion, availability of community
resources, environmental health, prevention
and treatment of communicable diseases, and
group process with emphasis on communica-
tion skills. Two hour lecture for 112 unit.
Two hour lecture and a 5 hour clinical
laboratory for 1 unit. School Nurse candi-
dates must take the equivalent of one unit
course. Prerequisite: Senior standing or
consent of the instructor.
431
SCHOOL NURSE PRACTICUM
Essentials of school health, school nursing
and health promotion. These concepts serve
as a basis for the development of an under-
standing of the role of the school with the
opportunity to function in the role of the
school nurse. It is a course built on the
culmination of knowledge obtained in
previous nursing courses and nursing experi-
ences. 210 hours clinical and seminar. 1 1/2
unit. Prerequisite: OPEN TO SCHOOL
NURSE CANDIDATES who have met all
other requirements for certification and have
obtained departmental approval.
435
RESEARCH IN NURSING
Expansion of theoretical basis of research
methodology with emphasis on analyzing,
criticizing, and interpreting nursing research.
Development of a research proposal focusing
on a nursing problem. Four hours of lecture.
1 unit. Prerequisite: Mathematics 103,
Computer Science elective, and Nursing
330 and 332 or consent of instructor. Open
to non-nursing majors.
440
NURSING CARE OF THE
EMOTIONALLY TROUBLED
INDIVIDUAL AND FAMILY
Examination of disturbed human relation-
ships with focus on intrapsychic, interper-
sonal, and physiologic etiology. Emphasis on
A
advanced therapeutic nurse-patient relation-
ships within context of family, community,
and health care systems. Three hours of
lecture and 7 112 hours clinical laboratory.
1 1/2 hours clinical laboratory. 1 1/2 units.
Prerequisite: Nursing 331, 333, 336.
441
COMPREHENSIVE NURSING CARE
Culminating nursing course with focus on
leadership and management skills in a choice
of clinical settings. Seminars provide
opportunities for students to share common-
alities and unique aspects of professional
practice. Three hours of lecture and 71/2
hours of clinical laboratory. 1 1/2 units.
Prerequisite: Nursing 336, 440.
442
PROFESSIONAL ISSUES
An analysis of nursing issues in the
context of the historical background of the
profession, the social forces which influence
nursing, and nursing's impact upon society.
Two-hour seminar. 1/2 unit. Prerequisite:
Senior standing or consent of instructor.
443
TOPICS IN NURSING
Selected topic courses in nursing designed
to permit students to pursue subjects which,
because of their specialized nature, may not
be offered on a regular basis. 1/2 unit.
Prerequisite: Senior standing or consent of
instructor.
N80-N89
INDEPENDENT STUDY IN NURSING
An opportunity to develop and implement
an individual plan of study under faculty
guidance. 1/2 unit. Prerequisite: Senior
standing or consent of chairperson.
490-491
INDEPENDENT STUDIES FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index)
Philosophy
Associate Professors: Griffith, Whelan
Assistant Professor: Herring (Chairperson)
1 he study of philosophy develops a
critical understanding of the basic concepts
and presuppositions around which we
organize our thought in science, religion,
education, morality, the arts, and other
human enterprises.
A major in philosophy, together with
appropriate other courses, can provide an
excellent preparation for policy-making
positions of many kinds, for graduate study in
several fields, and for careers in education,
law, and the ministry. The major in philoso-
phy consists of eight courses numbered 110
or above, including 438, 439, 449 and at least
three other courses numbered 225 or above.
mk.
A minor in Philosophy consists of any
four philosophy courses numbered 220 or
above; or any five philosophy courses
numbered 1 10 or above, three of which must
be numbered 300 or above. Three more
specialized minors are also available: a
minor in Philosophy and Law consists of four
courses from Philosophy 224, 225, 334, 335,
449 or Independent Studies or five courses
including any three courses from the preced-
ing hst and any two courses from Philosophy
115, 216, 218, 219; a minor in Philosophy
and Science consists of four courses from
Philosophy 223, 225, 331, 333, 449 or
Independent Studies; a minor in the History
of Philosophy consists of four courses from
Philosophy 223, 224, 438, 439, 449 or
Independent Studies. Since topics in Philoso-
phy 449 and independent studies projects
vary, these courses may be used to count
toward a specialized minor only if they are
approved in advance by the department.
105
PRACTICAL REASONING
A general introduction to topics in logic
and their application to practical reasoning,
with primary emphasis on detecting fallacies,
evaluating inductive reasoning, and under-
standing the rudiments of scientific method.
110
INTRODUCTION TO
PHILOSOPfflCAL PROBLEMS
An introductory course designed to show
the nature of philosophy by examination of
several examples of problems which have
received extended attention in philosophical
literature. These topics often include the
relation of the mind to the body, the possibil-
ity of human freedom, arguments about the
existence of God, the conditions of knowl-
edge, and the relation of language to thought.
Some attention is also given to the principles
of acceptable reasoning.
114
PHILOSOPHY AND PERSONAL CHOICE
An introductory philosophical examina-
tion of a number of contemporary moral
issues which call for personal decision.
Topics often investigated include: the
"good" life, obligation to others, sexual
ethics, abortion, suicide and death, violence
and pacifism, obedience to the law, the
relevance of personal beliefs to morality.
Discussion centers on some of the sugges-
tions philosophers have made about how to
make such decisions.
115
PHILOSOPHY AND PUBLIC POLICY
An introductory philosophical examina-
tion of the moral and conceptual dimension
of various contemporary public issues, such
as the relation of ethics to politics and the
law, the enforcement of morals, the problems
of fair distribution of goods and opportuni-
ties, the legitimacy of restricting the use of
natural resources, and the application of
ethics to business practice. Discussion
centers on some of the suggestions philoso-
phers have made about how to deal with
these issues.
117
PHILOSOPHY AND
SUPERNATURAL PHENOMENA
A critical examination of the philosophi-
cal issues raised by near death and out of
body experiences, ESP, time travel, reports of
ghosts and spirits, astrology, prophecy,
demon possession, faith healing, miracles,
psychokinesis, and the like. Offered May and
Summer terms only.
216
ETHICAL ISSUES IN BUSINESS
An introductory philosophical examina-
tion of a variety of moral problems that arise
concerning the American business system.
Included are a systematic consideration of
typical moral problems faced by individuals
^Bck
and an examination of common moral criti-
cisms of the business system itself.
217
PHILOSOPHICAL ISSUES
IN EDUCATION
An examination of the basic concepts
involved in thought about education, and a
consideration of the various methods for
justifying educational proposals. Typical of
the issues discussed are: Are education and
indoctrination different? What is a liberal
education? Are education and schooling
compatible? What do we need to learn?
Alternate years.
218
PHILOSOPHICAL ISSUES
IN CRIMINAL JUSTICE
An introductory examination of various
philosophical issues and concepts which are
of special importance in legal contexts.
Discussion includes both general topics, such
as the justification of punishment, and more
specific topics, such as the insanity defense
and the rights of the accused. Readings
are arranged topically and include both
classical and contemporary sources.
219
ETHICAL ISSUES IN
BIOLOGY AND MEDICINE
A philosophical investigation of some of
the ethical issues which arise as a result of
contemporary medical and biological
technology. Typical of these issues are
euthanasia, behavior control, patient rights,
experimentation on humans, fetal research,
abortion, genetic engineering, population
control, and distribution of health resources.
223
HISTORY OF SCIENCE
AND METAPHYSICS
An historical survey of the attempt to
understand the physical universe. Particular
attention is paid to common origins of
philosophy and science in the works of the
ancient Greek philosophers, to the question
of how scientific and philosophical thinking
differs from mythological and technological
thinking, to the rationalism-empiricism
dispute in science and metaphysics, and to
the interaction between philosophy and
science in formulating fundamental questions
about the physical universe and in developing
and criticizing concepts designed to answer
them. Alternate years.
224
HISTORY OF SOCIAL AND
POLITICAL PHILOSOPHY
An historical survey of the most important
social and political philosophers from
Socrates to Marx. Special attention is paid to
the relationship between ethics and politics as
seen by Plato and Aristotle and to the social
contract theories of Hobbes, Locke, and
Rousseau. Alternate years.
225
SYMBOLIC LOGIC
A study of modem symbolic logic and its
application to the analysis of arguments.
Included are truth-functional relations, the
logic of prepositional functions, and deduc-
tive systems. Attention is also given to
various topics in the philosophy of logic.
331
PHILOSOPHY AND HUMAN NATURE
An examination of a variety of classical
and contemporary philosophical questions
about human nature. Among the questions
typically considered are these: Is there such
a thing as human nature? Are human beings
different, in any fundamental way, from other
animals? Are human beings free? Is human
consciousness just a brain process? Are
human beings inherently predisposed to evil?
Are human beings biologically determined to
be selfish or aggressive? Are the differences
in achievement between men and women
A
biologically based? Prerequisite: Students
without previous study in philosophy must
have instructor' s permission.
332
PHILOSOPHY OF RELIGION
A philosophical examination of religion.
Included are such topics as the nature of
religious discourse, arguments for and against
the existence of God, and the relation
between religion and science. Readings from
classical and contemporary soiu^ces. Pre-
requisite: Students without previous study in
philosophy must have instructor' s permission.
Alternate years.
333
PHILOSOPHY OF NATURAL SCIENCE
A consideration of philosophically
important conceptual problems arising from
reflection about natural science, including
such topics as the nature of scientific laws
and theories, the character of explanation, the
import of prediction, the existence of "non-
observable" theoretical entities such as
electrons and genes, the problem of justifying
induction, and various puzzles associated
with probability. Prerequisite: Students
without previous study in philosophy must
have instructor' s permission. Alternate
years.
334
CONTEMPORARY
POLITICAL PHILOSOPHY
A systematic philosophical investigation
of the relation between human nature and the
proper social and political order. Topics
studied include the purpose of government,
the nature of legitimate authority, the
foundation of human rights, and the limits of
human freedom. Emphasis is placed on the
logic of social and political thought and on
the analysis of basic principles and concepts.
Prerequisite: Students without previous
study in philosophy must have instructor's
permission.
335
ETHICAL THEORY
An inquiry concerning the grounds which
distinguish morally right from morally wrong
actions. Central to the course is critical
consideration of the proposals and the
rationales of relativists, egoists, utilitarians,
and other ethical theorists. Various topics in
metaethics are also included. Prerequisite:
Students without previous study in philosophy
must have instructor' s permission.
438
ANCIENT GREEK PHILOSOPHY
A critical examination of the ancient
Greek philosophers, with particular emphasis
on Plato and Aristotle. Prerequisite: Two
courses in philosophy or consent of instruc-
tor. Alternate years.
439
EARLY MODERN PHILOSOPHY
A critical examination of the Continental
Rationalists (Descartes, Spinoza, Leibniz),
the British Empiricists (Locke, Berkeley,
Hume) and Kant. Prerequisite: Two courses
in philosophy or consent of instructor.
Alternate years.
449
DEPARTMENTAL SEMINAR
An investigation carried on by discussions
and papers, into one philosophical problem,
text, philosopher, or movement. A different
topic is selected each semester. Recent
topics include artificial intelligence, the
ethics of research on human subjects, life
after death, personal identity, and human
rights. This seminar is designed to provide
junior and senior philosophy majors and
other qualified students with more than the
usual opportunity for concentrated and
cooperative inquiry. Prerequisite: Consent
of instructor. This seminar may be repeated
for credit.
£s^
470-479
INTERNSHIP (See index)
N80-N89
INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index)
Recent independent studies in philosophy
include Nietzsche, moral education, Rawls'
theory of justice, existentialism, euthanasia,
Plato's ethics, and philosophical aesthetics.
490-491
INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index)
Physics
(See Astronomy/Physics)
Physical
Education
Associate Professor: Burch
Assistant Professor: Whitehill
Instructor: Holmes (Chairperson)
Athletic Training Internship
l^ycoming College established an ap-
prenticeship program in 1979 after recogniz-
ing two conditions: the importance of the
care and prevention of athletic injuries by
trained professionals, and the career's
promising growth potential.
To complete the internship students are
required to take the four courses below as
well as Biology 113 & 114 and Nursing 220.
Students also are required to undergo
practical work under the supervision of
Lycoming's certified athletic trainer. Stu-
dents are officially accepted into the Intern-
ship program after successful completion of
the first year of practical work and Athletic
Training 110.
Students who finish the Internship
program become eligible to participate
in the National Athletic Trainers Association
(N.A.T.A.) Certification examination to earn
the status of an N.A.T.A. certified trainer.
This Internship program also allows the
passing students to qualify for the State
examination to become Class B athletic
trainers under Pennsylvania Act 63
P.S.S1310.1. Students interested in this
program should contact the Physical Educa-
tion Department.
Athletic training classes do not count
toward fulfilling graduation requirements
except as the physical education requirements
of two courses.
110
BASIC ATHLETIC TRAINING
Covers the basics in prevention, evalu-
ation, treatment, and rehabilitation of athletic
iffiw
injuries. Two lectures, one lab per week.
Three credit hours. Prerequisite: CPR
certification and Basic First Aid certification.
215
ANALYSIS OF HUMAN MOVEMENT
Basic concepts of Kinesiology, the study
of human movement, and Biomechanics, the
study of mechanical aspects of human
movement. Three lectures per week, project.
Three credit hours. Prerequisite: Biology
113 & 114.
310
ADVANCED ATHLETIC TRAINING
A more in-depth course in injury evalu-
ation, rehabilitation, and therapeutic modali-
ties. Three lectures per week. Three credit
hours. Prerequisite: A.T. 110.
410
EXERCISE PHYSIOLOGY
The study of the effects of exercise on the
human body. Two lectures and one lab per
week. Three credit hours. Prerequisite:
Instructor approval. Alternate years.
Physical Education
101
PHYSICAL EDUCATION
Coeducational physical education classes.
Basic instructions in fundamentals, knowl-
edge, and appreciation of sports that include
swimming, tennis, volleyball, archery,
soccer, golf, badminton, physical fitness, and
other activities. Backpacking, cross-country
and alpine skiing, jogging, modern dance,
and cycling are offered on a contract basis.
Beginning swimming is required for all non-
swimmers. Students may select any activity
offered. A reasonable degree of proficiency
is required in the activities. Emphasis is on
the potential use of activities as recreational
and leisure-time interests. Two semesters of
physical education (two hours per week) are
required. All physical education classes are
open to men and women.
Political Science
Professors: Giglio (Acting Chairperson),
Roskin (On Leave)
Part-time Instructor: Wolf
1 he major is designed to provide a
systematic understanding of government
and politics at the international, national,
state and local levels. Majors are encouraged
to develop their faculties to make independ-
ent, objective analyses which can be applied
to the broad spectrum of the social sciences.
Although the political science major is not
designed as a vocational major, students with
such training may go directly into govern-
ment service, journalism, teaching, or private
administrative agencies. A political science
major can provide the base for the study of
law, or for graduate studies leading to
administrative work in federal, state, or local
governments, international organizations, or
college teaching. Students seeking certifica-
tion to teach secondary school social studies
A
may major in political science but should
consult their advisors and the education
deparunent
A major consists of eight political science
courses, including PoUtical Science 116.
Prospective majors are encouraged to register
for this course during their freshman year.
An exemption will be granted only if it
strengthens the student's program. In addition
to 1 16, students must take at least one course
in each of five areas (A to E). Students are
encouraged, also, to select a minor in another
department in accordance with their aca-
demic and career interests and in consultation
with their departmental advisor.
For non-majors, the department offers
three minors: a minor in Political Science
consists of any four courses numbered 200 or
above from areas A to E; a minor in Foreign
Ajfairs consists of four courses selected from
Political Science 220, 225, 243, 326, 327,
438 and 439; and a minor in Legal Studies
consists of Political Science 331, 335, 436
and one other course numbered 200 or above.
Students are encouraged to consult with
department members on the selection of a
minor.
116
INTRODUCTION TO POLITICS
An introductory course in political science
that asks how and why people form political
communities, what holds them together, and
how political systems may either improve or
damage themselves. Includes comparison of
the U.S. with other countries and discussion
of current political and public-poUcy issues.
A. American Politics
110
GOVERNMENT AND POLITICS
IN THE UNITED STATES
An introduction to American national
government which emphasizes both struc-
tural-functional analysis and policy-making
processes. In addition to the legislative,
executive, and judicial branches of govern-
ment, attention will be given to political
parties and interest groups, elections and
voting behavior, and constitutional rights.
Recommended to all social science-education
majors and to those students who have had
inadequate or insufficient preparation in
American government.
HI
STATE AND LOCAL GOVERNMENT
An examination of the general principles,
major problems, and political processes of
the states and their subdivisions, together
with their role in a federal type of
government.
223
AMERICAN PRESIDENCY
A study of the office and powers of the
president with analysis of his major roles as
chief administrator, legislator, political
leader, foreign policy maker, and com-
mander-in-chief. Special attention is given to
those presidents who led the nation boldly.
Subject to student demand, but offered
at least once during a four-year cycle.
B. Legal Studies
331
CIVIL RIGHTS AND LIBERTIES
What are our rights and liberties as
Americans? What should they be? A frank
discussion of the nature and scope of the
constitutional guarantees. First Amendment
rights, the rights of criminal suspects and
defendants, racial and sexual equaUty, and
equal protection of the laws. Students will
read and brief the more important Supreme
Court decisions. Prerequisite: Junior or
senior standing or consent of instructor.
335
LAW AND SOCIETY
An examination of the nature, sources,
functions, and limits of law as an instrument
of political and social control. Included for
discussion are legal problems pertaining to
the family, crime, deviant behavior, poverty,
A
and minority groups. Prerequisite: Junior or
senior standing or consent of instructor.
436
MASS MEDIA LAW AND REGULATION
An examination of the legal structure and
the system by which mass communication is
controlled in this society. The forces which
shape, influence, and make policy will be
considered. Cross-listed as Mass Communi-
cation 331. Prerequisite: Junior or senior
standing or consent of instructor.
C. Applied Politics
244
THE POLITICAL FILM
The great and enduring political questions
presented in fiction movies, for classroom
discussion and papers. Course draws from a
library of cinema classics on videotape to
probe political arrangements, power relation-
ships, and the legal process. Alternate years.
333
BUREAUCRACY AND PUBLIC
ADMINISTRATION
What is bureaucracy? Why and how do
bureaucracies arise? What has been the
political impact of growth of bureaucracy in
government? These questions, among others,
will be considered in this examination of
pubUc bureaucracies. This course is highly
recommended to students planning to take an
internship in city or county government
through the political science department.
Subject to student demand, but offered at
least once during a four-year cycle.
347
WOMEN AND POLITICS
The historical, philosophical, and
practical context and conduct of women in a
variety of political roles. This course
considers both elective and nonelective
activities, and includes analyses of women's
issues currently on legislative and court
agendas. Alternate years.
448
PUBLIC OPINION AND POLLING
A course dealing with the general topic
and methodology of polling. Content
includes exploration of the processes by
which people's political opinions are formed,
the manipulation of public opinion through
the uses of propaganda, and the American
response to politics and poUtical issues.
D. Comparative Politics
220
EUROPEAN POLITICS
A study of the political systems of Europe
with emphasis on comparison and patterns of
government. The course will review politics
in Britain, France, West Germany, the Soviet
Union, and other countries and attempt to
find underlying similarities and differences.
326
POLITICAL CULTURES
An exploration of the "people" aspects of
political life in several countries. The way
people interact with each other and with
government, what they expect from the
system, how they acquire their political
attitudes and styles, and how these contribute
to the type of government. Alternate years.
438
POLITICS OF DEVELOPING AREAS
The causes and possible cures for socio-
political backwardness in Asia, Africa, and
Latin America. Alternate years.
E. International Relations
225
WORLD POLITICS
Why is there war? An introduction to
international relations with emphasis on the
varieties of conflicts which may grow
into war.
VH^
243
THE VIETNAM WAR
The background and context of the war,
how the United States got involved, the
military lessons, and the war's impact on
U.S. society, politics, and economy. Alter-
nate years.
327
CRISIS AREAS IN WORLD POLITICS
The study of several current areas of
international tension and conflict, including
relations among the United States, Soviet
Union, and China, plus the Middle East and
whatever new danger spots arise over time.
Alternate years.
439
AMERICAN FOREIGN POLICY
The U.S. role in the world in geographic,
strategic, historical, and ideological perspec-
tives, plus an examination of the domestic
forces shaping U.S. policy. Alternate years.
F. Special Programs
470-479
INTERNSHIPS (See index)
Students may receive academic credit for
serving as interns in structured learning
situations with a wide variety of public and
private agencies and organizations. Students
have served as interns with the Public
Defender's Office, the Lycoming County
Court Administrator, and the Williamsport
City government.
N80-N89
INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index)
Current studies relate to elections — local,
state, and federal — while past studies have
included Soviet and world politics.
490-491
INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index)
Psychology
Professor: Hancock
Associate Professors: Berthold
(Chairperson), Ryan
Assistant Professor: Balleweg
Part-time Instructors: Dowell, Haddon
1 he major provides training in both
theoretical and applied psychology. It is
designed to meet the needs of students
seeking careers in psychology or other
natural or social sciences. It also meets the
needs of students seeking a better understand-
ing of human behavior as a means of further-
ing individual and career goals in other areas.
Psychology majors and others are urged to
discuss course selections in psychology with
members of the department to help insure
appropriate course selection.
A major consists of 32 semester hours in
psychology, including Psychology 1 10, 336,
431, and 432. Statistics also is required.
A minor in Psychology consists of 20
semester hours in psychology including
Psychology 110 and four other psychology
courses (three of which must be numbered
200 or above) which must be approved by the
deparunent.
101
TOPICS
Exploration of a specific basic or applied
topic in psychology. Different topics will be
explored different semesters. Potential topics
include the psychology of disasters, applied
behavioral psychology, and organizational
psychology. The course is open to elemen-
tary and advanced undergraduates. No Pre-
requisites. One-half unit of credit. Maybe
repeated once for credit with departmental
permission. May not be used to satisfy
distribution or major requirements.
110
INTRODUCTORY PSYCHOLOGY
An introduction to the empirical study of
human and other animal behavior. Areas
considered may include: learning, personal-
ity, social, physiological, sensory, cognition,
and developmental.
112
GROUP PROCESSES AND
INTERPERSONAL COMMUNICATION
An introduction to research and theories
on small group formation, structure, and
performance. Topics include group commu-
nication, conformity, leadership, conflict, and
decision-making. Emphasis will be placed
upon applying principles of group dynamics
to different types of groups. Prerequisite:
Psychology 110 or consent of instructor.
May term only.
116
ABNORMAL PSYCHOLOGY
An introduction to the patterns of deviant
behavior with emphasis on cause, function,
and treatment. The various models for the
conceptualization of abnormal behavior
are critically examined. Prerequisite:
Psychology 110.
117
DEVELOPMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY
A study of the basic principles of human
growth and development throughout the life
span. Prerequisite: Psychology 110.
JmL
118
ADOLESCENT PSYCHOLOGY
The study areas will include theories of
adolescence; current issues raised by as well
as about the "generation of youth"; research
findings bearing on theories and issues of
growth beyond childhood, and self-
exploration. Prerequisite: Psychology 110.
224
SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY
The scientific exploration of interpersonal
communication and behavior. Topics include
attitudes and attitude change, attraction and
communication, social perception and social
influence, prosocial and antisocial behavior
and group processes. Prerequisites:
Psychology 110.
225
INDUSTRIAL AND
ORGANIZATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY
The application of the principles and
methods of psychology to selected industrial
and organizational situations. Prerequisite:
Psychology 110 or consent of instructor.
239
BEHAVIOR MODinCATION
A detailed examination of the applied
analysis of behavior. Focus will be on the
application of experimental method to the
individual clinical case. The course will
cover targeting behavior, base-rating,
intervention strategies, and outcome evalu-
ation. Learning-based modification tech-
niques such as contingency management,
counter-conditioning, extinction, discrimina-
tion training, aversive conditioning, and
negative practice will be examined. Pre-
requisite: Psychology 110 or consent of
instructor.
240
PSYCHOLOGY OF ADULT
PERSONAL ADJUSTMENT
A study of psychological theories and
research on coping with normal developmen-
tal changes and common problems of adult-
hood. Focus will be upon adult transitions,
stress management, intimate relationships,
sexuality, parenting skills, and work adjust-
ment. Prerequisite: Psychology 110.
333
PHYSIOLOGICAL PSYCHOLOGY
An introduction to the physiological psy-
chologist's method of approach to the
understanding of behavior as well as the set
of principles that relate the function and
organization of the nervous system to the
phenomena of behavior. Prerequisite: Psy-
chology 110 or consent of instructor.
334
PRINCIPLES OF MEASUREMENT
Psychometric methods and theory,
including scale transformation, norms,
standardization, validation procedures, and
estimation of reliability. Prerequisites: Psy-
chology 110 and statistics.
335
HISTORY AND SYSTEMS OF
PSYCHOLOGY
The growth of scientific psychology and
the theories and systems that have accompa-
nied its development. Prerequisite: Four
courses in psychology.
336
PERSONALITY THEORY
A review of the major theories of person-
ality development and personality function-
ing. In addition to covering the details of
each theory, the implications and applications
of each theory will be considered.
Prerequisite: Psychology 110.
337
COGNITION
An investigation of human mental
processes along the two major dimensions:
directed and undirected thought. Topic areas
include recognition, attention, conceptualiza-
tion, problem-solving, fantasy, language,
dreaming, and creativity. Prerequisite:
Psychology 110.
338
EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY
An introduction to the empirical study of
the teaching-learning process. Areas consid-
ered may include educational objectives,
pupil and teacher characteristics, concept
learning, problem-solving and creativity,
attitudes and values, motivation, retention
and transfer, evaluation and measurement.
Prerequisite: Psychology 110 or consent of
instructor.
341
PSYCHOLOGY OF WOMEN
A review of contemporary theory and
research on the psychology of gender
differences. The major theories and basic
research on gender differences will be
covered. Special topics include sex differ-
ences in achievement, power, and communi-
cation; sex-role stereotypes; beliefs about
masculinity and femininity; and gender
influences on mental health. Prerequisite:
Psychology 110.
431
LEARNING EXPERIMENTAL
PSYCHOLOGY
Learning processes. The examination of
the basic methods and principles of animal
and human learning. Prerequisite: Psychol-
ogy 110 and statistics.
432
SENSORY EXPERIMENTAL
PSYCHOLOGY
The examination of psychophysical
methodology and basic neurophysiological
methods as they are applied to the under-
standing of sensor processes. Prerequisites:
Psychology 110 and statistics.
iffik.
448-449
PRACTICUM IN PSYCHOLOGY
An off-campus experience in a commu-
nity setting offering psychological services,
supplemented with classroom instruction and
discussion. Psychology 448 covers the basic
counseling skills, while Psychology 449
covers the major theoretical approaches
to counseling. Prerequisite: Consent of
instructor.
470-479
INTERNSHIP (See index)
Internships give students an opportunity to
relate on-campus academic experiences to
society in general and to their post-baccalau-
reate objectives in particular. Students have,
for example, worked in prisons, public and
private schools, county government, and for
the American Red Cross.
N80-N89
INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index)
Independent study is an opportunity for
students to pursue special interests in areas
for which courses are not offered. In addi-
tion, students have an opportunity to study a
topic in more depth than is possible in the
regular classroom situation. Studies in the
past have included child abuse, counseling of
hospital patients, and research in the psychol-
ogy of natural disasters.
490-491
INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index)
Honors in psychology requires original
contributions to the literature of psychology
through independent study. The most recent
honors project was a study of the effect of
self-esteem on attitude-behavior consistency.
Religion
Professor: Guerra (Chairperson), Hughes
Assistant Professor: Van Voorst
A major consists of 10 courses, includ-
ing Religion 113, 114, and 120. At least
seven courses must be taken in the depart-
ment. The following courses may be counted
toward fulfilling the major requirements:
Greek 221 and 222, Hebrew 221 and 222,
History 340 and 416, Philosophy 332, and
Sociology 333.
A minor in Religion consists of one course
from Religion 1 10, 1 13, 1 14 and four religion
courses numbered 200 or above.
An interdisciplinary minor in Biblical
Languages requires the completion of Greek
221, 222 and Hebrew 221 and 222.
110
INTRODUCTION TO RELIGION
Designed for the beginning student, this
course examines what it means to be reli-
iwck
gious. Some of the issues are the definition
of religion, the meaning of symbolism,
concepts of God, ecstatic phenomena.
Specific attention will be devoted to the
current problem of cults and religious liberty.
113
OLD TESTAMENT FAITH AND HISTORY
A critical examination of the literature
within its historical setting and in the light of
archaeological findings to show the faith and
religious life of the Hebrew- Jewish commu-
nity in the Biblical period, and an introduc-
tion to the history of interpretation with an
emphasis on contemporary Old Testament
criticism and theology.
114
NEW TESTAMENT FAITH
AND HISTORY
A critical examination of the literature
within its historical setting to show the faith
and religious life of the Christian community
in the Biblical period, and an introduction to
the history of interpretation with an emphasis
on contemporary New testament criticism
and theology.
119
RELIGION AND POPULAR CULTURE
An examination of the interaction of
religion and culture in a historical perspec-
tive followed by a direct analysis of the
ethical and religious issues raised by contem-
porary American popular culture. Readings
include artistic and social-scientific as well
as ethical and religious approaches to popular
culture.
120
DEATH AND DYING
A study of death from personal, social and
universal standpoints with emphasis upon
what the dying may teach the living. Princi-
pal issues are the stages of dying, bereave-
ment, suicide, funeral conduct, and the
religious doctrines of death and immortality.
Course includes, as optional, practical
projects with terminal patients under profes-
sional supervision. Only one course from the
combination 120-121 may be used for
distribution.
121
AFTER DEATH AND DYING
An examination of the question of life
after death in terms of contemporary clinical
studies, the New Testament resurrection
narratives, the Asian doctrine of reincarna-
tion, and the classical theological beliefs of
providence and predestination. Religion 120
is recommended but not required. Only one
course from the combination 120-121 may be
used for distribution.
222
PROTESTANTISM IN
THE MODERN WORLD
An examination of Protestant thought and
life from Luther to the present against the
backdrop of a culture rapidly changing from
the 17th century scientific revolution to
Marxism, Darwinism, and depth psychology.
Special attention will be paid to the constant
interaction between Protestantism and the
world in which it finds itself.
223
THE BACKGROUNDS OF CHRISTIANITY
A study of the historical, cultural, and
religious background of the formation of
Christianity and the antecedents of Christian
belief and practice in post-exilic Judaism and
in Hellenism.
224
JUDAISM AND ISLAM
An examination of the rise, growth, and
expansion of Judaism and Islam with special
attention given to the theological contents of
the literatures of these rehgions as far as they
are normative in matters of faith, practice,
and organization. Also, a review of their
contributions to the spiritual heritage of
mankind.
225
ORIENTAL RELIGION
A phenomenological study of the basic
content of Hinduism, Buddhism, and Chinese
Taoism with special attention to social and
political relations, mythical and aesthetic
forms, and the East- West dialogue.
226
BIBLICAL ARCHAEOLOGY
A study of the role of archaeology in
reconstructing the world in which the
Biblical literature originated with special
attention given to archaeological results that
throw light on the clarification of the Biblical
text. Also, an introduction to basic archaeo-
logical method and a study in depth of
several representative excavations along with
the artifacts and material culture recovered
from different historical periods.
227
HISTORY AND THEOLOGY
OF THE EARLY CHURCH
An examination of the life and theology
of the church from the close of the New
Testament to the fifth century. Special
attention will be given to the struggles of the
church with heretical movements, the
controversies concerning the person and
nature of Christ, and the encounter of the
church with the Roman Empire.
228
HISTORY AND CULTURE
OF THE ANCIENT NEAR EAST
A study of the history and culture of
Mesopotamia, Anatolia, Syria-Palestine, and
Egypt from the rise of the Sumerian culture
to Alexander the Great. Careful attention
will be given to the religious views prevalent
in the ancient Near East as far as these views
interacted with the culture and faith of the
Biblical tradition.
230
PSYCHOLOGY OF RELIGION
A study into the broad insights of psychol-
ogy in relation to the phenomena of religion
and religious behavior. The course concen-
trates on religious experience or manifesta-
tions rather than concepts. Tentative solu-
tions will be sought to questions such as:
What does it feel like to be religious or to
have a religious experience? What is the
religious function in human development?
How does one think psychologically about
theological problems?
331
CHRISTIAN SOCIAL ETHICS
A study of Christian ethics as a normative
perspective for contemporary moral problems
with emphasis upon the interaction of law
and religion, decision making in the field of
biomedical practice, and the reconstruction of
society in a planetary civilization.
332
CONTEMPORARY PROBLEMS IN
CHRISTIAN SOCIAL ETHICS
An examination of the approach of
religion and other disciplines to an issue of
current concern; current topics include the
theological significance of law, the ethics of
love, and the Holocaust. The course may be
repeated for credit if the topic is different
from one previously studied.
337
BIBLICAL TOPICS
An in-depth study of BibUcal topics
related to the Old and New Testaments.
Topics include prophecy, wisdom literature,
the Dead Sea Scrolls, the teachings of Jesus,
Pauline theology, Judaism and Christian
origins, redaction criticism - the way the
Synoptic Gospels and John give final form to
their message. Course mil vary from year to
year and may be taken for credit a second
time if the topic is different form one previ-
ously studied.
.^ffek
341
CONTEMPORARY RELIGIOUS ISSUES
A study of the theological significance of
some contemporary intellectual develop-
ments in Western culture. The content of this
course will vary from year to year. Subjects
studied in recent years include the theological
significance of Freud, Marx, and Nietzsche;
Christianity and existentialism; theology and
depth psychology; the religious dimension of
contemporary literature.
342
THE NATURE AND
MISSION OF THE CHURCH
A study of the nature of the Church as
"The People of God" with reference to the
Biblical, Protestant, Orthodox, and Roman
Catholic traditions.
470-479
INTERNSHIP (See index)
Interns in religion usually work in local
churches under the supervision of the pastor
and a member of the faculty.
N80-N89
INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index)
Current study areas are in the Biblical
languages. Biblical history and theology.
Biblical archaeology, comparative rehgions,
and the ethics of technology.
490-491
INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index)
Scholar Program
Associate Professor: Boerckel (Director)
1 he Lycoming college Scholar Program
is a special program designed to meet the
needs and aspirations of highly motivated
students of superior intellectual ability. The
Lycoming Scholar satisfies the college dis-
tribution requirements, generally on a more
exacting level and with more challenging
courses than the average student. Lycoming
Scholars also participate in special interdisci-
plinary seminars and in serious independent
study culminating in a senior project
301
LYCOMING SCHOLAR SEMINAR
Team taught interdisciplinary seminar
held each semester under the direction of the
Lycoming Scholar Council. May be repeated
for credit. Completion of five semesters is
required by the Scholar Program. Prerequi-
site: Acceptance into the Lycoming Scholar
Program. One-quarter unit of credit. Grade
will be recorded as "A" or "F" .
450
SENIOR SEMINAR
During the senior year, Lycoming
Scholars complete independent studies or
departmental honors projects. These projects
are presented to scholars and faculty in the
senior seminar. Non-credit course. Pre-
requisite: Acceptance into the Lycoming
Scholar Program.
Sociology-
Anthropology
Professor: Wilk (Chairperson)
Associate Professor: Jo
Assistant Professor: Alexander, Strauser
1 he Sociology/ Anthropology Depart-
ment offers two tracks in the major. Both
tracks introduce the students to the funda-
mental concepts of the discipline, and both
tracks prepare the student for graduate
school.
Track I emphasizes the theoretical aspects
of sociology and anthropology. Track II
emphasizes the application of sociology and
anthropology to human services.
Track I - Sociology-Anthropology requires
the core course sequence 1 10, 1 14, 229, 444,
and 447 and three other course within the
department with the exception of 115, 222,
223, 225, 440, and 443. Religion 226 may
also be counted toward the major.
Track II - Human Services in a Socio-
Cultural Perspective requires: Sociology-
Anthropology 1 10, 222, 229, 443, 444, and
447. In addition, students must select two
courses from among the following: Sociol-
ogy-Anthropology 220, 221, 227, 228, 300,
334, and 335. Students are also required to
choose two units from the following courses:
Psychology 110, Psychology 224, Economics
224, and Political Science 333. Recom-
mended courses: Accounting 110, Account-
ing 226, Spanish 111, Spanish 112, History
126, and Philosophy 334.
Majors in both tracks are encouraged to
participate in the internship program.
A minor in Sociology and Anthropology
consists of Sociology- Anthropology 110 and
four other sociology-anthropology courses
(three of which must be numbered 220 or
above) which must be approved by the
department. Sociology-Anthropology
courses 1 15, 223, 225, 339, and 440 cannot
be counted toward this minor.
110
INTRODUCTION TO SOCIOLOGY
An introduction to the problems, concepts,
and methods in sociology today, including
analysis of stratification, organization of
groups and institutions, social movements,
and deviants in social structure.
114
INTRODUCTION TO ANTHROPOLOGY
An introduction to the subfields of
anthropology; its subject matter, methodol-
ogy, and goals. Examination of biological
and cultural evolution, the fossil evidence for
human evolution, and questions raised in
relation to human evolution. Other topics
include race, human nature, primate behav-
ior, and prehistoric cultural development.
115
INTRODUCTION TO AMERICAN
CRIMINAL JUSTICE SYSTEM
An introduction to the role of law enforce-
ment, courts, and corrections in the admini-
stration of justice; the historical development
of police, courts, and corrections; jurisdiction
mk
and procedures of courts; an introduction to
the studies, literature, and research in
criminal justice; careers in criminal justice.
220
MARRIAGE AND THE FAMILY
The history, structure, and functions of
modem American family life, emphasizing
dating, courtship, factors in marital adjust-
ment, and the changing status of family
members. Prerequisite: Socio logy- Anthro-
pology 110 or consent of instructor.
Ill
JUVENILE DELINQUENCY
A multidisciplinary approach to the study
of the constellation of factors that relate to
juvenile delinquency causation, handling the
juvenile delinquent in the criminal justice
system, treatment strategies, prevention, and
community responsibility. Prerequisite:
Sociology-Anthropology 110 or consent of
instructor.
222
INTRODUCTION TO HUMAN SERVICES
The course is designed for students
interested in learning about, or entering, the
human services profession. It will review the
history, the range, and the goals of human
services together with a survey of various
strategies and approaches to human prob-
lems. It will include practical discussions of
social behavioral differences as they relate to
stress and conflict in people's lives. Pre-
requisite: Sociology- Anthropology 110 and/
or Psychology 110 or consent of instructor.
223
INTRODUCTION TO LAW
ENFORCEMENT
Principles, theories, and doctrines of the
law of crimes, elements in crime, analysis of
criminal investigation, important case law.
Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropology 115 or
consent of instructor.
224
RURAL AND URBAN COMMUNITIES
The concept of community is treated as it
operates and affects individual and group
behavior in rural, suburban, and urban
settings. Emphasis is placed upon character-
istic institutions and problems of modern city
life. Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropology
110 or consent of instructor.
225
INTRODUCTION TO
CRIMINAL INVESTIGATION
This course is designed for advanced
criminal justice majors. Emphasis is placed
on an in-depth study of detection and investi-
gation of major crimes. Particular attention
is placed on the use of criminalistics, legal
parameters of evidence and interrogation, and
prosecutory procedures; Prerequisite:
Sociology-Anthropology 223 or consent of
instructor. Will not be counted toward the
sociology I anthropology major.
116
SOCIAL MOVEMENTS
An analysis of the dynamics, structiu"e,
and reactions to social movements with focus
on contemporary social movements. Pre-
requisite: Sociology-Anthropology 110 or
consent of instructor.
Ill
SOCIAL PROBLEMS
The course examines the causes, charac-
teristics, and consequences of social prob-
lems in America from diverse socio-cultural
perspectives. Topics discussed typically in-
clude crime, urban crises, family disorganiza-
tion, poverty, race problems, drug abuse, and
other related issues. Prerequisite: Sociology-
Anthropology 110 or consent of instructor.
IIH
AGING AND SOCIETY
Analysis of cross-cultural characteristics
of the aged as individuals and as members of
groups. Emphasis is placed upon variables:
^Bjk
health, housing, socio-economic status,
personal adjustment, retirement, and social
participation. Sociological, social psycho-
logical, and anthropological frames of
reference utilized in analysis and description
of aging and its relationship to society,
culture, and personality.
229
CULTURAL ANTHROPOLOGY
An examination of cultural and social an-
thropology designed to familiarize the
student with the analytical approaches to the
diverse cultures of the world. The relevancy
of cultural anthropology for an understanding
of the human condition will be stressed.
Topics to be covered include the nature of
primitive societies in contrast to civilizations,
the concept of culture and cultural relativism,
the individual and culture, the social pattern-
ing of behavior and social control, an anthro-
pological perspective on the culture of
the United States.
300
CRIMINOLOGY
Analysis of the sociology of law; condi-
tions under which criminal laws develop;
etiology of crime; epidemiology of crime, in-
cluding explanation of statistical distribution
of criminal behavior in terms of time, space,
and social location. Prerequisite: Sociology-
Anthropology 110 or consent of instructor.
331
SOCIOLOGY OF WOMEN
A sociological examination of the role of
women in American society through an
analysis of the social institutions which affect
their development. Role-analysis theory will
be applied to the past, present, and future
experience of women as it relates to the role
options of society as a whole. Students will
do an original research project on the role of
women. Prerequisite: Sociology- Anthropol-
ogy 110. Alternate years.
332
INSTITUTIONS
Introduces the student to the sociological
concept of social institution, the types of
social institutions to be found in all societies,
and the interrelationships between the social
institutions within a society. The course is
divided into two basic parts: 1. That aspect
which deals with the systematic organization
of society in general, and 2. The concentra-
tion on a particular social institution: eco-
nomic, political, educational, or social
welfare. Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropol-
ogy 110 or consent of instructor.
333
SOCIOLOGY OF RELIGION
An examination of the major theories of
the relationship of religion to society and a
survey of sociological studies of religious
behavior. Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthro-
pology 110 or consent of instructor.
334
RACIAL AND CULTURAL MINORITIES
Study of racial, cultural, and national
groups within the framework of American
cultural values. An analysis will include
historical, cultural, and social factors under-
lying ethnic and racial conflict. Field trips
and individual reports are part of the require-
ments for the course. Prerequisite: Sociol-
ogy-Anthropology 110 or consent of
instructor.
335
CULTURE AND PERSONALITY
Introduction to psychological anthropol-
ogy, its theories and methodologies. Empha-
sis will be placed on the relationship between
individual and culture, national character,
cognition and culture, culture and mental
disorders, and cross-cultural considerations of
the concept of self. Prerequisite: Sociology-
Anthropology 229 or consent of instructor.
Offered at least once every three years.
^i.
336
THE ANTHROPOLOGY
OF PRIMITIVE RELIGIONS
The course will familiarize the student
with the wealth of anthropological data on
the religions and worid views developed by
primitive peoples. The functions of primitive
religion in regard to the individual, society,
and various cultiu'al institutions will be
examined. Subjects to be surveyed include
myth, witchcraft, vision quests, spirit
possession, the cultural use of dreams, and
revitalization movements. Particular empha-
sis will be given to shamanism, transcultural
religious experience, and the creation of
cultural realities through religions. Both a
social scientific and existential perspective
will be employed. Prerequisite: Sociology-
Anthropology 229 or consent of instructor.
Alternate years.
337
THE ANTHROPOLOGY OF
AMERICAN INDIANS
An ethnographic survey of native North
American Indian and Eskimo cultures, such
as the Iroquois, Plains Indians, Pueblo,
Kwakiutl, and Netsilik. Changes in native
lifeways due to European contacts and United
States expansion will be considered. Recent
cultural developments among American
Indians will be placed in an anthropological
perspective. Offered at least once every
three years.
338
LEGAL AND POLITICAL
ANTHROPOLOGY
The course is designed to familiarize the
student with the techniques of conflict
resolution and the utilization of public power
in primitive society as well as the various
theories of primitive law and government.
The rise of the state and an anthropological
perspective on modem law and government
will be included. The concepts of self-
regulation and social control, legitimacy.
coercion, and exploitation will be the
organizing focus. Prerequisite: Sociology-
Anthropology 229 or consent of instructor.
339
THE AMERICAN PRISON SYSTEM
Nature and history of punishment,
evolution of the prison and prison methods
with emphasis on prison community, prison
architecture, institutional programs, inmate
rights, and sentences. Review of punishment
versus treatment, detention facilities, jails, re-
formatories, prison organization and
administration, custody, and discipline. Pre-
requisite: Sociology-Anthropology 115.
440
PROBATION AND PAROLE
A course designed for the advanced
criminal justice major. While the course
concerns the study of probation and parole as
parts of the criminal justice system and their
impact on the system as a whole, the primary
emphasis is the impact on the offender.
Particular attention is given to diagnostic
report writing on offenders, pre-sentence
investigation, offender classification, and
parole planning. Prerequisite: Sociology-
Anthropology 115 and 339. Alternate years.
441
SOCL\L STRATIFICATION
An analysis of stratification systems with
specific reference to American society. The
course will include an analysis of poverty,
wealth, and power in the United States.
Particular attention will be given to factors
which generate and maintain inequality,
along with the impact of inequality on the
lives of Americans. Prerequisite: Sociology-
Anthropology 110 or consent of instructor.
443
HUMAN SERVICES IN
HELPING INSTITUTIONS
The course examines the organizational
and conceptual context within which human
services are delivered in contemporary
society. Subject to be covered include ethno-
graphic study of nursing homes, prisons,
therapeutic communities, mental hospitals,
and other human service institutions. The
methodology of fieldwork will be explored so
as to sensitize the student to the socio-
cultural dimensions of helping environments
and relationships. Prerequisite: Sociology-
Anthropology 110 or Sociology -Anthropology
229 or consent of instructor. Alternate years.
444
SOCIAL THEORY
The history of the development of socio-
logical thought from its earliest philosophical
beginnings is treated through discussions and
reports. Emphasis is placed upon sociologi-
cal thought since the time of Comte. Pre-
requisite: Sociology-Anthropology 110 or
consent of instructor.
445
ANTHROPOLOGICAL THEORY
The history of the development of anthro-
pological thought from the 18th century to
the present. Emphasis is placed upon
anthropological thought since 1850. Topics
include evolutionism, historical-particu-
larism, cultural idealism, cultural material-
ism, functionalism, structiu^alism, and
ethnoscience. Prerequisite: Sociology-An-
thropology 229 or consent of instructor.
Offered at least once very three years.
447
RESEARCH METHODS IN
SOCIOLOGY-ANTHROPOLOGY
Study of the research process in sociol-
ogy-anthropology. Attention is given to the
process of designing and administering
research and the application of research.
Different methodological skills are consid-
ered, including field work, questionnaire
construction, and other methods of data
gathering and the analysis of data. Prerequi-
site: Sociology-Anthropology 110 and
Mathematics 103 or consent of instructor.
448-449
PRACTICUM IN SOCIOLOGY
Introduces the student to a practical work
experience involving community agencies in
order to effect a synthesis of the student's
academic course work and its practical appli-
cations in a community agency. Specifics of
the course to be worked out in conjunction
with department, student and agency.
Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropology 110
and consent of instructor.
470-479
INTERNSHIP (see index)
Interns in sociology-anthropology
typically work off campus with social service
agencies under the supervision of administra-
tors. However, other internship experiences,
such as with the Lycoming County Historical
Museum, are available. Interns in criminal
justice work off campus in criminal justice
agencies, such as penal institutions and
probation and parole departments, under the
supervision of administrative personnel.
N80-N89
INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index)
An opportunity to pursue specific interests
and topics not usually covered in regular
courses. Through a program of readings and
tutorials, the student will have the opportu-
nity to pursue these interest and topics in
greater depth than is usually possible in a
regular course.
490-491
INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index)
mi.
Theatre
Professor: Falk (Chairperson)
Associate Professor: Allen
Part-time Instructor: Clark
Theatre Technician: Downing
1 he major consists of eight courses:
Theatre 100 and seven others; a concentra-
tion in acting, directing, or design is possible.
In addition to the course requirements, ma-
jors are expected to participate actively in
Arena Theatre productions. Majors are urged
to include courses in art, music, psychology,
and English, or other areas of special interst.
Three minors are available in the Theatre
department. A minor in Theatre History and
Literature consists of Theatre 100, 332, 333,
335, and 400. The following courses are
required to complete a minor in
Performance: Theatre 100, 140, 226, 334,
336, and either 332 or 333. To obtain a
minor in Technical Theatre, a student must
complete Theatre 100, 148, 228, 338, and
420 or 430.
The fine arts distribution requirement may
be satisfied by selecting any two of the
following recommended courses: Theatre
100, 110, 140, 148, 332, 333 or other courses
with the consent of the instructor.
100
INTRODUCTION TO THEATRE
Designed as a comprehensive introduction
to the aesthetics of theatre. From the specta-
tor's point of view, the nature of theatre will
be explored, including dramatic literature and
the integral functioning of acting, directing
and all production aspects.
110
INTRODUCTION TO FILM
A basic course in understanding the film
medium. The class will investigate film
technique through lectures and by viewing
regular weekly films chosen from classic,
contemporary, and experimental short films.
135-136
INTRODUCTION TO DANCE I AND II
An introduction to the techniques of basic
movement and interpretation in ballet, jazz,
and modem dance. Classes include improvi-
sation and choreography. Prerequisite for
Theatre 136: Theatre 135 or consent of
instructor. One-half unit of credit each. Not
open to students who have received credit for
Music 135-136 or Music 235-236.
137
HISTORY OF THE DANCE I
A survey of classical ballet from the
Ballets de cour of 17th century France to the
present with emphasis on the contributions of
Petipa, Fokien, Cecchetti, and Balanchine.
One-half unit of credit. Not open to students
who have received credit for Music 137
or 138.
138
HISTORY OF THE DANCE II
A survey of the forms of dance, excluding
classical ballet, as independent works of art
and as they have reflected the history of
J^^
civilization from primitive times to the
present. Prerequisite: Theatre 137 or
consent of instructor. One-half unit of credit.
Not open to students who have received
credit for Music 137 or 138.
140
INTRODUCTION TO ACTING
An introductory study of the actor's
preparation with emphasis on developing the
actor's creative imagination through improvi-
sations and scene study. Prerequisite:
Theatre 100.
148
INTRODUCTION TO
PLAY PRODUCTION
Stagecraft and the various other aspects of
play production are introduced. Through ma-
terial presented in the course and laboratory
work on the Arena Theatre stage, the student
will acquire experience to produce
theatrical scenery, lighting and costumes.
226
INTRODUCTION TO DIRECTING
An introductory study of the function of
the director in preparation, rehearsal, and per-
formance. Emphasis is placed on developing
the student's ability to analyze scripts, and on
the development of the student's imagination.
Prerequisite: Theatre 140.
228
INTRODUCTION TO SCENE
DESIGN AND STAGECRAFT
An introduction to the theatre with an
emphasis on stagecraft. Productions each
semester serve as the laboratory to provide
the practical experience necessary to under-
stand the material presented in the classroom.
Prerequisite: Theatre 148 or consent of
instructor.
231
ADVANCED TECHNIQUES
OF PLAY PRODUCTION
A detailed consideration of the interre-
lated problems and techniques of play
analysis, production styles, and design. Of-
fered summer only.
232
FUNDAMENTALS OF MAKEUP
Essentials of stage makeup; straight,
character, special types. Effects of light on
makeup are included. Prerequisite: Theatre
148. One-half unit. Alternate years.
233
ADVANCED MAKEUP
Advanced techniques in makeup design.
Three dimensional and prosthetic makeups
are included, with emphasis on nonrealistic
and nonhuman forms. Prerequisite: Theatre
232. One-half unit. Alternate years.
235-236
INTERMEDIATE DANCE I AND II
Studies of the techniques of basic
movement and interpretation in ballet, jazz
and modem dance at the intermediate level.
Classes include improvisation and choreogra-
phy. Prerequisite for Theatre 235: Theatre
136 or consent of instructor. Prerequisite for
Theatre 236: Theatre 235 or consent of
instructor. One-half unit of credit each. Not
open to students who have received credit for
Music 135-136 or Music 235-236.
332
HISTORY OF THEATRE I
A detailed study of the development of
theatre from the Greeks to the Restoration.
Alternate years.
333
HISTORY OF THEATRE II
The history of the theatre from 1660.
Alternate years.
iBtk
334
INTERMEDIATE STUDIO: ACTING
Instruction and practice in character
analysis and projection with emphasis on
vocal and body techniques. Prerequisite:
Theatre 140.
335
THEORIES OF THE MODERN THEATRE
An advanced course exploring the philo-
sophical roots of the modem theatre from the
birth of realism to the present and the
influences on modem theatre practice. Se-
lected readings from Nietzsche, Marx, Jung,
Freud, Whitehead, Kierkegaard, Sarte,
Camus, Antoine, Copeau, Stanislavski, Shaw,
Meyerhold, Artaud, Brecht, Brook, Grotow-
ski. Alternate years.
336
INTERMEDIATE STUDIO: DIRECTING
Emphasis is placed on the student's
ability to function in preparation and re-
hearsal. Practical experience involves the
directing of two one-act plays from the con-
temporary theatre. Prerequisite: Theatre 226.
337
PLAYWRITING AND
DRAMATIC CRITICISM
An investigation of the techniques of
playwriting with an emphasis on creative
writing, culminating in a written one-act
play, plus an historical survey of dramatic
criticism from Aristotle to the present with
emphasis upon developing the student's
ability to write reviews and criticism of
theatrical productions and films. Alternate
years.
338
INTERMEDIATE STUDIO:
LIGHTING DESIGN
The theory of stage and lighting design
with emphasis on their practical application
to the theatre. Prerequisite: Theatre 148 or
consent of instructor.
400
MASTERS OF WORLD DRAMA
An intensive and detailed analysis of the
plays and related works, including criticism
of great authors, that have shaped world
theatre. Authors to be selected on the basis
of interest of students and faculty. At times,
more than one author will be treated in a
term. Ibsen, Brecht, Moliere, Williams,
Albee. Alternate years. May be accepted
toward English major with consent of English
Department.
420
ADVANCED STUDIO:
COSTUME DESIGN
The theory of costuming for the stage,
elements of design, planning, production, and
construction of costumes for the theatre.
Students will participate in the design of a
production. Prerequisite: Theatre 148 or
consent of instructor.
430
ADVANCED STUDIO:
PROPERTIES DESIGN
The theory of properties design for the
stage, including the production of specific
properties for staging use. Elements of
design, fabrication, and the constmction of
properties employing a variety of materials
and the application of new theatrical technol-
ogy. Prerequisite: Theatre 148 or consent of
instructor.
440
ADVANCED STUDIO: ACTING
Preparation of monologues and two-
character scenes, contemporary and classical.
The student will appear in major campus
productions. Prerequisite: Theatre 234.
m%.
446
ADVANCED STUDIO: DIRECTING
Emphasis will be placed on the student's
ability to produce a major three-act play from
the script to the stage for pubhc performance.
Prerequisite: Theatre 336.
448
ADVANCED STUDIO: DESIGN
Independent work in conceptual and
practical design. The student will design one
full production as his major project. Pre-
requisites: Theatre 228 or 338 and consent
of instructor.
470-409
INTERNSHIP (see index)
Interns in theatre work off campus in the-
atres such as the Guthrie Theatre, Minneapo-
lis, and the New Jersey Shakespeare Festival.
N80-N89
INDEPENDENT STUDY (see index)
Some recent independent studies have
been the roles of women as characters in
drama, scene design, and lighting design for
an Arena production,
490-491
INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (see index)
A typical study could be the writing and
production of an original play.
THEATRE PRACTICUM
Students may receive academic credit for
supervised participation in the various
aspects of technical production, rehearsal,
and performance of the Theatre Department's
major presentations in the Arena Theatre.
Credit for Theatre Practicum is earned on a
fractional basis. Students may register for
one-half semester hour course credit for
A^
active participation in a major production in
the designated areas of technology and
performance, limited to one semester hour
credit per semester and eight semester hours
over for years. Theatre Practicum credit may
not be use to satisfy distribution requirements
in Fine Arts. Students may not register for
Theatre Practicum while taking Theatre 100
(Introduction to Theatre) or Theatre 148
(Play Production) without permission of the
instructor. When scheduling, students should
register for Theater Practicum in addition to
the normal four academic courses. Because
students may not be cast or assigned duties in
time to meet the drop/add deadline, late reg-
istration for Theatre 160 and 161 (Technical
Theatre), (Rehearsal and Performance) will
be permitted without penalty.
160
TECHNICAL THEATRE PRACTICUM
Participation in a major production of the
Arena Theatre in one of more of the follow-
ing technical areas: scene construction,
scene painting, lighting, sound, properties,
costume, make-up. A minimum of 50 hours
is required. May be repeated for credit.
One-half credit hour. Prerequisite: Consent
of instructor.
161
REHEARSAL AND
PERFORMANCE PRACTICUM
Participation in a major production of the
Arena Theatre in one or more of the follow-
ing rehearsal and performance areas: acting
in a major or minor role, stage manager, di-
rector, assistant director, choreographer. A
minimum of 50 hours is required. May be
repeated for credit. One-half hour credit.
Prerequisite: Consent of instructor.
Women's Studies
Professor: Jensen (Coordinator)
Although a major in Women's Studies
is available only under the policies regarding
Individual Interdisciplinary Majors (see
p. 12), an established minor in Women's
Studies is provided. Courses required for the
minor are:
History 310: Women in History
English 334: Women and Literature
Psychology 341: Psychology of Women
Art 339: Women in Art
With the approval of the coordinator, one
of the four courses may be satisfied with
Political Science 347: Women in Politics,
with an appropriate special course, or with an
independent studies project. To receive
credit for a minor in Women's Studies, a
student must maintain at least a 2.0 average
in courses taken for that minor.
^^
Student Services
Administration
1 he program of student services at
Lycoming is administered by the Office of
Student Services, It is designed to respond to
a diversity of student needs. Professional
staff members are assigned the specific
responsibilities of:
• career counseling and placement;
• psychological services;
• residence life;
• student activities;
• religious life;
• health services;
• safety and security;
• student orientation;
• judiciary-student conduct;
• intramural sports;
All members of the staff are available to
counsel and advise individual students.
Counseling Service
l^ounseling Service assists students in
achieving their personal and academic goals.
Professional and confidential services are
provided free of charge to Lycoming stu-
dents. Individual and group therapy, referral
information and psychological assessment are
offered. The Counseling Service also
provides guidance to students with learning
disabilities and conducts outreach programs
for the college community.
Career Development
Services
1 he Career Development Center
provides services which are designed to help
students identify their abilities and interest,
set realistic career goals, and plan academic
programs to meet these goals. Counseling
for Lycoming students begins in the fresh-
man year.
In addition to individual guidance, the
center maintains a library on specific careers,
employment outlooks, and career trends.
Services offered by the center include:
• individual counseling;
• DISCOVER, a computer assisted career
guidance system, provides information to
students about themselves and the world of
work;
• SHARE (Students Having a Real Experi-
ence), a program in which students observe
and work with a professional in the field;
• placement services to aid seniors in imple-
menting their career plans;
• assistance to students in securing intern-
ships, summer employment, and part-
time employment;
• speaker program which brings profession-
als from a variety of careers to
campus seminars;
• video-cassette programs relating to job
skills and career information;
• microfiche copies of graduate- and profes-
sional-school catalogs for the United States
and abroad.
^1^
Residence Halls
IS ingle students under 23 years of age
who do not live at the home of their parents
or guardians are required to live in residence
halls and eat in the dining room. All new
resident students are forwarded a room-
agreement form to sign after confirmation of
their admission to Lycoming. The agreement
is renewed each spring.
Resident students assume responsibility
for their rooms and furnishings. The College
reserves the right to enter and inspect any
room for reasons of damage, health, or
safety, and to search any room when there is
reason to believe a violation of College rules
or the law is occurring or has occurred.
Charges are assessed for damage to rooms,
doors, and furniture. Whenever possible,
damage to resident hall property will be
charged to the person or persons directly re-
sponsible. When damage occurs to common
living areas of the residence halls (lounges,
stairwells, lobbies, hallways, or bathrooms)
and is clearly the result of negligence, care-
lessness, malicious intent to destroy or theft,
residents of the floor or building may be
assessed for their share of the repair and/or
replacement costs. Damage and breakage
occurring in a room will be the responsibility
of students occupying the room.
Residence halls are not available for oc-
cupancy during the vacation periods. Quiet
hours are for study purposes and are estab-
lished by the Office of Student Services.
They are published in the Student Handbook
and posted on bulletin board. Residence Hall
Councils, which share responsibihty for
developing and monitoring regulations, may
vote to extend these hours. Room visitation,
by members of the opposite sex, is permitted
in the halls under conditions established by
the College.
Resident Advisors are available on
student floors to assist with any problems
which might arise, as well as, offer activities
for students. These are undergraduate
student who are hired by the College to help
provide a good living environment for all
students.
Student Activities
Otudent activities offers assistance and
advice for all campus programs and student
organizations. Through the efforts of the
Campus Activities Board (C.A.B.) program-
ming is provided for all facets of the student
population. C.A.B. works to create an atmos-
phere which best serves the social and
recreational needs of the students. Student
Activities is also responsible for Leadership
Training and the Student Orientation staff; in
addition, it provides support and direction for
student government, the Interfratemity and
Panhellenic Councils and the retention
program.
Religious Life
1 he United Campus Ministry, staffed by
a Protestant Minister and a Roman Catholic
Priest, provides a wide range of activities in
support of the religious lives of students.
Ecumenical and inclusive in nature, campus
ministry at Lycoming provides worship
services, service projects, social occasions,
retreats, study opportunities and personal
counseling. The chaplains are an integral
part of campus life and are available to stu-
dents for a variety of situations in which they
might need support, counsel or direction.
Health Services
M ormal medical treatment by the health
service staff at the College is provided
without cost to the student. During the fall
and spring semesters, the College maintains
an outpatient service in Rich Hall. It is
staffed with a registered nurse five days a
week from 8:00 a.m. to 4:30 p.m. The
College physician is available for one hour
each day, Monday through Friday. At other
times, emergency care is available at the
^Imk
emergency rooms of Williamsport and
Divine Providence Hospitals, located a short
distance from the campus.
Medical service charges paid by the stu-
dent are: emergency room and emergency
room physician's charges, special medica-
tions. X-rays, surgery, care for major acci-
dents, immunizations, examinations for
glasses, physician's visits other than in the
Health Services, referrals for treatment by
specialists, special nursing services and
special services.
Entering students must provide basic
health information to the College between the
time of admission and the beginning of
classes of the term to which they are admit-
ted. Information provided by the student and
his/her physician is confidential and is
available only to health service staff and the
Dean of Student Services.
All students are required to carry acci-
dent-sickness medical insurance. Pre-paid
medical insurance is a requirement for par-
ticipation in intercollegiate athletics. Lycom-
ing College does offer a student plan that is
voluntary and at the students' expense.
Student Orientation
INew students at Lycoming are required
to attend one of three summer orientation
sessions with at least one parent before they
enroll in the fall. The purpose of the program
is to acquaint new students and their parents
with the College more fully so that new
students begin their Lycoming experience
under the most favorable circumstances. In
addition, all new students are required to
attend a two day orientation program which
is held immediately prior to the beginning of
the fall semester. Information on orientation
is mailed to new students after they confirm
their admission.
Safety and Security
1 he department strives to maintain an
environment that is free of unnecessary
hazards and disruptions. This responsibility
includes the enforcement of Lycoming
College rules, regulations, and policies.
Security personnel are scheduled on an
around-the-clock basis. An emergency
telephone line, extension #491 1 is always
monitored to respond to serious events on
campus. Telephone extension #4604 is used
to handle general security concerns.
The office of Safety and Security solicits
the cooperation of the entire College commu-
nity in reporting unsafe conditions and
suspicious activity on the Lycoming College
campus.
Other services provided by the department
are: First aid and ambulatory medical
transportation, emergency maintenance
referral, an escort service, guest and parking
registration, and the dissemination of
telephone and general information to the
public.
Standards of Conduct
JLycoming students are expected to
accept responsibiUties required of adults.
The rights of every member of the College
community are protected by established
regulations. Although the acceptance of the
College's standards of behavior is an individ-
ual responsibility, it also calls for group
responsibility. Students should influence
their peers to conduct themselves responsibly
for the collective good.
Students who are unable to demonstrate
that they have accepted these responsibilities
or who fail to abide by established policies
may be dismissed at any time or semester.
Students are given a handbook which
contains the College's official policies, rules
and regulations. These policies, rules and
regulations are part of the contractual agree-
ment students enter into when they register
at Lycoming.
^ffii
Admission To
Lycoming
l-/ycoming College welcomes applica-
tions from prospective students regardless of
age, sex, race, religion, financial resources,
color, national or ethnic background.
Freshman Applicants
r reshman applicants must complete the
following steps:
1) Submit the completed Lycoming College
Admission Application;
2) Submit the non-refundable $25.00
application fee;
3) Provide official transcripts of all high
school and post-secondary school studies
(whether or not completed):
4) Submit official Scholastic Aptitude Test
(SAT), or American College Test (ACT);
Transfer Applicants
JLycoming College considers applica-
tions from students who have attended other
post-secondary educational institutions.
These applicants must have earned a cumula-
tive grade point average of at least 2.0 (on a 4
point scale) in transferable courses at the
post-secondary institution(s) attended.
Transfer applicants must complete each of
the following steps:
1) Complete and return application with the
$25 application fee
2) Provide official transcripts from each
post-secondary school attended. If you
have accumulated less than 24 semester
hours or 36 credit hours you must also
submit high school transcripts.
3) Submit the Lycoming Transfer Form
(it will be sent to you upon application).
Applicants may transfer up to 64 semester
credits of lower division coursework, and up
to 32 semester credits of upper division
coursework for a total of 96 credits. Students
must complete the final 32 credits of their
degree program at Lycoming College.
Additional information regarding the
transfer of college credit appears on page 19.
International Applicants
X rospective students who are neither
citizens nor permanent residents of the
United States are welcome to apply for
admission.
International applicants must complete
each of the following steps:
1) Submit the completed Lycoming College
Admission Application;
2) Provide certified true copies of all
secondary (and when applicable, post-
secondary) transcripts, mark sheets, diplo-
mas and certificates in the original lan-
guages, as well as in English (when the
original are not in English). Translations
of non-English materials must be certi-
fied as true and correct;
3) Submit two letters of recommendation.
4) Please note that the minimum amount
required for each academic year of study
(September through April) at Lycoming
College is U.S. $16,500. Summer living
expenses (May through August) average
an additional U.S. $2,000, and are not
included in $16,500 amount
5) Provide proof of the ability to read, write
and speak English at the college level as
evidence by TOEFL score of at least 500,
or comparable evidence of English
language fluency;
6) International students who are currently
studying in the United States must be
"in-status" with the United States De
partment of Justice, Immigration and
Naturalization Service. They must also
be eligible to transfer to Lycoming
College.
Note All Students:
1) If there is additional information that
would be helpful to the Admissions
Committee in reviewing your application,
please indicate on a separate piece of
paper.
2) If you are 24 or older you need only
complete the unshaded sections of the
application. If you have not taken the
SAT or ACT assessment, that requirement
will be waived.
Admission Application
Filing Period
Applications for the fall semester will be
accepted from June 1st of the preceding year
through July 31st of the year in which studies
are to begin. Applications for the spring
semester are accepted from the preceding
May 1st through December 15th. A limited
number of applications may be considered on
a space available basis up to one month prior
to the beginning of the semester.
Applications, when complete, are re-
viewed and evaluated on a rolling basis.
Generally, applicants are notified in writing,
regarding the outcome of their applications
within three weeks following the receipt of
all required materials.
Admission Decision Criteria
Admission to Lycoming College is
competitive. Applicants are evaluated
on the basis of their academic preparation,
talents, and interests, as well as the College's
capacity to help them achieve their educa-
tional objectives and career goals.
Successful candidates for admission have
typically completed a college preparatory
program in high school which includes four
years of English, three years of math, two
years of foreign language, two years of
natural of physical science, three years of
social science, and two years of academic
electives.
In addition, successful admission candi-
dates generally place in the top two-fifths of
their high school graduating class, and have
better than average SAT or ACT scores.
From time to time, supplemental materi-
als, as well as a personal interview may be
required prior to the determination of
admissibility.
Confirmation of Intent
to Enroll at Lycoming
Admitted applicants are asked to
confirm their intent to enroll for the fall
semester no later than the preceding May 1st,
or by December 1st for the following spring
semester by submitting the appropriate
deposit. Nonresident, commuting students
are required to submit a $100 Tuition
Deposit. Resident students are required to
submit the $100 Tuition Deposit, as well as a
$100 room Reservation Fee. Admitted
international applicants are required to
submit all applicable deposits prior to the
issuance of the 1-20 form.
Deposits are non-refundable, after May
1st for the following fall semester, and
December 1st for the following spring
semester.
^tfek
Withdrawal of
Admission Offers
l^ycoming College reserves the right to
withdraw offers of admission when:
1) information requested as part of the
admission application process is not provided
by applicants.
2) misrepresentation of fact to the College
by applicants occur during the application
process;
3) the conduct of applicants is not in keeping
with the ethical or moral standards as set
forth in the Lycoming College Catalog or the
Lycoming College Student Handbook.
Admissions Office
Location and Hours
X rospective students and their families
are encouraged to visit the campus for a
student-conducted tour and an interview with
an admissions counselor, who will provide
additional information about the College and
answer questions.
The Office of Admissions is located on
Washington Boulevard, and College Place.
For an appointment, telephone 1-800-345-
3920 or (717)321-4026, or write Office of
Admissions, Lycoming College,
WiUiamsport, PA 17701.
Ofllce hours are:
Weekdays - September through April
8:00 a.m. to 4:30 p.m.
- May through August 8:00 a.m.
to 4:00 p.m.
Saturdays - September through April
9:00 a.m. to 12:00 noon
- May through August Saturday
appointments by request.
.^BcW
Financial Matters
Expenses for the
Academic Year 1991-92
1 he following expenses are effective for
the regular fall and spring semesters. The
College reserves the right to adjust fees at
any time. The fees for each semester are
payable not later than the second day of
classes for the semester.
Per Semester Per Year
Fees
Comprehensive $5,500 $11,000
Board and
Room Rent $1,990 $3,980
Total $7,490 $14,980
One-Time Student Fees
Application Fee $25
Admissions Fee $100
Contingency Deposit $100
Room Reservation Deposit $100
Part-Time Students Fees
Application Fee $25
Each Unit Course $1,380
Additional Charges
Applied Music Fee (half-hour
per week per semester) $150
Cap and Gown Rental prevailing cost
Laboratory Fee per Unit Course. .$20 to $160
Reregistration Fee $25
Parking Permit (for the
academic year) $20 to $45
Practice Teaching Fee
(Payable in Junior Year) $400
R.O.T.C. Uniform Deposit
(Payable at Bucknell University $75
Transcript Fee $3*
Health Services Fee $100
Placement Retest Fee $25
The comprehensive fee covers the regular
course load of twelve to sixteen credits each
semester. Resident students must board at
the College unless, for extraordinary reasons,
authorization is extended for other eating
arrangements. If a double room is used as a
single room, there is an additional charge of
$420 per semester. The estimated cost for
books and supplies is up to $400 per year,
depending on the course of study. Special
session (May term and summer term) charges
for tuition, room, and board are established
during the fall semester.
*$3 for 1 transcript; $1 for each additional
copy ordered in the same request. Tran-
scripts provided free to currently enrolled
students.
A
Entry Fees and Deposits
Application Fee - All students for admission
must submit a $25 application fee. This
charge defrays the cost of processing the
application and is nonrefundable.
Admission Deposit - After students have
been notified of their admission to Lycoming,
they are required to make a $100 admissions
deposit to confirm their intention to matricu-
late. Students seeking residence must submit
an additional $100 room -reservation deposit.
All deposits are applied to the general
charges for the first semester of attendance.
After May 1, deposits are nonrefundable.
Contingency Deposit - A contingency
deposit of $100 s required of all full-time
students as a guarantee for payment of
damage to or loss of College property, for
library and parking fines, or similar penalties
imposed by the College. The deposit is
collected along with other charges for the
initial semester. The balance of this deposit
is refunded after all debts to the College have
been paid, either upon graduation or upon
written request submitted to the Registrar two
weeks prior to voluntary permanent termina-
tion of enrollment at Lycoming College.
Partial Payments
r or the convenience of those who find it
impossible to follow the regular schedule of
payments, arrangements may be made with
the College Treasurer for the monthly
payment of College fees through various
educational plans. Additional information
concerning partial payments may be obtained
from the Treasurer or Director of
Admissions.
Refunds for Students
Who Withdraw
Ivefunds of tuition and board are made to
students who voluntarily and officially
withdraw from the College while in good
standing according to the following schedule
for the fall and spring semesters and the
comparable period for the May and summer
terms:
Refund Charge
Period of Withdrawal % %
During the first week
of the semester 80 20
During the second
and third week 60 40
During the fourth
and fifth week 40 60
During the sixth
and seventh week 20 80
After seven weeks 0 100
No refunds are given to students who are
suspended for disciplinary reasons.
Non-Payment of
Fees Penalty
•Students will not be registered for
courses in a new semester if their accounts
for previous attendance have not been settled.
Diploma, transcripts, and certifications of
withdrawals in good standing are issued only
when a satisfactory settlement of all financial
obligations has been made in the Business
Office. Final grades may also be held in
some cases.
Financial Aid
Student Financial Assistance
l-zycoming College is committed to
helping students and families meet college
costs. While some assistance is available to
students regardless of need (merit scholar-
ships), the primary purpose of the College's
financial aid program is to help qualified
students of limited financial resources attend
Lycoming College. Scholarships may be
awarded on the basis of merit and/or need,
while grants are provided on the basis of
financial need. Long term educational loans
^tli.
with favorable interest rates and repayment
terms are available as are part-time employ-
ment opportunities.
Students who wish to be considered for
financial assistance should submit the
following forms as soon after January 1 as
possible and no later than April 1 .
1. Lycoming Financial Aid Application
(LFAA) - available from the Office of
Financial Aid.
2. Financial Aid Form (FAF) of the College
Scholarship Service (CSS) - available from
your high school/college counselor or the
Office of Financial Aid.
3. Pennsylvania Higher Education Assistance
Agency (PHEAA) grant application if a
Pennsylvania resident - or the appropriate
state grant application form from the state
which student resides. Applications are
available from your high school/college
counselor or the Office of Financial Aid.
Renewal applications are required annu-
ally. For additional information refer to the
Lycoming College Financial Aid Guide.
Scholarships and Grants
Trustee Scholarships - This scholarship is a
full tuition guarantee awarded to incoming
freshmen. Recipients of this scholarship
typically rank in the top rank in the top ten
percent of their class and have Scholastic
Aptitude Test (SAT) combined scores of
above 13(X). Students who have been
recognized as a National Merit Scholar may
also be eUgible for this scholarship.
Founders Scholarships - These $5,000
scholarships are available to incoming
students. Recipients of this scholarship
typically rank in the top twenty percent of
their class and have combined SAT scores of
1200 or above.
Valedictorian/Salutatorian Scholarship -
These $4,000 scholarships are awarded to
students that graduated first or second in their
high school class and do not qualify for the
Trustee or Founders Scholarship.
Lycoming Academic Scholarship - Ranging
in value from $1,000 to $4,000, these scho-
scholarships may be awarded to students that
in the top thirty percent of their class and
have SAT combined scores of 1(X)0 or above.
The above scholarships are available to
eligible students regardless of need. The
scholarships are renewable providing the
student maintains at least a 3.0 cumulative
grade point average as a full-time student.
Recognition Scholarships for $1,000 to
$3,000 per year are awarded to Freshmen
who have superior academic qualifications
and who have filed the FAF but did not
demonstrate financial need as determined by
the College Scholarship Service and were not
eligible for another Lycoming Scholarship
program. This scholarship is renewable if the
recipient maintains a 3.00 cumulative
average.
Directors' Scholarships of $400 to full
tuition, depending upon financial need, are
awarded to students in the top fifth of their
secondary school class with SAT scores of
1100 or more. Renewal cumulative is 3.00.
Lycoming Grant-in-Aid awards of $200 to
full tuition, depending upon financial need,
are made to full-time students who do not
qualify for scholarships and who have
demonstrated financial need and the prospect
of contributing positively to the College
community. Renewal requires satisfactory
academic progress as defined by the College
catalog, continued financial need, and
satisfactory citizenship standards.
Ministerial Grants are awarded to depend-
ent children of United Methodist ministers
and ordained ministers of other denomina-
tions. The grant amounts to one-third of
tuition for children of United Methodist
Ministers in the Central Pennsylvania Annual
Conference and one-fourth of tuition for all
others. If a student completes the FAF, this
grant will be part of the total aid award.
Pre-Ministerial Student Grants of one-
fourth of tuition are awarded to students
preparing for the Christian ministry who are
enrolled full time and demonstrate financial
need. Students must complete the pre-
ministerial application available through the
Financial Aid Office.
Presidential Fellowships in Music are
awarded each year to candidates nominated
by the Department of Music. Auditions and
interviews are conducted annually by the
Department. A tuition stipend of $250 is
awarded for each semester the student serves
as a Fellow. The recipients are expected to
fulfill responsibilities assigned each semester
by the Department with the primary responsi-
bility being musical performance. To apply
contact the Chairman, Department of Music,
Lycoming College.
Two-in-Family Grants are awarded to each
member of a family attending Lycoming
College on a full-time basis at the same time.
The amount is 10% of tuition, room, and/or
board paid. Each member must be enrolled
full-time and not eligible for any other
financial aid program of the College. If a
student is eligible for other Lycoming aid, the
student would receive whichever is greater.
Applied Music Grant was established
anonymously to be used to offset music fees
for selected students taking advanced study in
piano. Selection of recipients will be based
upon talent and potential in piano.
Art Scholarship of $1,500 is available to
each new, selected student. It is awarded on
the basis of juried competition and is open to
high school juniors and seniors and to
freshman and sophomore college transfer
students. Renewal requires satisfactory
academic progress and recommendation of
the department.
Music Scholarship of $l,000-$2,000 is
available to new selected students. Recipi-
ents should have SATs of at least 900 and
rank in the top half of their Senior Class.
Audition and recommendation by the
department are necessary. Renewal requires
satisfactory academic progress and recom-
mendation of the department
Franklin L. Artley Scholarship is available
annually to assist a ministerial student(s).
Sculpture Scholarship of $1,500, but not to
exceed need, is available for students seeking
a BFA in Sculpture and who successfully
completes a portfolio review. Students must
also demonstrate financial need. Contact the
Art Department. Application must be
received prior to March 1.
Two-Year Transfer Scholarships of $2,400
are awarded to the student transferring from
each two year institution with the best
academic record. Must have completed a
two-year program or 64 credits and have at
least a 3.25 cumulative average. On campus
interview required. Renewable for one year
if student maintains a 3.0 cumulative
average.
United Methodist Scholarships are awarded
to full-time degree applicants who have a
cumulative average of 3.00 or better, are
active in Christian activities, are an active,
full member of the Methodist Church, and
have demonstrated financial need. The
awards are normally $500 per year and the
funds are provided by the United Methodist
Church. Annual application is required. The
student must complete and file the FAF and
the scholarship forms which are available in
the Financial Aid Office.
A
Wyoming Conference Scholarship is
granted by Lycoming for $500 to a student
chosen by the Scholarship Committee of the
Wyoming Conference. These are renewable
for three additional years. Good academic
performance and service to the church are the
criteria for this award.
Eph and Bess Baker Scholarship for $6,000
is available at $1,500 per year for four years
awarded annually to a full-time student who
exhibits academic promise and has a perma-
nent residence in Lycoming County. Prefer-
ence will be given, but not limited, to
students who demonstrate need for financial
assistance to attend Lycoming College.
Renewal will be contingent upon maintaining
a cumulative average of at least 3.0 on a 4.0
scale. Recipient is chosen by the Director of
Financial Aid.
Ronald Beemer Memorial Scholarship of
$350 is periodically awarded.
Mary Strong Clemins Scholarship of $250
for a student preparing for Christian ministry
or for deaconess work or its equivalent in the
United Methodist Church.
Mabel L. Collins Scholarship of $250 is
available for a student from Hepburn
Township; otherwise, to any other worthy
student.
C. Luther Culler Memorial Scholarship of
$450 for a student is awarded based
on scholarship.
Dewitt-Bodine Scholarship is awarded to
the highest ranked student in the graduating
class each year from Hughesville High
School who attends Lycoming College. The
recipient is designated by the Hughesville
Guidance Counselor. The scholarship
amount is $2,200 and is credited at $550 per
year over four years of attendance at Lycom-
ing. If the student is in a three-year program
(such as Med-Tech), the award will be
divided equally over the three-years'
attendance at Lycoming.
Clara Kramer Eaton Scholarship is
awarded to the highest ranked student in the
graduating class each year from Line Moun-
tain High School who attends Lycoming
College. The recipient is designated by the
high school's guidance office. The scholar-
ship is $400 per year for up to four years
attendance at Lycoming.
Richard W. Gieniec Memorial Scholarship
is available annually to a full-time student(s)
who is in good academic standing, who has
demonstrated financial need and who has the
prospect of contributing positively to the
college community. Preference will be
given, but is not limited to, a student(s) who
meets any or all of the following criteria:
resident of Lancaster County, Pennsylvania;
learning disabled, soccer player.
Beryl Kline Glenn Scholarship of $300 is
periodically awarded to a deserving student
majoring in music.
Edward J. Gray is awarded to one or more
persons of good moral character, of studious
habits, making such record in scholarship and
deportment as shall be approved by President
and faculty.
David Grove and Wife Scholarship of $200
is periodically awarded to a needy student
studying faith and ministry.
Robert I. Hamilton Grant of $600 is avail-
able. Mr Hamilton was a resident of
South Williamsport.
Esther M. Heefner Scholarship of $1,650 is
available to help needy and deserving
students.
Edward P. Heether Scholarship is available
to help needy and deserving students, who
are in good academic standing.
A
James A. Heether Scholarship for $500 is
available based on financial need. Priority
will be given to a chemistry major.
George W. Huntley, Jr. Scholarship for
$900 is available to help defray the tuition
and expenses for the first year only of any
graduate of Cameron County High School
(formerly Emporium High School). The
selection is made by the Superintendent of
Schools, Cameron, PA.
Elizabeth S. Jackson Scholarship is paid
annually to the full time, degree seeking
student who attains the required rank highest
in scholarship and deportment in the sopho-
more class.
The Paul and Mildred John Endowed
Scholarship Fund in Business was estab-
lished in 1990 by Mr. and Mrs. John to
recognize the significant contributions their
friend, Robert L. Shangraw '58, has made to
the betterment of Lycoming College. This
endowed scholarship provides annual income
for full-time students who are pursuing a
major in any of Lycoming's business pro-
grams. Preference is given to candidates who
demonstrate financial need, are children of
employees of the Ritz-Craft Corporation of
PA, Inc. and/or residents of Union County.
Amos Johnson Scholarship of $100 is
available for the education of the ministerial
student of limited means.
John T. and Mary Louise Kiliher
Scholarship of $200 is available for a
deserving student "from the area."
Morgan V. Knapp Endowed Music Schol-
arship is awarded in the ratio of 75% of the
fund to financially needy students, in
satisfactory academic standing, who are
majoring in music or who are pursuing
courses in vocal music, piano, or strings, in
that priority order. Twenty-five percent of
the fund is awarded as needed, on the recom-
mendation of the Music Department Faculty,
to students, who in their opinion should be
encouraged to study privately in the areas of
voice, piano, or strings, in that priority order.
LAMCO Scholarship (formerly the Grit) of
up to $2,250 is available for scholarship with
the following selection priorities:
1. children and grandchildren of
employees of The Grit;
2. graduates of high schools of the city
of William sport; and
3. graduates of high schools of
Lycoming County.
The Law Scholarship was established in
1990 by Mrs. Fern S. Law as a memorial
tribute to her husband, James Graham Law,
who served Lycoming College as a member
of the Board of Trustees from 1965 to 1986.
Annual income is to be awarded to a full-
time student from the Bloomsburg area who
shows academic promise and demonstrates a
need for financial assistance.
Doris Lennon Scholarship of $1,800 is
available to help dedicated young students
preparing for church work in need of finan-
cial assistance.
The Lycoming County Scholarship is an
endowed scholarship which provides interest
annually to be awarded to students whose
permanent residence is in Lycoming County.
Preference will be given to entering freshmen
who demonstrate financial need. Recipients
will be selected by the Director of
Financial Aid.
Eva Rupert McKeIvy Memorial Scholar-
ship of $100 is available to help a worthy
Christian girl.
Mary Housenick Miller Scholarship is
given to a Lycoming student majoring in
History (preferably American History) with a
preference to an individual who has attained
at least sophomore status. The scholarship
will continue until graduation subject to
concurrence from the History Department.
Selection preference will be given but not
limited to deserving students who demon-
strate financial need.
James E. and Bernadine Decker Nancar-
row Scholarship is to be awarded annually
to a student(s) in good academic standing
with demonstrated financial need. Preference
may be given to Lycoming County students.
Earl Nearhoof Memorial Scholarship of
$800 is available to assist young students
entering Christian work with preference
given to students from the Warrior Mark and
Tyrone, PA areas.
Ada Remely Memorial Scholarship is an
award available to currently enrolled female
member of the Junior Class having completed
80 credit hours with at least a 3.0 cumulative
average and who demonstrates financial need
of at least the regular tuition rate. Applica-
tions are available in the Financial Aid
Office in February and are due in March.
The award is normally $500 based on current
earnings of the scholarship endowment.
Mort RaufT Memorial Scholarship Fund
provides annual interest which is awarded
to a deserving full-time student who is in
good academic standing. Preference is given
to but not limited to an individual who
demonstrates financial need and is an active
member of the Lycoming College swimming
team.
Jennie M. Rich Memorial Scholarship of
$450 is available for worthy and needy
students preparing for the Christian ministry
or deaconess or missionary work.
Margaret Rich and Elmer B. Staats
Endowed Scholarship of up to $1,000 is
available to an academically talented student
who intends to pursue a career in public
service. Preference given, but not limited, to
individuals who have demonstrated need.
Leonard H. Rothermel Fund provides
$1,400 in grant to financially needy
student(s) who are in satisfactory academic
standing with primary preference given to
Trevorton residents and secondary preference
given to Line Mountain School District area
students.
Mary Landon Russell Applied Music Fund
was established in recognition of her out-
standing service to Lycoming College by
alumni and friends during a special Home-
coming celebration in 1985. This endowed
fund provides financial assistance to quali-
fied, talented students who seek advanced
training in music.
Nathan A. Scheib Memorial Music Fund
provides financial assistance to qualified,
talented students for advanced training in
music. Awarded on the recommendation of
the Music Department Faculty to students
who, in their opinion, should be encouraged
to study privately. Preference will be given
to students who have demonstrated financial
need with the College.
J. Milton Skeath Memorial Scholarship of
$250 is available for a psychology major.
Robert Barry Spieth Memorial Scholar-
ship is awarded to a student who demon-
strates need with preference given to a
business administration major who is an
active member of Sigma Pi. Minimum GPA
is 2.0
Bishop D. Fredrick and Betty Rowe Wertz
Endowed Scholarship is awarded annually
to a student(s) in good academic standing
with demonstrated financial need.
Samuel Willard Memorial Scholarships are
awarded to a junior or senior student at
Lycoming who is in need of financial
assistance to complete his/her degree.
Preference is given to a Religion Major. The
award varies between $400 and $700 depend-
ing upon available scholarship endowment
income.
H. Merrill Winner Memorial Scholarship
of $400 is available periodically.
Hiram and Elizabeth Wise Scholarship of
$100 is available for a ministerial of mission-
ary student who, because of present circum-
stances and promise of future usefulness
shall, in the judgement of the President, be
deemed worthy of the same.
Dr. Paul E. Witmeyer Memorial
Scholarship of $250 is available for a student
interested in education.
Donald C. Wolfe Memorial Scholarship of
$400 is available for a worthy ministerial
student to be selected by the Trustees.
William Woodcock Scholarship is paid
annually to the full time, degree seeking
student who attains the required rank second
in scholarship and deportment in the Sopho-
more class.
Raymond A. and L. Marie Zimmerman
Scholarship of $100 is available for the
benefit of students preparing for the Christian
ministry.
Federal Aid
PELL Grants are awarded by the Federal
government to eligible undergraduate
students as determined by a standard Federal
formula. The grants will range up to $2,400
for an academic year and are based on
financial need as determined by the Federal
Government formula. Application can be
made when submitting the Financial Aid
Form (FAF), the PHEAA State Grant
Application, or by separate federal appUca-
tion on forms which are available in secon-
dary school guidance offices or the Financial
Aid Office at Lycoming. For students who
received their first Pell Grant award in the
1987-88 award year or thereafter, the
duration of eligibility for a Pell Grant is
limited to the full-time equivalent of 5
academic years of study if the student is
enrolled in an undergraduate degree or
certificate program of 4 years or less.
Supplemental Education Opportunity
Grants are awarded to a limited number of
undergraduate students who have exceptional
need. Priority must be given to Pell Grant re-
cipients. The award range is $100 to $4,000
per year. You need to file the FAF applica-
tion to be considered for this award.
Paul Douglas Teacher Scholarship is avail-
able to residents of Pennsylvania who rank in
the top 10 percent of their high school class
and plan to enter the elementary or secondary
teaching field. Scholarships are for up to
$5,000 and the student must sign an agree-
ment to teach. More information is available
from your high school guidance counselor or
Lycoming's Financial Aid Office.
State Aid
Pennsylvania Higher Education Assistance
Agency (PHEAA) Grants are available for
Pennsylvania residents meeting the residency
requirements and financial requirements of
the program. Awards range from $100 to
$2,200 per year for up to four years. Direct
application to Harrisburg on the PHEAA
Grant application is required. The deadline
for filing to receive consideration is normally
May 1st.
Scholars in Education Awards (SEA) are
offered by PHEAA to PA residents who
plan to teach math or science in a Pennsylva-
nia secondary school. Must rank in the top
fifth of your high school class, achieve at
least a 3.0 (B) average on a 4.0 scale in math
or science courses in high school and college,
and score at least 1000 on the SATs (math
must be at least 550) or on ACT have at
JmL
least 22 in English and 27 in math. Award is
50% of annual tuition. You must agree to
teach math or science in a Pennsylvania
secondary school. If you fail to keep the
commitment the grant becomes a loan with
interest. High school seniors should contact
your guidance counselor. College students
should contact Lycoming's Financial Aid
Office.
Other State Aid may be available to assist
you at Lycoming College. Massachusetts,
Ohio, Delaware, Rhode Island, and Connecti-
cut have programs which allow their resi-
dents to use state grants at Lycoming.
Contact your secondary school guidance
office for specific information and applica-
tion forms.
Loan Programs
Perkins Loan (National Direct Student
Loan Program) permits a total of $9000 to
be borrowed by the undergraduate student not
to exceed $4,500 the first two years. Prefer-
ence must be given to those who have
exceptional need. Applicants must complete
the FAF through the College Scholarship
Service. The repayment period and the inter-
est does not begin until six months after the
student is graduated or ceases at least half-
time enrollment. A simple interest rate of
5% applies. Repayment of the principal may
extent over a ten year period with the
exception that the Program requires repay-
ment of not less than $30 per month.
Stafford (formerly Guaranteed Student)
Loan Program allows students to borrow up
to $2,625 as a freshman or sophomore or up
to $4,000 as a junior or senior per academic
level not to exceed $17,250.
Currently, the Federal Government pays
the interest while the student is enrolled at
least half-time. The simple interest rate
ranges from 7-10 percent depending upon the
date you first obtained a loan. Repayment
usually extends over a period of up to ten
years and begins six months after leaving
school. Applications and information are
available from your bank or other lending
institutions.
PHEAA Alternative Loan of up to $10,000
is available to students attending a Pennsyl-
vania school through PHEAA. Eligibility is
based on your credit qualifications and those
of your cosigner. For more information
request the PHEAA Help Loan Brochure or
contact PHEAA, 660 Boas Street, Harrisburg,
PA 17102.
PHEAA Nonsubsidized Stafford (GSL)
Loan may be available to students attending
a Pennsylvania school. The interest rates are
the same as on the Subsidized Stafford;
however, the interest on the Nonsubsidized
Stafford must be paid on a quarterly basis
while the student is enrolled in school and
during the six-month grace period following
the in-school period. The maximum loan
amount is up to $2,625 minus Stafford
subsidized eligibility for freshman and
sophomore standing and $4,000 minus
Stafford subsidized eligibility for junior
and senior standing. Minimum loan amount
is $500.
PLUS/SLS Loans are meant to provide
additional funds for educational expenses.
The interest rate varies annually but will not
exceed 12%. Parents of dependent under-
graduate students or independent undergradu-
ates may borrow up to $4,000 per year to a
total of $20,000. Applications and informa-
tion are available from your bank or other
lending institution.
United Methodist Student Loans are
available on a very limited basis to students
who are members of the United Methodist
Church. The maximum amount which may
be borrowed for an academic year is $1,000
subject to availability of funds. Information
and applications are available through the
Financial Aid Office.
Vl^
Employment Opportunities
Federal College Work-Study Program
(CWS) awards provide work opportunities on
campus. The program is funded by Federal
funds supplemented by Lycoming
funds. Students generally earn $500 to
$2,000 per academic year and are normally
limited to five to twenty hours per week
during periods of regular enrollment. The
purpose of the program is to provide employ-
ment to students who are in need of assis-
tance to attend college. Applicants must
complete the FAF or PHEAA Grant Applica-
tion and Lycoming's Financial Aid Applica-
tion (LFAA).
Lycoming Campus Employment Program
opportunities are provided on campus to
students enrolled full time who are not
packaged with Federal Work-Study jobs.
The earnings range up to $1,500 per year.
Applicants must have a work supervisor
complete a job request form from the
Financial Aid Office.
Other Job Opportunities are frequently
available with local business firms or
persons. Contact the Career Development
Office of the College for information
on these opportunities.
Other Aid Sources
Williamsport Hospital Scholarship pro-
vides assistance to sophomore, junior, or
senior nursing students who have at least a
2.5 cum average. Students selected must
agree to provide the Williamsport Hospital
with a minimum of twelve months of service
as an employee in the Nursing Department
for each $2,000 per year of award received.
Awards of greater than $2,000 per year
require on year of service for each year of
award received. If the student does not work
for the hospital, the award reverts to a loan.
Non-College Aid Opportunities often are
available through family employers or labor
unions, business firms, fraternal and religious
organizations, and secondary schools.
Contact your secondary school guidance
office for information. Your parents should
contact their employer and organizations of
which they are members for information on
an financial aid sources.
Veterans and Dependents Benefits are
available for qualified veterans and children
of deceased or disabled veterans. Applica-
tion should be made to your nearest Veter-
ans' Administration Office.
Reserve Officers Training Corps (ROTC)
Stipends. Students who participate in the
Army ROTC program receive $100 per
academic month of their junior and senior
years. They also receive half of a second
lieutenant's pay plus travel expenses for a
six-week advanced summer camp between
junior and senior years.
Pennsylvania National Guard. Students
participating in this program may be eligible
for scholarship, credit programs, educational
bonus, or loan repayment. Contact a Guard
unit in your area for more information.
Tuition Exchange Grants. Lycoming
College is a member of both the Tuition
Exchange Program and the CICU Tuition
Exchange Program. These programs are for
dependent students of employees at partici-
pating institutions of higher education. You
should contact the Tuition Exchange Officer
at your sponsor institution for information
regarding sponsorship.
Education Financing Plans. The Business
Office at Lycoming provides information
about plans which enable parents to pay
college expenses on a monthly basis through
selected companies.
iwck
The Campus
JNineteen buildings sit on Lycoming's
34-acre campus. Most buildings have been
constricted since 1950, even though Lycom-
ing - one of America's 50 oldest colleges and
universities - dates back to 1812. All
buildings are easy to reach from anywhere on
campus. A 12-acre athletic field and football
stadium lie a few blocks north of the main
campus.
Modern buildings include the eight
residence halls, which contain clean and
comfortable single and double rooms; the
student union; and the physical education/
recreation center. Up-to-date facilities
include the library theatre, the planetarium,
the computer center, an electronic-music
studio, a photography laboratory, and an art
gallery. The computer center opened in
1969; the art gallery and physical education
center opened in 1980. An arts center was
renovated and opened in 1983.
Residence Halls
Asbury Hall (1962) - Named in honor of
Bishop Francis Asbury, the father of The
United Methodist Church in America, who
made the circuit through the upper
Susquehanna District in 1812, the year
Lycoming (then the Williamsport Academy)
opened its doors.
Crever Hall (1962) - Honors Lycoming's
founder and first financial agent, the
Rev. Benjamin H. Crever, who helped
persuade the Baltimore Conference to
purchase the school from the Williamsport
Town Council in 1848.
East hall (1962) - Houses most of the
chapters of Lycoming's national fraternities
and other students. The self-contained
fraternity units each contain rooms, a lounge,
and a chapter room. All students share a
large social area.
Forrest Hall (1968) - Honors Dr. and Mrs.
Retcher Bliss Forrest and Anna Forrest
Burfiendt '30, the parents and sister of
Katherine Forrest Mathers '28, whose
generosity established the memorial.
Rich Hall (1948) - Honors the Rich family of
Woolrich, Pennsyvannia. Houses the health
service, campus security, mail room, and the
Sara J. Walter Lounge for commuting
students. The Academic Resource Center
opened in January, 1986, and is located in
the North Lounge on the First Floor. It is
manned by peer tutors and professional
staff during specified hours on Sunday
through Friday.
^Sk.
Skeath Hall (1965) - The largest residence
hall. Honors the late J, Milton Skeath,
professor of psychology and four-time Dean
of the College from 1921 to 1967.
Wesley hall (1956) - Honors John Wesley,
the founder of Methodism.
Williams Hall (1965) - Honors Mary Ellen
Whitehead Williams, mother of Joseph
A. Williams, of St. Marys, Pennsylvania,
whose bequest established the memorial.
Academic
Academic Center (1968) - Probably the most
architecturally impressive building on
campus, the Center actually is composed of
four buildings: the library, Wendle Hall, the
Arena Theatre and laboratories, and the
faculty office building.
Library (1968): An active instruction
program acquaints students with academic
library strategies and supports their specific
research in each discipline studied. Students
become familiar with traditional methods of
research as well as new information technolo-
gies utilizing computerized CD-ROM and
online searching. The collection includes
more than 160,000 volumes, approximately
1 100 periodical titles, and a strong reference
section suitable to an undergraduate educa-
tion. The library also serves as a partial
depository for U.S. government publications.
Other facilities in this wing:
Art Gallery (1980): Located in the north-
west corner of the first floor of the library,
the gallery contains exhibits year-round, in-
cluding shows of student work.
College Computer Center (1969): Located
in the lower level of the library, the center
houses a PRIME 9755 which replaced the
DEC PDPl 1/70 in December 1987. The
PRIME 9755 has three 315 and one 1475
megabyte disk drives and 15 megabytes of
main memory.
Computer Graphics Center (1986): The
computer graphics center provides the IBC
Ensign Computer for students majoring in
computer science and for those taking
graphics courses. It has 32 ports for termi-
nals and printers, 2 megabytes of memory,
and two 85 megabyte disk drives.
Nursing Skills Laboratory (1983): Located
in the lower level of the library, it is a replica
of a modem hospital ward, complete with 10
simulated work stations, a nurses' station,
and all the medical equipment used by
nurses.
Wendle Hall (1968): Contains 21 class-
rooms, the psychology laboratories, a
computer terminal laboratory with 20
terminals available for use at present with an
expansion capability of 20 more, and
spacious Pennington Lounge, and informal
meeting place for students and faculty.
Arena Theatre and Laboratories (1968):
The 204-seat thrust-stage theatre is one of the
finest in the region. It includes projection
facilities, scene and costume shops, a make-
up room, and a multiple-use area known as
the Down Stage, where one-act experimental
plays are performed. The language, business,
mathematics, and physics laboratories are
situated on the upper floors. The Detwiler
Planetarium is located on the ground floor.
Faculty Office Building: Contains faculty
offices, seminar rooms, and a 735-seat
lecture hall.
Fine Arts Center (1923, renovated 1983):
Contains studios, sculpture foundry, wood-
shop, printmaking shop, classrooms, lecture
hall, offices. In addition, the Career Devel-
opment Office is located in this building.
Photographic Laboratory (1984): Located
in the lower level of the Fine Arts Center, it
contains all the materials and equipment of
any commercial laboratory.
^i.
Mass Communication Center (1987): The
focal point of the facility is a fully equipped
broadcast quality television studio and
control room. The building also houses two
editing rooms, a classroom, faculty offices,
the FM radio station and the student newspa-
per office. The center is located on the
southeast corner of campus.
Science Building (1990): Opened this past
spring, the $8.3 million Science Building is
one of the finest undergraduate science
facilities in the East. The three-level
building totals more than 63,000 square feet
and contains state-of-the-art biology and
chemistry laboratories, lecture and seminar
rooms, a science reading area and a green-
house, as well as classrooms and faculty
offices.
Clarke Building (1939): Includes recital
hall, music classrooms, practice studios, an
electronic-music studio, faculty offices, two
chapels, and the United Campus Ministry
Center.
Administration
Drum House: Built in 1857 as a rental
property, the Admissions House is the oldest
building on the campus. It was first occupied
by a Presbyterian parson. Founded in 1812,
the Williamsport Academy, predecessor to
Lycoming College, was likewise Presbyterian
until 1848 when the institution was purchased
by the Methodists to become the Williams-
sport Dickinson Seminary.
The Admissions House was bought by the
College in 1931, along with twenty-eight
other dwellings and in 1940 became the
President's home. John W. Long occupied it
for the remainder of his tenure and D.
Frederick Wertz lived in the house from 1955
until 1965 when the President's home was
moved to 325 Grampian Boulevard. The
building was then converted for use by the
Fine Arts Department. In 1983, when a new
Fine Arts facility was completed, the depart-
ment was relocated and the house was vacant
until 1987 when it was restored by college
craftsmen to its original Federalist design
under the supervision of Carol Baker '60,
kindly volunteered her services during the
year-long reconstruction. The Admissions
House was a gift of the W.F. Rich Family.
John W. Long Hall (1951): Opened origi-
nally as the library, it now houses the
administrative offices, including those for the
president, dean, treasurer, dean of student
services, housing, registrar, alumni affairs,
public relations, institutional advancement,
publications, and financial aid. It includes a
reception area, central communications, and
the printing and bulk mail office.
Recreation
Physical Education and Recreation Center
(1980): Includes the George R. Lamade
Gymnasium, which contains basketball and
other courts; a six-lane swimming pool; all-
purpose room; sauna and steam room; weight
room; offices; classrooms, and Alumni
Lounge.
Wertz Student Center (1959): Contains the
main and private dining rooms, Burchfield
Lounge, a recreation area, game rooms.
Jacks' Corner, bookstore, post office, student
activities office, career development, and
student organization offices. Honors Bishop
D. Frederick Wertz, president of Lycoming
from 1955 to 1968.
Religious
Clarke Building (1939): Lycoming's
landmark, the building contains Clarke
Chapel, St. John Neumann Chapel, the
United Campus Ministry Center, and music
department studios and offices.
The Directory
Board of Trustees
Officers
Robert L. Shangraw '58
Chairman
Richard W. DeWald '61
Vice Chairman
Leo A. Calistri '59
Secretary
Ann S. Pepperman
Assistant Secretary
Harold H. Shreckengast, Jr. '50
Chairman Emeritus
Emeriti Trustees
Samuel Evert, '34, LL.D.
Paul Gilmore, Litt.D.
Kenneth Himes
Ralph E. Kelchner
W. Gibbs McKenney, LL.D., L.H.D.
Fred A. Pennington, LL.D.
William Pickelner
Margerite G. Rich
George L. Stearns, II
The Rev. Wallace F. Stettler, H.H.D.
^Q^
Trustees
Term expires 1991
Elected
1979 David Y. Brouse '47
1988 David B. Lee '61
1982 Margaret D. L'Heureux
1973 Robert G. Little, '63, M.D.
1991 George Nichols '59
(Alumni Representative)
1988 Ann S. Pepperman
1988 Theodore Reich
1988 John C. Schultz
1988 J. Richard Stamm '76
1988 Jeanne R. Twigg '74
Term expires 1993
Elected
1987 Leo Calistri '59
(Alumni Representative)
1987 Robert E. Hancox '65
1978 Harold D. Hershberger, Jr.
1987 K. Alan Himes '59
1989 Kenrick R. Khan '57
1984 D. Stephen Martz '64
1987 Richard D. Mase '62
1985 Robert L. Shangraw '58
1972 Harold H. Shreckengast, Jr., '50
Term expires 1992
Elected
1986 Harold D. Chapman
1980 Richard W. DeWald '61
1989 Paul John
1989 Kenneth Polcyn '58
(Alumni Representative)
1989 V. Jud Rogers
1972 Donald E. Shearer, '59, M.D.
1983 Hon. Clinton W. Smith '55
1961 Nathan W. Stuart, '36, J.D.
197 1 Willis W. Willard, III, '58, M.D.
^^
Administrative Staff
James E. Douthat (1989)
President
B.A., The College of William and Mary
M.Div., Duke University
Ed.D., Duke University
Daniel G. Fultz (1989)
Treasurer
A.B., Lycoming
M.B.A. Buc knell University
Anne Harris Katz (1991)
Dean of the College
B.S., Ur sinus College
M.S., Ph.D., University of Massachusetts
J. Barton Meyer (1984)
Vice President for Development
BA., Ohio Northern University
M.S., University of Dayton
R. Michael O'Brien (1987)
Dean of Student Services
A.B., University of Chattanooga
BD., Southern Methodist University
Ed.D., University of Tennessee
James Spencer (1989)
Dean of Admission & Financial Aid
B.A., Concordia College
Keith Barrows (1990)
Admissions Counselor
A.B., Lycoming College
Diane Michalik-Bonner (1990)
College Counselor
B.A., Rutgers University
M.A., Fairleigh Dickinson University
Elizabeth G. Boyd (1990)
Assistant to the President
B.A., The University of the South
Dale V. Bower (1968)
Director of Planned Giving
B.S., Lycoming College
BD., United Theological Seminary
William E. Byham (1987)
Sports Information Director
B.S.,Bloomsburg University
Molly Costello (1991)
Director College Relations
A.B., Mount Holyoke College
M.BA., Southeastern Massachusetts
University
Robert L. Curry (1969)
Associate Director Athletics
A.B., Lycoming College
David P. Durdak (1990)
Coordinator of Residence Life
B.A., Kent State University
M.A., Kent State University
Jerry S. Falco (1990)
Director of Student Activities
B.S., Westminister College
M.A., Bowling Green State University
Frank L. Girardi (1984)
Director of Athletics
B.S., West Chester State College
Daniel J. Hartsock (1986)
Director of Academic Resource Center and
Coordintator of Advising
B.A., The Pennsylvania State University
M.A., Indiana University of Pennsylvania
Alice Heaps (1986)
Associate Director of Admissions
B.S., Shippensburg University
Mary Beth Heim (1990)
Admissions Counselor
B.A., Earlham College
iBiW
Thomas J. Henninger (1966)
Director of Computer Services
B.S., Wake Forest College
M.A., University of Kansas
J. Marco Hunsberger (1989)
Campus Minister
B.A., Mercer University
M.Div., United Theological Seminary
Kelly Keiser (1990)
Admissions Counselor
A.B., Lycoming College
John Killian (1990)
Admissions Counselor
A.B., Lycoming College
Wayne Kinley (1990)
Controller
A.B., Lycoming College
James Lakis (1990)
Director of Financial Aid
B.A., Temple University
John C. Lambert (1988)
Roman Catholic Chaplin
B.A., University of Scranton
S.T.B. Catholic University of America
Christina E. MacGill (1985)
Director of Career Development
A.B., Lycoming College
M.S., Bucknell University
Constance C. Plankenhorn (1989)
Director of Alumni & Parent Relations
B.S., Lycoming College
Lisa A. Sheptock (1990)
College Nurse
B.SJ^.,Bloomsburg University
William Sherwood (1990)
Business Manager
A.B., Lycoming College
M.B.A.. Michigan State University
Phyllis J. Sieber (1989)
Director of Residence Life
B.S., University of Delaware
M.A., Trenton State College
Patricia Waltman (1990)
Admissions Counselor
B.A., Clarion University
Jeanne A. Wagner (1990)
Registrar
B.S., Syracuse University
Deborah E. Weaver (1978)
Manager, Residence Halls Operations
Laurence C. Wilcox (1987)
Director of Safety and Security
Penn State Police Academy
Institute of Applied Science. Syracuse, NY
Cathleen Wild (1977)
Assistant Instructional Services Librarian
B.A., the College ofWooster
M.S., Columbia University
Mary Wolf (1985)
Political Science
Assistant Dean of Freshmen
B.A., St. Mary's College;
M.P.A., University of Michigan
Ralph E. Zeigler, Jr. (1980)
Director of Development for Annual Support
A.B., Lycoming College
M.A., The Pennsylvania State University
Gail M. Zimmerman (1984)
Director of Prospect Research
B.S., SUNY at Cortland
Emeriti
Jack C. Buckle
Dean Emeritus
A.B., Juniata College
M.S., Syracuse University
Harold H. Hutson
President Emeritus
B.S., LL.D., Wojford College
B.D.,Duke University
Ph.D., University of Chicago
L.HD., Ohio Wesley an University
Faculty
Emeriti
John P. Graham
Professor Emeritus of English
Ph.B., Dickinson College
M.Ed., The Pennsylvania State University
Harold W. Hayden
Librarian Emeritus and Professor Emeritus of
Library Services
A.B., Nebraska State Teachers College
B.S., University of Illinois
M.A. in L.S., University of Pennsylvania
John G. Hollenback
Professor Emeritus of Business
Administration
B.S., M.B.A., University of Pennsylvania
James K. Hummer
Professor Emeritus of Chemistry
B.N.S., Tufts University
M.S., Middlebury College
Ph.D., University of North Carolina
M. Raymond Jamison
Assistant Professor Emeritus of Physics
B.S., Ursinus College
M.S., Bucknell University
Walter G. Mclver
Professor Emeritus of Music
Mus3., Westminster Choir College
A.B., Bucknell University
M.A., New York University
Robert W. Rabold
Professor Emeritus of Economics
B.A., The Pennsylvania State University
M.A., Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh
John A. Radspinner
Professor Emeritus of Chemistry
B.S., University of Richmond
M.S., Virginia Polytechnic Institute
D.S., Carnegie Mellon Institute
Logan A. Richmond
Professor Emeritus of Accounting
B.S., Lycoming College
M.BA., New York University
C.P.A. (Pennsylvania)
Mary Landon Russell
Associate Professor Emeritus of Music
Mus. B., Susquehanna University
Conservatory of Music
M.A., The Pennsylvania State University
Louise R. Schaeffer
Associate Professor Emeritus of Education
A.B., Lycoming College
M.A., Bucknell University
D. Ed., The Pennsylvania State University
James W. Sheaffer
Associate Professor Emeritus of Music
B.S., Indiana University of Pennsylvania
M.S., University of Pennsylvania
Frances K. Skeath
Professor Emeritus of Mathematics
A.B., M.A., Bucknell University
D. Ed., The Pennsylvania State University
John A. Stuart
Professor Emeritus of English
B.A., William Jewell College
M.A., PhD., Northwestern University
Helen B. Weidman
Professor Emeritus of Political Science
A.B., M.A,, Bucknell University
Ph.D., Syracuse University
^B^
Professors
Robert B. Angstadt (1967)
Biology
B.S., Ur sinus College
M.S.. Ph.D., Cornell University
Jon R. Bogle (1976)**
Art
B.F.A., B.S., M.F.A., Tyler School of Art;
Temple University
Jack D. Diehl, Jr. (1971)
Biology
B.S., M.A., Sam Houston State University
M.S., Ph.D., University of Connecticut
Robert F. Falk (1970)
Theatre
Marshal of the College
B.A., BD., Drew University
M.A., Ph.D., Wayne State University
David A. Franz (1970)
Chemistry
Marshall of the College
A.B., Princeton University
M.A.T., The Johns Hopkins University
Ph.D., University of Virginia
Ernest D. Giglio (1972)
Political Science
B.A., Queens College
M.A., SUNY at Albany
Ph.D., Syracuse University
Eduardo Guerra (1960)
Religion
BD., Southern Methodist University
S.T.M., Ph.D., Union Theological Seminary
John G. Hancock (1967)**
Psychology
B.S., M.S., Bucknell University
Ph.D., The Pennsylvania State University
Richard A. Hughes (1970)
M.B. Rich Chair in Religion
B.A., University of Indianapolis
S.T.B., Ph.D., Boston University
Emily R. Jensen (1969)
English
B.A., Jamestown College
M.A., University of Denver
Ph.D., The Pennsylvania State University
Robert H. Larson (1969)
History
B.A., The Citadel
M.A., Ph.D., University of Virginia
Roger W. Opdahl (1963)
Economics
A£., Hofstra University
M.A., Columbia University
D.Ed., The Pennsylvania State University
John F. Piper, Jr. (1969)
History
A.B., Lafayette College
B.D., Yale University
Ph.D.,Duke University
David Rife (1970)*
English
B.A., University of Florida
M.A., Ph.D., Southern Illinois University
Michael G. Roskin (1972)****
Political Science
A.B., University of California at Berkeley
M.A., University of
California at Los Angeles
Ph.D., The American University
Roger D. Shipley (1967)
Art
B.A., Otterbein College
M.FA., Cranbrook Academy of Art
Stanley T. Wilk (1973)
Anthropology
B.A., Hunter College
Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh
*0n Sabbatical Fall Semester 1991
**0n Sabbatical Spring Semester 1992
***0n Sabbatical Spring & Fall 1991-1992
****0n Leave
Associate Professors
Jerry D. Allen (1984)*
Theatre
B.FA., M.FA., Utah State University
Susan K, Beidler (1975)
Collection Management Services Librarian
BA., University of Delaware
M.L.S., University of Pittsburgh
Howard C. Berthold, Jr. (1976)
Psychology
BA., Franklin and Marshall College
MA., University of Iowa
Ph.D., The University of Massachusetts
Gary M. Boerckel (1979)
Music
Director of Lycoming Scholars
B.A., B.M., Oberlin College
M.M., Ohio University
D.M.A., University of Iowa
Clarence W. Burch (1962)
Physical Education
B.S., M.Ed., University of Pittsburgh
Richard R. Erickson (1973)**
Astronomy and Physics
B.A., University of Minnesota
M.S., Ph.D., University of Chicago
Edward G. Gabriel (1977)
Biology
B.A., M.A., Alfred University
M.S., Ph.D., The Ohio State University
Stephen R. Griffith (1970)
Philosophy
A.B., Cornell University
M.A., Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh
David K. Haley (1980)
Mathematics
BA., Acadia University
M.S., Ph.D., Queens University
Habil., Universitat Mannheim
Bruce M. Hurlbert (1982)
Director of Library Services
B.A., The Citadel
M.S.L.S., Florida State University
Moon H. Jo (1975)
Sociology
B.A., Valparaiso University
M.A., Howard University
Ph.D., New York University
Eldon F. Kuhns, II (1979)
Accounting
A.B., Lycoming College
M. Accounting, University of Oklahoma
C.P.A. (Pennsylvania)
Paul A. MacKenzie (1970)
German
A.B., A.M., Ph.D., Boston University
Robert J.B. Maples (1969)
French
A.B., University of Rochester
Ph.D., Yale University
Richard J. Morris (1976)**
History
B.A., Boston State College
M.A., Ohio University
Ph.D., New York University
Kathleen D. Pagana (1982)**
Nursing
B.SJ^., University of Maryland
M.S.N. , Ph.D., University of Pennsylvania
Doris P. Parrish (1983)
Nursing
B.S., SUNY at Pittsburgh
M.S., Russell Sage College
Ph.D., University of Texas at Austin
Kathryn M. Ryan (1981)
Psychology
B.S., University of Illinois
M.S., Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh
iBcw
GeneD. Sprechini (1981)
Mathematics
B.S.. Wilkes College
M.A., Ph.D.. SUNY at Binghamton
Fred M. Thayer, Jr. (1976)
Music
A.B., Syracuse University
B.M., Ithaca College
MM., SUNY at Binghamton
DMA., Cornell University
H. Bruce Weaver (1974)
Business Administration
B.BA., Stetson University
J.D., Vanderbilt University
M.BA., University of Central Florida
John M. Wheian, Jr. (1971)
Philosophy
B.A., University of Notre Dame
Ph.D., The University of Texas at Austin
Robert A. Zaccaria (1973)
Biology
B.A., Bridgewater College
Ph.D., University of Virginia
Melvin C. Zimmerman (1979)
Biology
B.S., SUNY at Cortland
M.S., Ph.D., Miami University
Assistant Professors
Susan Alexander (1991)
Sociology
B.A., M.A., Ph.D., American University
Penelope Austin (1988)
English
A.B., University of Michigan
M.A., University of Missouri-Columbia
Ph.D., University of Utah
Bernard J. Balleweg (1985)
Psychology
B.S., Colorado State University
M.A., Ph.D., University of Montana
Henry E. Berkheimer (1988)
Chemistry
A.B., Dickinson College
M.S., Bucknell University
Ph.D., The Pennsylvania State University
Steven Bidlake (1988)
English
BA., Western Washington University
M.A., University of Oregon
Ph.D., University of Washington
Barbara F. Buedel (1989)
Spanish
B.A., University of Kentucky
M.A., M. Phil., PhD., Yale University
John H. Conrad (1959)
Education
B.S., Mansfield State College
M.A., New York University
Santusht S. DeSilva (1983)
Mathematics
B.Sc, University of Sri Lanka
M.A., Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh
Michelle S. Ficca (1985)
Nursing
B.S., Stroudsburg State University
M.S., The Pennsylvania State University
David Fisher (1984)
Physics
B.S., The Pennsylvania University
M.S., Ph.D., University of Delaware
Ruth Ann Fulton (1989)
Nursing
B.S2^.,Bloomsburg University
M.S., Pennsylvania State University
Amy Golahny (1985)
Art
BA., Brandeis University
M.A., Williams College - Clark Art Institute
M. Phil., and Ph.D., Columbia University
Bahrain Golshan (1989)
Mathematical Science
B.S., Jundi Shapour University, Iran
M.S., Kent State University
Ph.D., The Pennsylvania State University
G. W. Hawkes (1989)
English
B.A., University of Washington-Seattle
M.A., PhD., SUNY-Binghamton
Thomas J. Henninger (1966)
Director of Computer Services; Mathematics
B.S., Wake Forest College
M.A., University of Kansas
Owen F. Herring (1965)
Philosophy
B.A., Wake Forest College
Rachael Hungerford (1989)
Education
A.A., Cayuga County Community College
B.S., State University of New York
at Plattsburgh
Ph.D., University of MassachusettslAmherst
Janet Hurlbert (1985)
Instructional Services Librarian
B.A., M.A., University of Denver
Mary Lou Kasputis
Nursing
B.S.,Villa Maria College
M.S., Case Western Reserve University
Mehrdad Madresehee (1986)
Economics
B.S., University of Tehran
M.S., National University of Iran
M.S., University of Idaho
Ph.D., Washington State University
Chriss McDonald (1987)
Chemistry
B.S., Manchester College
Ph.D., Miami University of Ohio
Carole Moses (1982)
English
B.A., Adelphi University
M.A., The Pennsylvania State University
Ph.D.. SUNY at Binghamton
Bradley Nason (1983)
Mass Communication
A.B., Lycoming College
M.A., The American University
Michael R. Smith (1989)
Mass Communication
B.A., University of Maryland
M.S., Shippensburg University
Arthur Sterngold (1988)
Business Administration
B.A., Princeton University
M.B A., Northwestern University
Larry R. Strauser (1973)
Sociology
A.B., Lycoming College
M.PA., University of Arizona
Robert E. Van Voorst (1989)
Religion
B.A., Hope College
M.Div., Western Theological Seminary
S.T.M., Ph.D., Union Theological Seminary
Richard Weida (1987)
Mathematics
B.S., Muhlenberg College
M.S., Ph.D., University of Delaware
Budd F. Whitehill (1957)
Physical Education
B.S., Lock Haven University
M.Ed., The Pennsylvania State University
Richard E. Wienecke (1982)
Accounting
A.B., Lycoming College
M.S.,Bucknell University
M.BA., Long Island University
C.PA. (Pennsylvania and New York)
Fredric M. Wild, Jr. (1978)
Mass Communication
B.A., Emory University
M.A., Ph.D., Ohio State University
M.Div., Yale Divinity School
David H. Wolfe (1989)
Physics
B.S., Lock Haven State College
M.S., Pennsylvania State University
Ph.D., Kent State University
Troy A. Wolfskin (1989)
Chemistry
B.S., Albright College
Ph.D., University of Virginia
Peiyuan Yan (1989)
Mathematical Science
B.S., E. China Inst, of Tech.
M.S., Ph.D., Pennsylvania State University
Instructors
Margaret Gray-Vickrey (1986)
Nursing
B.S.N., SUNY at Pittsburgh
M.S., Northern Illinois University
Edward Henninger (1988)
Business Administration
B.S., Shippensburg University
M.BA., Shippensburg University
Deborah J. Holmes (1976)
Physical Education
B.S., M.S.. The Pennsylvania State University
Diane C. Janda (1988)
Music
B.M., University of Texas at Austin
M.M., University of Cincinnati, College-Con-
servatory of Music
Nancy Jo Roberts (1989)
Business Administration
B.S., Northwestern State University
M.BA., Louisiana State University
Lecturers & Special
Appointments
Ronda L. Bird, R.D. (1986)
B.A., Indiana University
Don M. Larrabee II (1972)
Lecturer in Law
A.B., Franklin and Marshall College
LL.B., Fordham University
Gerald M. McKeegan
Nursing
B.S., Philadelphia College of
Pharmacy and Science
Part Time Faculty
Joan Moyer Clark (1987)
Music and Theatre
Roger Davis (1984)
Mathematics
B.S.Ed., Clarion State College;
M.S.Ed., Bucknell University
Sherril D. Ingram (1991)
Nursing
B.SM., University of Pittsburgh;
M.S.N., University of Virginia
James Logue (1976)
English
A.B., M.S., Bucknell University
Linda Potter (1990)
Nursing
B.S.N., Lycoming College
Thomas M. Shivetts (1986)
Education
B.S., Lycoming College;
M.S. Ed., Bucknell University
Gary Steele (1988)
Music
B.M., Juilliard School;
M.M., Eastman School of Music
Steve Uzupis (1989)
Accounting
B.S., Pennsylvania State University;
M.S., University of Houston;
C.P.A., Texas
Elliott Weiss (1989)
Accounting
B.A., City College of New York;
JD, University of Syracuse;
Masters in Taxation, New York University
Applied Music Teachers
Diana L. Bailey (1986)
Saxophone
B.S., Susquehanna University
Jean Grube (1990)
Voice
B.M., Susquehanna University
Richard J. Lakey (1979)
Organ and Piano
A.B., Westminster Choir College;
M.A., Indiana University of Pennsylvania
Robert Leidhecker (1989)
Percussion
B.M., Mansfield University
Albert Nacinovich (1972)
Brass
B.A., in Music Education, Mansfield
University;
M.S., in Music Education, Ithaca College
Mary Russell (1936)
Music
B.S., Susquehanna University
Conservatory of Music;
M.A., The Pennsylvania State University
Marcus Smolensky (1990)
Viola
B.M., Eastman School of Music;
M.M., Cleveland Institute of Music
D. Charles Truitt (1990)
Guitar
B.M., Hartt School of Music;
M.A., Mary wood College
Judith A. White
Voice
B. Mus., Susquehanna University
Edwin E. Zdzinski (1987)
Violin
B.S.,SUNYatFredonia
M.A., Ed.D., Columbia University
Teachers College
Adjunct Faculty & Staff
Galal Amed, M.D.
Medical Director, School of
Medical Technology
Divine Providence Hospital
Williamsport,PA 17701
Vivian Anagnoste, M.D.
Medical Director, Clinical Laboratory
Science Program
Rolling Hill Hospital
ElkinsParKPA 19117
Brook Barrie (1984)
Sculpture
Johnson Atelier Technical
Institute of Sculpture
Paul J. Cherney, M.D.
Medical Director, School of
Medical Technology
Abington Memorial Hospital
Abington.PA 19001
Gerald R. Fahs, M.D.
Medical Director, School of
Medical Technology
The Lancaster General Hospital
Lancaster, PA 17603
Nadine Gladfelter, M.S., MT (ASCP)
Program Director, School of
Medical Technology
The Lancaster General Hospital
Lancaster, PA 17603
Phyllis Gotkin, Ph.D., MT (ASCP)
Program Director, Clinical Laboratory
Science Program
Rolling Hill Hospital
Ellcins Park, PA 19117
Barbara Kravitz, B.S., MT (ASCP)
Education Coordinator, Clinical
Laboratory Science Program
Rolling Hill Hospital
Elkins Park, PA 19117
Jon Lash (1984)
Sculpture
Johnson Atelier Technical
Institute of Sculpture
Loretta A. Moffatt, B.S., MT (ASCP)
Program Director, School
of Medical Technology
Divine Providence Hospital
Williamsport.PA 17701
Andrzej Pitynski (1984)
Sculpture
Johnson Atelier Technical
Institute of Sculpture
Barbara J. Scheelje, B.S., MT (ASCP)
Program Director, School
of Medical Technology
Abington Memorial Hospital
Abington, PA 19001
Herk Van Tongeren (1984)
Sculpture
Johnson Atelier Technical
Institute of Sculpture
Medical Staff
Robert S. Yasui, M.D.
College Surgeon
M.D., Temple University
Athletic Staff
James Bodner
Assistant Men's Basketball Coach
Clarence Burch
Head Men's Basketball Coach
William Byham
Sports Information
Robert Curry
Associate Athletic Director
Rees Daneker
Assistant Men's Basketball Coach
Cheryl Dempsey
Head Volleyball Coach
Robert Eaton
Head Soccer/Golf Coach
Mike Fiamingo
Assistant Wrestling Coach
Frank Girardi, Jr.
Assistant Football Coach
Frank Girardi, Sr.
Athletic Director, Head Football Coach
Robert George
Assistant Football Coach
Gene Haupt
Assistant Football Coach
Suzanne Helfant
Head Softball Coach/Assistant Women's
Basketball Coach
Brett Hoffman
Athletic Trainer
Deborah J. Holmes
Chair, Physical Education Department/Head
Women's Tennis Coach/Intramural
Program Director
Mike Hudock
Assistant Men's Basketball Coach
James Kramer
Head Men'sAVomen's Swimming Coach
Head Men's/Women's Cross Country Coach
Joseph Lumbis
Equipment Manager
Terry Mantle
Assistant Football Coach/Assistant
Track Coach
Joseph Mark
Head Tennis Coach
Dan Muthler
Assistant Wrestling Coach
James Orr
Head Women's Basketball Coach
Deb Phillips
Secretary, Athletic Department
Budd Whitehill
Head Wrestling Coach
Mike Weber
Assistant Football Coach
Steve Wiser
Assistant Football Coach/Head
Track and Field Coach
iraW
Administrative
Assistants
Trudy L. Beachem
Gift Records Specialist
Michael J. Beatty
Security Officer
Theresa M. Beatty
Faculty Secretary, Science Department
Nathalie R. Beck
Executive Secretary to President & Vice
President For Development
Emily C. Biichle
Coordinator of Facility
Scheduling and Purchasing
Karen N. Bloom
Financial Aid Associate
Lynette C. Bower
Secretary, Business Manager
Elizabeth L. Boyd
Assistant to President
Brigitte C. Brahms
Telecommunications Coordinator
Mary M. Camp
Nursing Skills Lab Instructor
Barbara J. Carlin
Executive Secretary, Admissions
& Financial Aid
Deborah A. Caulkins
Slide Curator and Gallery Coordinator
Diana L. Cleveland
Coordinator of Academic
Services for Mathematical Sciences
Richard L. Cowher
Printing Services Coordinator
Elizabeth G. Cowles
Secretary, Career Development
June V. Creveling
Secretary, Building and
Grounds & Safety & Security
Mary E. Dahlgren
Assistant for Admissions/Computer
Applications
Richard C. Dingle
Sub Desk Aide
Julia E. Dougherty
Library Technician, Circulation
Katherine A. Dougherty
Communications Officer
David F. Downing
Theatre Technician
Patricia R. Eagleson
Communications Officer
Gladys M. Engel
Secretary, Theatre Department
June L. Evans
Faculty Secretary, Nursing Department
Robert W. Faus
Mailroom Assistant &
Assistant Press Operator
Paula M. Fisher
Admissions Data Entry Clerk/Receptionist
S. Jean Gair
Faculty Secretary, Music & Art Departments
John E. Gohrig
Mailroom Coordinator
Diane J. Hassinger
Executive Secretary to Dean of the College
Bernadine G. Hileman
Printing Services Assistant
Carol E. Hill
Faculty Secretary
Robert L. Hill
Library Evening Proctor
Barbara E. Horn
Faculty Secretary, Education Department
W. Latricia James
Faculty Secretary, Mass Communications
Diane M. Keeler
Accounting Clerk
David M. Kelchner
Records and Data Manager
Paula D. Klein
Microcomputer Lab Monitor
Gladys W. Knauss
Sub Desk Aide
Richard D. Lane
Library Evening Proctor
Gale D. Laubacher
Cashier/Bookkeeper
Donna M. Laughrey
Campus Store Assistant
Peggie A. LeFever
Personnel Coordinator
Shirley D. Lloyd
Campus Store Assistant/Clerk
Carol A. Long
Assistant, Alumni & Parent Relations
John J. Maness
Security Officer
Dorothy E. Maples
Box Office Manager
D. Maxine McCormick
Recorder
Nielin L. Meredith
Assistant Data Coordinator
Stephen F. Mileto
Security Officer
Rebecca R. Miller
Secretary, Financial Aid
Yvonne L. Miller
Computer Programmer/Operator
Roberta M. Mitteer
Sub Desk Aide
Marilyn MuUings
Faculty Secretary
Carol T. Murray
Coordinator of Academic Computer Services
Marlene L. Neece
Library Technician, AV/ILL
Judith E. Noble
Library Technician, Acquisitions
Jeffrey A. Norton
Security Officer
Marion R. Nyman
Bursar/Executive Secretary to the Treasurer
Martha W. O'Brien
Assistant to the Registrar
Carl H. Pederson
Security Officer
Rosalie S. Pfaff
Switchboard Operator
Deborah E. Phillips
Secretary to Director of Athletics
A
Madeline A. Pinkerton
Secretary, Athletics Department
Melissa S. Pinkerton
Assistant, Freshman Dean & Annual Support
David W. Poeth
Speical Assistant to Superintendent
of Buildings & Grounds
Pearl Ringler
Campus Store Assistant
Elizabeth L. Ruesskamp
Sub Desk Aide
Sherry L. Schaefer
Secretary for Residence Life
Fern L. Schon
Payroll Clerk & Student Loan Coordinator
Anna L. Seidel
Alumni Records Clerk
Richard D. Sheddy
Communications Officer
Penny S. Siddle
Microcomputer Lab Monitor
Patricia L. Strauss-CundifT
Systems Analyst
Sheran L. Sank
Faculty Secretary
Diane M. Thomas
Computer Programmer
Alan N. Thompson
Security Officer
Carole A. Thompson
Faculty Secretary
Patricia J. Triaca
Library Technician, Cataloging
Deborah E. Weaver
Manager, Residence Halls Operations
Donna A. Weaver
Assistant, Student Activities
Geraldine H. Wescott
Library Technician, Periodicals
Joetta D. Witiak
Nursing Skills Lab Instructor
Patricia S. Wittig
Secretary, Campus Ministries
Melissa C. Wolf
Library Technician, ILL
Pamela E. Wolfskin
Secretary
Jean C. Wool
Executive Secretary to
Dean of Student Services
Richard J. Wright
Mailroom Assistant
Scott A. Wright
Security Officer
Cheryl A. Yearick
Library Technician, Govt. Pub/ILL
Gregory A. Young
Security Officer
^^
1991 -92 Alumni
Association
Executive Board
1 he Alumni Association of Lycoming
College has a membership of nearly 12,000
men and women. It is governed by an
executive board consisting of 24 members-at-
large, elected through mail ballot by the
membership of th association. The board
also has members representing specific
geographic areas, the senior class president,
the student body president, and past
presidents of the last graduating class the
Student Association of Lycoming College.
The association annually designates one
alumni representative as a nominee for a
three-year term on the College Board of
Trustees. The Director of Alumni and Parent
Relations directs the activities of the alumni
office. The Alumni Association has the
following purpose as stated in it constitution:
"As an off -campus constituency, the associa-
tion's purpose is to seek ways of maintaining
an active and mutually beneficial relationship
between the College and its alumni, utilizing
their talents, resources and counsel to further
the objectives and programs of Lycoming
College."
All former students of Williamsport
Dickinson Seminary and all former students
who have successfully completed one year of
Study at Williamsport Dickinson Junior
College or Lycoming College are considered
members of the association.
Acting as the representative of alumni on
the campus and working also with under-
graduates, the alumni office is responsible for
keeping alumni informed and interested in
the programs, growth, and activities of the
College through regular publications mailed
to all alumni on record. Arrangements for
Homecoming, class reunions, club meetings,
and similar activities are coordinated through
this office. Through the Lycoming College
Annual Fund, the alumni office is closely
associated with the development program of
the College. Communications to the alumni
association should be addressed to the Office
of Alumni and Parent Relations.
1990-91 ALUMNI
ASSOCIATION
EXECUTIVE BOARD
Term Expires October 1991
Cynthia Pennington Clippinger (Mrs.) '66
Mark A. GaNung '85
Mark A. Gibbon '83
John G. HoUenback '47
Eleanor Layton Loomis (Mrs.) '60
Carole-Kay Miller Lundy '63
Otto L. Sonder, Jr. (Dr.) '46
Jean R. Alpert Staiman (Mrs.) '47
Term Expires October 1992
Brenda P. Alston-Mills '67
Melvin H. Campbell, Jr. '70
Elizabeth (Betty) J. Paris (Mrs.) '70
Barbara N. Price (Dr.) '60
C. Edward Receski '60
Larry A. Robbins '81
Barbara L. Sylk '73
Ned W. Weller (Rev.) '54
Term Expires October 1993
Patricia S. Courtwright (Mrs.) '74
David T. Franklin '74
Ronald A. Frick '83
William S. Kieser '65
Everett W. Rubendall '70
Richard A. Russell '37
Ann L. Shields (Ms.) '87
Robin N. Straka (Mrs.) '79
Members of the Board
Serving a One- Year Term
Student Association of
Lycoming College (SALC),
President - Eric A. Reff
SALC Past President -
Joanne C. Marchesano
'91 Senior Class President -
Diane E. DeNisco
'90 Senior Class President -
Lonna K. Zook
Area Alumni
Representatives
Kent T. Baldwin '64 - Greater Williamsport
Patrick J. Cerillo '77 - Northern New Jersey
Amy Gehron Chambers '70 - Pittsburgh
Ann Weitzel Fuhrman (Mrs.) '79 -
Southcentral Pennsylvania
Barry C. Hamilton '70 ■
Greater Philadelphia
Robert & Marjorie Ferrell Jones '48
and '50 - Greater Rochester Area
Charles J. Kocian '50 - Washington, DC
James G. Scott '70 - New England
Mi.
Index
Academic Advisement 14
Academic Calendar 2
Academic Honesty/Standing 19
Academic Honors 20
Academic Program 7
Accounting Curriculum 37
Accounting-Mathematics (EIM) 40
Admission to Lycoming 140
Advanced Placement 20
Advanced Standing by Transfer 140
Advisory Committees 14
Health Professions 14
Legal Professions 15
Medical Technology 14
Theological Professions 15
Allopathic Medicine, Advisement for 14
American Studies (EIM) 40
Anthropology Curriculum 127
Application Fee and Deposits 144
Applied Music Requirements 105
Art Curriculum 41
Astronomy and Physics Curriculum 48
Athletics Training 1 16
Athletic Staff 169
Audit 25
Awards 20
BFA Degree 8
Biology Curriculum 54
Board of Trustees 157
BSN Degree 8
Business Administration Curriculum 59
Campus Facilities 154
Capitol Semester 32
Career Development Services 137
Chemistry Curriculum 63
Christian Ministry, Advisement for 15
Class Attendance 18
College and the Church 6
College Level Examination
Program (CLEP) 20
Computer Science Curriculum 95
Conduct, Standards of 139
Contingency Deposits 145
Cooperative Programs 29
Engineering 29
Environmental Studies 29
Forestry 29
Medical Technology 30
Military Science 31
Optometry 30
Podiatric Medicine 31
Sculpture 32
Counseling, Personal 137
Course Credit by Examination 20
Criminal Justice (EIM) 66
Degree Programs/Requirements 7
Departmental Honors 25
Deposits/Deposit Refunds 145
Distribution Requirements 9
English 10
Fine Arts 10
Foreign Language 10
History and Social Science 11
Mathematics 10
Natural Science 10
Philosophy 10
Religion 10
Economics Curriculum 67
Education Curriculum 70
Education Financing Plans 145
Educational Opportunity Grants 146
Engineering, Cooperative Program 29
English Curriculum 70
English Requirement 10
Entrance Examination (CEEB) 20
Environmental Studies 29
Established Interdisciplinary Major (EIM). 12
Federal Grants and Loans 151-152
Fees 144
Financial Aid/Assistance 145
Fine Arts Requirements 10
Foreign Language Requirement 10
Foreign Languages and
Literatures Curriculum 79
^B^
Forestry, Cooperative Program 29
French Curriculum 80
German Curriculum 81
Grading System 16
Graduation Requirements 7
Greek Curriculum 83
Health Professions Careers 14
Health Services 138
Hebrew Curriculum 83
History Curriculum 85
History Requirements 11
Honor Societies 20
Independent Study 26
Interdisciplinary Majors 12
Established Majors (EIM) 12
Individual Majors (IIM) 12
International Studies 89
Internship Programs 27
Johnson Atelier 43
Legal Professions, Advisement for 15
Literature (EIM) 91
Loans 152
London Semester 32
Major 11
Admission to 11
Departmental 12
Interdisciplinary (EIM, IIM) 12
Mass Communications (EIM) 91
Mathematical Sciences 95
Mathematical Requirements 10
May Term 27
Medical School, Advisement for 14
Medical History 139
Medical Technology 30
Military Science 101
Minor 12
Music Curriculum 102
National Direct Student Loans (NDSL). . 152
Natural Science Requirement 10
Near East Culture and
Archaeology (EIM) 106
Nursing 107
Optometry 30
Optometry School, Advisement for 14
Osteopathy School, Advisement for 14
Part-time Student Opportunities 28
Payment of Fees 145
Philadelphia Semester 31
Philosophy Curriculum 1 12
Philosophy Requirement 10
Physical Education Curriculum 116
Physics Curriculum 48
Placement Services 137
Podiatric Medicine,
Cooperative Program 31
Political Science Curriculum 117
Psychology Curriculum 120
Refunds 145
Registration 15
Religion Curriculum 123
Religion Requirement 10
Repeated Courses 17
Reserve Officer Training
Corps Program (ROTC) 31
Residence and Residence Halls 138
Scholarships/Grants 146
Scholarships (ROTC) 153
Scholar Program 33
Sculpture 43
Social Science Requirement 11
Sociology-Anthropology Curriculum 127
Spanish Curriculum 83
Special Features 25
Independent Study 26
Internship Program 27
May Term 27
Overseas Studies Opportunities 28
State Grants and Loans 151
Student Enrichment Semester (SES) 32
Student Records 18
Study Abroad 28
Supplemental Educational
Opportunity Grant (SEOG) 151
Theatre Curriculum 132
Theological Professions, Advisement 15
Unit Course System 16
United Nations Semester 32
Veterinary School, Advisement for 14
Washington Semester 32
Withdrawal from College 143
Women's Studies 136
Work-Study Grants 153
Writing Across The Curriculum Program. . . 9
i^
Communicating With
Lycoming College
Please address specific
inquires as follows:
Director of Admissions:
Admissions; requests for publications
Treasurer:
Payment of bills; expenses
Director of Financial Aid:
Scholarships and loan fund;
financial assistance
Dean of College:
Academic programs; faculty;
faculty activities
Assistant Dean for Freshmen:
Freshman Seminar; freshman
academic concems
Dean of Student Services:
Some activities; residence halls;
religious life; health services;
academic support services
Registrar:
Student records; transcript requests;
academic policies
Career Development Center:
Career counseling; employment
opportunities
Executive Director for College
Advancement:
Institutional relations; aimual fund;
gift programs
Director of Alumni and
Parent Relations:
Alumni information; parent support
Director of Public and
Media Relations:
Public information; publications;
sports information; media relations
All correspondence
should be addressed to:
Lycoming College
Williamsport, PA 17701
The College telephone number
is (717) 321-4000
Visitors
Lycoming welcomes visitors to the
campus. If you would like a guided tour,
call the Office of Admissions
(717) 321-4126 before your visit to
arrange a mutually convenient time.
Toll Free Number 1-800-345-3920
Lycoming College welcomes applications
from prospective students regardless of age,
sex. race, religion, handicap, finances,
national or ethnic origin, or color. Lycoming
does not discriminate on the basis of age, sex,
race, religion, handicap, finances, national
or ethnic origin, or color in the administra-
tion of any of its policies and programs.
r
^^cx
• ^
>H CD tS
^
^
G
C/3
Z
5'
3
V3
^
0
>
Tl
"1
0
2:
0
00
00
■0
0
NM
0
C/3
^
p.
a
0
c;3
>
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11